Home

User Manual for - Polaris Electronics A/S

1. Transverse metacentric height Transverse metacentric height of the vessel meters Transverse metacentric height is the vertical separation of the center of gravity and the transverse metacenter 3 Check the Enable ship response calculation checkbox so that the Danger zone was calculated and displayed in the Inspect Ship Position panel 4 Check the Show alarm of resonance condition checkbox to enable the alarm in case a resonance condition occurs during navigation along the route 5 You can save a set of parameters to a file in order to use them later To save parameters press the Save button in the Save as dialog indicate the location and name of the file and press Save The set of ship response parameters will be saved to an xm1 file 6 To load previously saved sets of parameters press the Load button in the Open dialog select the file with parameters and press Open The parameters will be loaded and displayed in the corresponding fields of the Ship Response window 7 To save changed parameters and close the Ship Response window press OK To close the window without saving changes press Cancel Page 132 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 NAVIGATION 7 1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track Position of the own ship can be monitored in the chart view The own ship symbol is displayed in the chart view in coordinates coming from the primary position source The elements of the
2. N N X a nex N 4 a N N e K MENU eee Figure 122 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab display of tropical cyclones 3 The cyclone observed positions are displayed with red colored symbols g the forecasted positions are displayed with white colored circles The position of the cyclone at the time set in the time setup tool in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab is indicated with a yellow colored circle L Page 124 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 When you point with the mouse pointer at one of the cyclone positions a tool tip appears with the cyclone name date and time when the cyclone is expected in the position wind speed and wind gust speed 5 If there is a route going near the cyclone trajectory the dangerous route legs will be highlighted with purple color in the chart view the same color will be used to indicate the dangerous time for navigating along the route in the Weather gt Weather Time Series tab graphs 6 7 3 Display of Ice Situation Ice situation data are distributed by Jeppesen Marine as an individual weather product AN IMPORTANT Ice situation data are based on the information received from satellites the day before the data are available for download from the Jeppesen Marine weather server Therefore the ice situation data can be only used as a reference and in no way can the data be used to navigate nea
3. gt TLL Target latitude and longitude Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Target number name position and time tag for use in systems tracking targets S TiL lt 7 Llilell 2 a Vivi 2 ay Cac Rhmmssvss a a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt M I Target latitude en CC ee 9301584 10 Page 223 of 259 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software oeo e o opo pe Target status L Lost tracked target has been lost Q Query target in the process of acquisition T tracking Reference target R null otherwise gt TTD Tracked target data Standard IEC 62388 Ed 1 0 2007 This sentence is used to transmit tracked radar targets in a compressed format This enables the transfer of many targets with minimum overhead New target labels are defined by the TLB sentence to reduce bandwidth use Transmission of up to four targets in the same sentence is possible TTD hh hh x aS x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Total hex number of sentences needed to transfer the message l to FF Hex sentence number 1 to FF Sequential message identifier 0 to 9 Encapsulated tracked target data Number of fill bits 0 to 5 gt TTM Tracked target message Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 IMO Resolution A 820 1995 and MSC 64 67 Annex 4 Data associated with a tracked target relative to own ship s position 10 12 13 al 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 SST Sc SOUR Be Ae RE Bee Be SK ake By eee a a hhmmss ss a
4. 2009 10 02 13 21 2009 10 02 13 21 2009 10 02 13 21 Updating Log Review Updates e M Figure 51 Data gt Auto Updating tab Updates Log and Updates Review The Updates Log pane displays all charts datasets to which updates have been applied The information relating to each dataset includes dataset name the Name column update status accepted or declined the Status column the number of updates applied to the dataset the Number column and the date when the updates were applied the Date column When the updates are imported from the S 57 format the import log is kept In case there were any problems during the import process the log file can be viewed the Remark button becomes active and to view the log just press it In case there were no problems during the import process the import log is unavailable and the Remark button remains dimmed The Updates Review list on the right part of the pane is made up of records of the updates sorted by the updates issuing hydrographic offices by datasets to which the updates were applied and by numbers of files in which the updates are stored The tool tips should assist you in viewing long names and remarks Information about each correction is given in a short form For example it does not contain the past and present cartographic object position but it is just written as Modified Double click on any correction in order to highlight it
5. Department for Planning and gt Harbor 15000 5000 Plan 5 000 Apply Mark All Clear All Figure 46 Data gt Chart Catalogue tab 2 Select a database in the databases drop down list The list of charts grouped by issuing organizations will be displayed in the pane under the databases drop down list 3 To expand a group click on the plus sign next to the group name In the expanded list names of charts will be presented To collapse the group click on the minus sign next to the group name 4 Select a chart to view information about it in the pane to the right from the charts list To scroll the chart view so that to display a specified chart double click on the chart name in the charts list Chart Add Remove Dynamic ee lt E q xX Catalogue Database E Licensing Updating 57 Professional DataSet filename Z11E9600 C00 Chart Boundaries Source identification code 004 Ministerio de Defensa Naciol Source producing agency Ministerio de Defensa Overview 40 000 000 5000 000 004 Z11E9600 Producing agency Jeppesen Italia S r l World 5000 000 1500000 010 Z11E9610 z General 1500000 500000 011 Z11E9620 Coastal 500 000 150 000 028 Z12E9360 Intended usage 2 Ha Orai Last update applied date 02 11 2008 Coastal Approach 150000 50000 Issue date 24 09 2005 Approach 50000 15000 040 712E9640 oe Edition Number 1 Harbor 15000 5000 Tot
6. In the Position Report tab the following target information is displayed MMSI A unique 9 digit number that is assigned to a DSC radio station Ship Name Name of the AIS target in case the target has any name CPA Closest point of approach to the own ship TCPA Time to the closest point of approach Type of ship Type of the AIS target Lat Lon Latitude and longitude of the AIS target Position accuracy accuracy of the AIS target positioning COG Course over ground SOG Speed over ground HDG Heading of the AIS target ROT Rate of turn Nav Status Navigation status of the target e g Under way using engine Range Bearing distance and bearing from the own ship to the target Page 166 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software In the Static and Voyage Related Data tab the following target information is displayed e IMO Number the IMO assigned target number e Call Sign a unique designation for the transmitting station e Ship dimensions length and width of the target e Position ref point defines the precise location of the positioning device on the target four parameters are used A B C and D Figure 179 e Type of pos device the type of the device defining the target position e ETA estimated time of arrival of the target to its destination e Draught draught of the target Figure 179 e Destination
7. danelec User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software Dolphin ECDIS v5 0 82 For use with C MAP CM 93 Edition 3 electronic charts Document Number 9301584 Version Number 1 0 Date April 2010 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Revision record 1 0 March 2010 Original issue of document 9301584 10 Page 3 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software CONTENTS RGIS TOM Re CONG ee aaa e ER EE O G ER TEET E OE OEE 3 l INTRODUC TON rni a a E 9 Wi User Manual St Cine ensa EE EE 9 LZ Typographie CONVENU ONS sorap e A 9 k3 Normative Refere iCe Yena aa a OGS 9 2 PEDISINTERFACE oirn e ee ners es nC ne ne ee Nee 11 21 Stanmg and Terminating the ECDIS enpensi E E E E A 11 a amma ET 0 6 03 amen eee ee me erent et een etter ame armen erat eae ene ees ane eernratr err crane ene Meat ao eer ran ere eo 11 A S Be AU eren A E E I 12 24 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Pane liitscateind coe tiie tate iene a dee 16 29 TRUMCli Oma li Buttons Meeusen a aien e a scott E se Seraea bose see E vedere nats ec EEN 16 20 UMC Oma Pane Sursee a e ei naaa aas 17 2L TAOUK CVS E SE aa eee 18 3 ECDISSETUP erarego ese te irre et eee ee 19 JA SEM Se BLU east soa stars aa oa oa era soe ee acento eee a et 19 3 1 1 Measurement Units and iin arosi that ashe a eta tee a a ee aa tS gt Sa 19 3 12 Montor Bmentness Seu arosi A A a 20 3 1 3 Systemi C heck UP nresep nn a E E 21 3 1 4 Diek Space Cono ea E NNR 22 35
8. 21443310 e Obstruction Category of obstruction wellhead Value of sounding lt unknown gt Added 2 10 2009 0 Update Information Wellheads Extrascl Author of update TK ae Date of review 02 10 2009 09 27 50 Added 2 10 20090 Date of update 02 10 2009 09 26 58 Xx Deleted 2 10 2009 gt Removed from display Highlight Reject Figure 52 Chart gt Manual Update tab manual updates history Page 70 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software To expand the list of objects click on the plus sign next to the dataset name To collapse the list of objects click on the minus sign next to the dataset name To expand the list of actions performed with an object click on the plus sign next to the object name To collapse the list of actions click on the minus sign next to the object name To view detailed information about entries of the manual updates history tree select the entry The information will be displayed in the pane to the right from the History pane To hide a manual update object select its entry in the updates history tree and press the Removed from display button The object is hidden and the Removed from display button remains pressed To display the object again select it in the history tree and outpress the Removed from display button To highlight the updated object in the chart view double click on one of the actions t
9. 4P NOTE There is a possibility that the chart has depth contours in it but the ECDIS doesn t recognize them It happens because the ECDIS only recognizes contours if they bound depth areas In case you have doubts open the Object Info panel where you can see the depth contour objects and check if they bound depth areas or not see chapter 5 4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend The contours values are used to distinguish on the display between depth areas that are safe or unsafe for navigation The areas are filled with colors specified in standards The colors are as follows No C Map Presentation S 52 Presentation 1 Zero depth contour Shallow contour Dark blue Dark blue QP NOTE The contours values are used to highlight four depth areas To limit the highlighted areas to only two areas set the Two shades property in the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Depth settings tab In this case safe and unsafe waters are distinguished on the display 5 6 5 Depth Settings Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the overloading One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view Chart elements that can be displayed selectively are divided into four groups depth elements text elements light sectors and other elements of To display or hide elements from the Depth settings group do the following l Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation g
10. Figure 128 Non Figure 129 Selected selected own ship own ship symbol symbol Open the Inspect Ship Position panel where the result of the analysis of the current own ship position for the weather conditions at the given time is displayed To open the Inspect Ship Position panel press the Inspect Ship Pos button in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab To change the time for the evaluation of the own ship position move the time slider of the time setup tool in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab or drag the own ship symbol along the route left click on the symbol and holding the mouse button Time can be changed by the step set in the Step field in the time setup tool in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab Page 130 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software To read the Inspect Ship Position panel you need the following information 1 The Inspect Ship Position panel consists of two parts the informational part and the polar diagram part 2 Inthe informational part you can see the following data Date and time of the ship position in the upper part of the panel Ell Inspect Ship Position 11 02 2008 16 00 UTC 050 18 424N 006 18 095 W Coordinates of the ship position in the upper part of the panel Roll pitch and heave values estimated using the swell and total waves data in the lower part the left column 10 Weather pa
11. Figure 139 Navi gt LOP Position fix tab 9301584 10 Page 137 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software To complete the manual position fix task the following operations should be performed Plotting reference points in the chart view Entering results of measuring bearings and ranges to the reference objects Calculating the position Accepting the calculated position as the new own ship position AR V NH Additional parameters configuration is available corrections for constant errors of measuring devices Sh plot reference points in the chart view do the following 1 Press the Select reference point button to switch to the object selection mode 2 In the chart view point the mouse pointer at the observed object and right click on it The window with the list of all objects under the pointer will open SF NOTE Reference point plotting is only possible if the Navi gt Manual Observation tab is open and the Select reference point button is pressed If any other or no tab is open right clicking in the chart view opens the Object Info panel 3 Inthe objects list find the observed object and double click on it to select The Would you like to name the reference point window will open where you can enter the reference point name 46 Navigational systen E Underwater awash 44 Caution area W 46 Coverage 446 Unsurveyed area 44 Land area 44 Horizontal datum st
12. anes turn the best scale mode on left click on the indicator JE There are larger scale charts for the area Page 12 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Navigation Mode indicator has the following states The Navigation Mode indicator shows if the navigation mode is on or off Left click on the indicator to turn the Navigation mode on or off The indicator also shows other ECDIS modes that are currently on Navig Ta MarObj Planning PEL The navigation mode is on The navigation mode is off The mariners objects edit mode is on The route edit mode is on Data Display Type indicator has the following states The Data Display Type indicator shows which data display type is currently on see chapter 5 6 2 Display Type Base Cust Base af Standard f CTS Custom i The Base display type is on To switch to the Standard display type left click on the indicator In addition to Base display objects chart presentation settings adding elements to the chart view are on the Chart Chart Presentation tab The Standard display type is on To switch to the All other display type left click on the indicator In addition to Standard display objects chart presentation settings adding elements to the chart view are on the Chart Chart Presentation tab The All other display type is on All cartographic infor
13. x Start Play Back m Cycle playback Replayspeed x1 Main Ejugdyis CompleteTrack v System v Track v Voyage v Userrecords v Targets v AlS targets POS 2009 04 17 21 27 08 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn POS 2009 04 17 21 26 0 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 O 0 kn POS 2009 04 17 21 25 04 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn POS 2009 04 17 21 24 02 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn POS 2009 04 17 21 23 02 DR 43 00 829 N 009 38 924 W 0 0 0 0 kn m emme me e e o om oe emnon e o a e o o a a on al Easton aa at sa lia EE Figure 223 Log Book panel Page 198 of 259 9301584 10 6 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Set the date and time period at which you want to view log book records select the date in the Date drop down list and set the beginning time in the From field and the end time in the To field By default the log book is opened at the date that was viewed last For example to view today s log book the date has to be reset Set the time system for the time display select the Ship s Time or the UTC Time option in the drop down list to the right from the To field After the time has been set log book entries for the specified date and time will be displayed in the entries table Every entry in the log book contains the following information e Class Describes the type of information see below e Level Descri
14. 256 Unk Netforuse with position device Figure 210 The TCPA is violating the TCPA Critical value the collision danger line gets bold red 7 Vector length is decreased to 1 minute and ECS display is zoomed in to see more details t No official data available Refer to poper chart 1 66776x15 SHIP 17 02 40 2009 01 28 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Maximum CPA NM 20 i TCPA Limit nin EJE TEPA Critical min e P7 TargetVectors Apply Parameters Figure 211 Further decrease of vector length 9301584 10 Page 191 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 By using the ERBL the user can easily determine the amount of escape action necessary to pass astern of the target with the required safety margin 1 0 NM i e 60 degrees to starboard The TCPA Critical parameter must reflect the maneuvering characteristics of the ship VLCC will need more time to change its course than a HSC f No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 Figure 212 Use of the ERBL tool to assess the maneuver 9 Own ship has now changed course so that it will pass astern the target at a slightly less distance than the CPA limit f No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 Figure 213 The change of course by the own ship to avoid collision CPA is close to the set CPA Limit Page 192 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 10 It is important
15. Data from the log sensor are invalid Data from the log sensor are not being received Data from the sensor are invalid Data from the sensor are not being received No databases are registered in the system No databases are added to the view No charts are in the focus of the screen Chart view scale is too large larger than 1 1000 Latitude is more than 90 N S License for the current DB is not available Chart view scale is too small to display detailed charts e g 1 500 000 No licensed zone area in the chart view No databases are added to the view No charts are in the focus of the screen An Unserveyed area is displayed in the chart view Check configuration of the log sensor If changes in configuration are needed contact your system administrator Check that the log sensor is plugged to ECDIS and powered on Check configuration of the sensor If changes in configuration are needed contact your system administrator Check that the sensor is plugged to ECDIS and powered on Check the Data gt Databases tab Registered DB list Add all available databases to the view Data gt Add Remove Database tab Display any chart in the chart view Data gt Chart Catalogue tab select a DB expand any plus symbol and double click on any chart Zoom the chart view out 1 1 000 000 e g to Set Latitude to 0 Check the license availability in the Data gt
16. Depth contour DataSet filename 714481H0 C00 7 OPML SA Chart Title RIA DE MUROS Y NOIA DataSet source type Non official Source identification 415A Figure 176 Route gt Go to Waypoint tab Dangers and Cautions tabs 8 To view the waypoint in the chart view press the Show button to hide the waypoint outpress the Show button when pressed its name changes to Hide Page 164 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOLS 8 1 Echo Sounder If an echo sounder is registered in the ECDIS in the Config gt Input Output tab the own ship depth data are coming to the system The depth data are displayed in the navigational panel in the DPT line as well as in the Info gt Echo Sounder Diagram tab The DPT line in the navigational panel contains two values separated by a slash the first value is the depth from the water line to the transducer and the second value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom The echo sounder diagram is made up of the following elements l Time and depth axes the time axis is the horizontal axis and the depth axis is the vertical axis The time is measured in minutes the depth measurement units are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab in the Depth Elevation Size units section Echo Sounder Synchronization Monitor a ee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee u ia ee L 45 10min 9min
17. If you would like to receive e mails with weather package files at a given time each day the Scheduled download is the solution The Scheduled download option allows downloading all weather products listed in your subscription 4P NOTE The Scheduled download option is available only for e mail communication types Bro download weather data using the Scheduled download option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Press the arrow near the button to open the download options menu Select the Scheduled option The Weather Download Request dialog will open Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area TimeSeries Packages Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area TimeSeries Packages Date 15 12 2008 14 002 Monday Go Today Figure 105 Weather gt Weather Presentation Figure 106 Weather gt Weather Packages Easy Mode Download button Download button 2 Inthe Weather Download Request dialog you can add products to the request set products parameters remove products from the request set geographic areas for which forecasts are required set periods for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings Mi Weather Download Request 11 apr 2008 t Download at 12 00
18. LOC Local Mean Time LON Longitude Page 253 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software LOP Line of Position MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identities MOB Man Overboard N North N A Not Available NAVTEX Navigational Telex NMEA National Marine Electronics Association NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration RAD Radius RL Rhumb Line RM Relative motion RMS Root Mean Square ROT Rate of turn S South SAR Search and Rescue SENC System Electronic Navigational Chart SOG Speed Over the Ground SOLAS Safety of life at sea SPD Speed Page 254 of 259 STW Speed through Water TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach TM True motion TTA Time to Arrival TTG Time to Go UTC Universal Time Coordinated VRM Variable range marker W West WOL Wheel Over Line WOP Wheel Over Point WP WPT Waypoint 9301584 10 Page Index DD WAMGONW soeone nn a vest aetna sata ess 52 GC Tin ATAU Al ALE AL Coos ahaa ahs Sis tate Od cheat ht et 71 add manual update from NtM ccceeceeseeesesseeeseeeeeeeeeees 73 additional chart Gata 2s sscsesssedeseiccietecs ann 58 additional chart windows EW COW tactasertccasabveacisu E ea aaa aes 52 look ahead WMdOW enori E a 51 AIS tarp ets daliko a ee ea 166 taro ets display Gap Se me een ee eae Sener 168 PANS LOSU Alani aia a E reele ee Mean sales Maas 159 AIS tareets indicCatorivid i005 sine Wide ie
19. Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters To select a parameter tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name To unselect a weather parameter clear the checkbox After the parameters have been checked the graphs of the parameters development in time will be built in the graph pane The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis vertical axes are different for each weather parameter and represent the parameters magnitude When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the pointer position In the parameters list the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right of each parameter The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow vertical line Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Build for Pressure 1016 Pointon Chart Temperature 1 Route Windvectors 15 193 Pointon Chart v Precipitation 0 Lat N57 51 59 V Swellwaves 1 7 215 Lon E008 19 6 _ Totaiwaves 1 5 207 i Dew point temperaiure Total cloud cover 7 Apply Alarm zone Print Figure 124 Weather gt Weather Time Series tab time series for a point To export weather data for the selected point to a csv file press the Export butt
20. t be changed Heading and speed values for DR can t be changed Route is in the Voyage mode but most values in the Route monitoring panel are Unreachable Own ship prediction vector is not displayed Ship symbol is always displayed in the simplified form two concentric circles After the synchronization process detailed charts are not displayed on the PC to which DB was copied Databases Routes are not synchronized between the Route Planning Station and Master Backup computers or Page 210 of 259 Chart orientation coincides with the own ship course or the route direction respectively Navigation mode is turned off Position sensor Gyrocompass and Log data are available and valid Position sensor data are available and valid Gyrocompass and Log data are available and valid The own ship heading differs from the active route leg by more than 90 The Prediction vector option is not enabled Gyrocompass and Log sensors are not registered in the system properly Chart view scale value is too small The True scale option is not enabled ship image Databases synchronization comprises only copying and registering DB data licenses are not copied Route synchronization process between the Route Planning Station and Master and Backup computers is performed manually Turn the Navigation mode on the True and Relative motion modes only work when the Navigation mo
21. 2000 not recommended for new designs Estimate of position accuracy based on geometric dilution of precision GDOP and system noise in feet and nautical miles Limited utility no recommended replacement SSGG 1 N aR f hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Description Comments Accuracy in nautical miles N for nautical miles Accuracy in feet not processed P for feet not processed Page 222 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt THS True heading and status Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading This sentence includes a mode indicator field providing critical safety related information about the heading data and replaces the deprecated HDT sentence S THS x x a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt gt e Meteor gt TLB Target label Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Common target labels for tracked targets This sentence is used to specify labels for tracked targets to a device that provides tracked target data e g via the TTM Tracked target message This will allow all devices displaying tracked target data to use a common set of labels e g targets reported by two radars and displayed on an ECDIS S TLB X x c c xX x c c 4 is ae c c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Target number n reported by the device ee Additional label pairs
22. After you have subscribed to the Weather Forecast Service you should download weather subscription to the ECDIS Weather subscription information includes the list of products you have subscribed to For each product the following information is provided type of the geographical weather model validity period coverage area limit forecast period and time step and a list of forecast elements provided for each product pressure temperature and so on You are allowed to download only those weather products that are listed in your weather subscription Rro download weather subscription do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Subscription option from the drop down menu The Weather Subscription window will open with a message that the subscription is not found Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Download v Settings Expand info gt gt Import JWP Send Receive Display Unsubscribe Setup Connection ff Test Connection Setup Easy Mode Figure 91 Weather gt Weather Packages tab Page 100 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software a i QP NOTE You are asked to download subscription information when you start downloading weather data for the first time no matter which downloading option you are using 2 To obtain subscrip
23. Aurora Figure 217 Own ship returns to its original course Page 194 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 9 OTHER NAVIGATIONAL TOOLS 9 1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects 9 1 1 ERBL Electronic range and bearing line tool is intended for easy measuring of ranges and bearings between objects in the chart view With the tool you can measure ranges and bearings between the own ship and any point in the chart view as well as between any two points in the chart view you can also fix a range as a circle around the own ship to monitor objects within the range 4P NOTE Measurement units for ranges are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab To turn on the ERBL mode press the ERBL button in the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel to open the panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator To turn the ERBL mode off outpress the ERBL button Voyage Sulla Alarm GPS2 lost X 1 75000 x2 7 SHIP 14 25 07 30 03 2009 GPS1 a 42 49 180 N 1 75000 009 15 236 W Original Scale SOG H O kn t Scale coce 202 0 P s AF Z DPT 20 0 10 0m 41B WGS 84 of Not for use with position device NEE g Figure 218 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel ERBL button si To measure the range and bearing between the own ship and a point in the chart do the following 1 Turn the ERBL mode on In the chart view range and bearing indication lines wil
24. B from stern 0 to 511 m Pos ref point dist C from port beam 0 to 63 m p lt XX Pos ref point dist D from starboard beam 0 to 63 m DTE indicator flag Source identifier gt VSD AIS voyage static data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used to enter information about a ship s transit that remains relatively static during the voyage However the information often changes from voyage to voyage The parameters in this sentence support a number of the ITU R M 1371 messages S VSD meee ee age ae cat c c hhmmss ss xx xx ae ae x x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt No Field Description Comments Type of ship and cargo category 0 to 255 Maximum present static draught 0 to 25 5 m p lt gt lt X p lt Persons on board 0 to 8191 Destination 1 20 characters hhmmss ss Estimated UTC of arrival at destination X Estimated day of arrival at destination 00 to 31 UTC XX Estimated month of arrival at destination 00 to 12 UTC Navigational status 0 to 15 p lt X Regional application flags 0 to 15 O i O Page 236 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software gt WPL Waypoint location Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint S WPL 11L1l 11 a yyyyy yy r ay C 0 hhZCR gt lt LF gt M I Waypoint latitude N S en c yyyyy yy Waypoint longitude E W en ihe h Waypoint identifier
25. Licensing tab press the License list button and select the current DB in the Databases drop down list If necessary reinstall the DB license Display an area with coastal line and zoom the chart view in e g to 1 10 000 Scroll the chart view so that to display licensed zone area Add all available databases to the view Data gt Add Remove Database tab Display any chart in the chart view Data gt Chart Catalogue tab select a DB expand any plus symbol and double click on any chart Zoom the chart view out scroll the chart view to another location 9301584 10 Database is registered but not available in the Add Remove Database list Database is stored on a DVD or USB flash drive but is not displayed in the Available Databases list in the Data gt Databases tab Missing data Please check that you have registered message appears when trying to apply a license manually License is stored on the removable device but the licenses list in the Data gt Licensing gt Add License from file tab is empty The Add License from file button is not displayed Dynamic Licensing function doesn t work 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software The list has not been refreshed automatically The list has not been refreshed automatically Not all DB files are available Available DB is CM93v3 format not in the Wrong database 1s selected Wrong Zone Area
26. Safety margin et ty marg Relative Figure 196 Introduction of safety margin representing a minimum passing distance at closest point of approach The solution to pass a distance equal to the selected safety margin CPA limit astern of target is shown by a course change to starboard which deflects the relative vector so its extension becomes a tangent to the CPA limit circle Figure 197 This solution can be found by utilizing the ARPA Trial Manoeuvre functionality i Target Relative Vector Figure 197 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit Change of own ship s course in order to pass astern of target with selected CPA limit i e extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle 9301584 10 Page 181 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software The solution to pass a distance equal selected safety margin CPA limit ahead of target is shown by a course change to port Figure 198 Target Owmehip Relative Feefens0eem a Vector Figure 198 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit Change of own ship s course in order to pass ahead of target with selected CPA limit i e extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle Figure 197 and Figure 198 show that a sector shaped region can be imagined in the relative motion display Figure 199 l Target Own Ship H EREDETIN 2 2060855 Relative Vector Figure 199 Sector shaped collision danger region
27. The system ID is a unique ID required for all systems that use CM 93 3 chart databases and should be the same as the one written on the C MAP eToken dongle e a save the system information to a file do the following 1 Press the Copy User usr file button The Copy User usr file dialog will open 2 In the Copy User usr file dialog select a folder where to save the file and press the Export button The file will be saved to the specified location Page 22 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 1 6 Color Differentiation Test The color generating capability of any type of display screen will deteriorate with age and the Color Differentiation Test diagram is provided to enable the mariner to verify that his display screen still retains the color differentiation capability needed to distinguish between the various color coded areas lines and point symbols of the ECDIS display The Color Test should be applied on the day and dusk color palettes see chapter 7 5 3 Chart Display Palettes Before the Color Test diagram is used the black adjust symbol SY BLKADJ should be brought up on the screen and the contrast and brightness controls or equivalent controls for an LCD should be adjusted in a specific way e Aa bring up the black adjust symbol do the following 1 Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered see chapter 4 1 Installing and Displaying Database and added to the view see chapte
28. To scroll the chart view to the coordinates of a log book entry select the entry in the entries table and press the Go to position button The position will be displayed in the center of the chart view and marked with an arrow symbol Please note that it is required that the selected log book entry had position information in the remark field otherwise an error message will appear To create a route using the current log book entries press the Save as Route button The Select Route Name window will open enter the route name to the Output Route Name field and press the OK button The route will be created and added to the existing routes You can edit the route in the Route gt Route Planning tab 4P NOTE This function creates a route from all the recorded own ship positions of the log book in view Each point of the track will become a waypoint in the created route This may be useful in order to sail the same route later or to export the route to another system This function when used in the track log provides the possibility to set time interval for the track points to be recorded to the route 9301584 10 Page 199 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 11 To print the log book out press the Print button The log book will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the log book using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File g
29. VVI YN i a i hhmiss ss y A a Fah CRS LES Pi ps SS CC h Status A data valid V data invalid ze Mode indicator Page 218 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software gt GNS GNSS Fix Data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Fix data for single or combined satellite navigation systems GNSS This sentence provides fix data for GPS GLONASS possible future satellite systems and systems combining these This sentence could be used with the talker identification of GP for GPS GL for GLONASS GN for GNSS combined systems as well as future identifiers Some fields may be null fields for certain applications as described below S GNS hhmmss ss aL Mb I eM a aS VVYVV YY y d Ge x ae aa ane y a aa a ar x xi hh lt CR gt lt LF gt p pma urevowon p ma fiae eosa yyyyy yy Longitude i gt HDG Heading deviation and variation Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 IMO Resolution A 382 X Heading magnetic sensor reading which if corrected for deviation will produce magnetic heading which if offset by variation will provide true heading S HDG a ar oxy ae a ae a gt hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Magnetic sensor heading degrees Magnetic deviation degrees Magnetic variation degrees 9301584 10 Page 219 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt HDM Heading magnetic Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs Actual vessel heading in d
30. You will receive data files in the response e mail 4 Save the files to any location on your computer 5 Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button 6 In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling If you want to stop receiving scheduled weather data press the Delete all scheduled button in the Weather Data Request dialog for Scheduled download Take into account that you cannot cancel one or several scheduled requests You can only cancel all of the requests Page 112 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling Each time you order a weather forecast the request of the forecast is listed in the Weather gt Weather Packages tab In the tab you can see the progress of the request processing After the data has been received weather data come from the weather server as data packages entries for weather data requests in the Weather Packages tab become entr
31. data valid V navigation receiver warning MII Latitude N S yyyyy yy Longitude s Speed over ground knots Course over ground degrees true p lt XXXXXX Date dd mm yy Magnetic variation degrees s Mode indicator gt ROT Rate of turn Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 IMO Resolution A 526 Rate of turn and direction of turn mom bow turns to port Rate of turn min Comments not processed not processed 9301584 10 Page 221 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt RTE Routes Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Waypoint identifiers listed in order with starting waypoint first for the identified route Two modes of transmission are provided c indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted w indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been reached FROM while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently heading for TO and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route S RTE ae ae XR a c c c c Sid ese ie o c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Total number of messages being transmitted No X X Message number Route identifier Waypoint identifier Additional waypoint identifiers Xx Xx C C C C O l l c Waypoint n identifier gt SGD Position accuracy estimate Standard NMEA 0183 v 3
32. distances can be calculated as great circle arcs or as rhumb panel lines 4 To plot a check point in the chart view check one of the Check point checkboxes The Check points panel will close and the check points editing mode will turn on Page 196 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 Plot the checkbox in the chart view point the mouse pointer to the reference object and left click The check point will be plotted in the chart view The check point is connected with the own ship with a range and bearing line The values of the range and bearing are displayed in the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view The T letter near the bearing value means true bearing and the R letter means relative bearing 1 0 492 M 29 8 T 2 0 626 M 320 9 T 3 0 672M 258 4 T 04 01 407 N 009 11 358 E Figure 220 Control points in the chart view 6 To remove a check point open the Check points panel and clear the checkbox corresponding to the check point you want to remove To remove all check points press the Clear All button 9 1 3 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer To turn on the display of the range and bearing from the own ship to the mouse pointer open the Check points panel and check the Cursor DIST BRG checkbox The range and bearing are displayed in the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view i QP NOTE Ranges can be measured as great circle a
33. dynamic licensing Dynamic licensing gives clients the possibility to pay for licenses for single charts that were actually viewed rather than for licenses for a whole database or a chart collection e aa activate the dynamic licensing service do the following l Contact Jeppesen Marine and subscribe to the dynamic licensing service You will be registered on the server In the subscription databases and chart collections available to you will be specified To activate the service send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or in case of a local network from the server computer see chapters 6 2 1 Automatic Updating and 6 2 2 Semi automatic Updating In response the updates server sends updates for already licensed datasets if there are any and the dynamic licensing initialization answer The initialization answer contains e The System ID of the system the answer is intended for e Indication of an action to be performed Activate or Stop the service or Change the service terms e Credit value which is a part of the overall bridge credit e Mandatory report date for not reported charts if a chart is not reported before the date the access to all data both reported and not reported datasets is denied and can only be resumed after the chart use is reported and confirmed The dynamic licensing information credit value collection keys and next mandatory report date is written to the eToken In c
34. in the list of coverage areas 9301584 10 Page 105 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 10 11 12 13 e To restore initial coverage boundaries the screen coverage boundaries set when the Edit Coverage window has just been opened press the Reset Area button f To scroll the screen so that a specified coverage area was in the center of the screen press the Go to button g To create a new coverage press the New Coverage button The name of the new coverage will appear in the list The default new coverage name is New Coverage x you can change the name to any name you like h To delete a coverage select it in the list of coverage options and press the Delete button i To return to the Weather Request Download window press the OK button All new coverage areas will be in the list of coverage areas If you press the Cancel button the new areas will not be preserved in the list of coverage areas You can view a selected coverage area from the Weather Download Request dialog To do so press the Go to Coverage button in the request table In the Period field select time period for which you need weather forecast In the TimeStep field select time step at which weather parameters readings from the weather package are made In the Size field an approximately estimated weather package size is displayed The total size of the request is displayed in the Total information panel at the lower
35. press the Remove All button to the right from the Observations table Page 142 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Bro configure additional manual position fix parameters do the following L Open the MODevices config xml file where you can enter values of RMS and fixed corrections for observation devices To do so open the Config gt Own ship gt Position of instruments tab and press the Advanced button The Editing of LOP Position fix function advanced parameters Do you wish to continue message will appear Press the YES button the MODevices config xml file will be opened for editing in the LOP Position fix advanced parameters window Edit the file directly in the window To save the changes press the Save button to reset the file to its initial contents press the Reset button To close the window press the Close button LOP Position fix advanced parameters lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt root gt lt section name DRActualisation gt lt setting name SogRMS gt lt value gt 0 1 lt value gt lt setting gt lt section gt lt section name Radar gt lt setting name BrgRMS gt lt value gt 0 3 lt value gt lt setting gt lt setting name BrgCorrection gt lt value gt 0 0 lt value gt lt setting gt lt setting name DistRMS gt lt value gt 3 75 lt value gt lt setting gt lt setting name DistCorrection gt lt value gt 0 0 lt v
36. so 0 fe gt p m Pa _Legend gt gt AHC MENU 4 eS een Figure 123 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab display of the ice situation 2 The ice situation data received from satellites during one day are compiled into one time period and provided for the download from the Jeppesen Marine weather server only the next day That is why the date and time in the Data field are set automatically to 12 a m of the previous day and cannot be changed 9301584 10 Page 125 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 7 4 Weather Time Series In the Weather Time Series panel you can see the evolution of specified weather parameters in a single point or along a specified route A IMPORTANT To create time series for a specified route weather data currently downloaded in the ECDIS should cover the geographical area along which the route goes The time period of the weather forecast should cover the time scheduled for navigating along the route see chapter 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule f create time series for a single point do the following l 2 Open the Weather gt Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Point on Chart option Press the Locate Point on Chart button and plot a point on the chart by left clicking in the chart view The point is highlighted with a yellow ring O The point coordinates are displayed in the Lat and Lon fields of the Point on Chart section The coordinates can be edited
37. 0 1 08m 01 0 0 831 16 0 1 67m 02 0 1 16 17 0 1 43m 03 0 1 43m AOAC 4 AO MAAC A CAs Figure 85 Tidal information water levels plan Page 96 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 5 2 Tidal Streams Information Information about tides is available in the Info gt Streams Info panel B access tidal streams information do the following l Open the Info gt Streams Info panel and set the Switch Tides On Off checkbox to turn on the display l and tidal appear on the map the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1 5 000 000 of tides and streams information in the chart view Special yellow symbols of tidal stations stream stations To view information about a tidal stream you should select it To select a stream right click on it in the chart Information about the stream will be immediately displayed in the tab Echo Sounder i il Synchronization Monitor v Switch Tides On Off etine 2009 10 02 14 04 a KF A IN 4o TimeZone UTC 05 00 18 ENN set Direction 30 00 gt Speed 1 89kn Flood Ebb Flood UTC 2009 10 03 05 43 Speed 2 0kn Direction 195 00 Results In UTC Flood Ebb Ebb Figure 86 Info gt Streams Info tab After the tidal stream station has been selected you can get information about the stream for any date and time To set the date and time use the date and time tool The too
38. 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used both to enter and obtain channel management information When sent to an AIS unit the ACA sentence provides regional information that the unit stores and uses to manage the internal VHF radio When sent from an AIS unit the ACA sentence provides the current channel management information retained by the AIS unit The information contained in this sentence is similar to the information contained in an ITU R M 1371 Message 22 The information contained in this sentence directly relates to the initialization phase and dual channel operation and channel management functions of the AIS unit as described in ITU R M 1371 10 ERCA Sop AN en vey r ae dre ay aN N r aaa IXS 4 eae xxxx3 Mes Ge ae ant ae hhmmss ss hh lt CR gt lt LF gt i 4 Sequence Number 0 to 9 M I Region northeast corner latitude X 2 T a D C C o e o rme S X X Information source X In use flag No l 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 hhmmss ss Time of in use change Page 232 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt ACK Acknowledge alarm Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Acknowledge device alarm This sentence is used to acknowledge an alarm condition reported by a device S ACK xxx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt XXX Unique alarm number identifier at alarm source ee gt AIR AIS Interrogation request Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence supports
39. 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Bro set ship parameters for the Ship Response analysis do the following 1 In the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the Ship Response Options Ship R Opti button The Ship Response dialog will open Ei Ship Response Ea Ship Data Additional parameters leave empty if not known Length m 92 Angle of vanishing stability Width m 15 Waterline area coefficient Draft m 5 3 Effective waterline area sq m Load displacement t 300 Transverse metacentric height m Iv Enable ship response calculation W Show alarm of resonance condition Save Load OK Cancel Restored on startup Figure 131 Ship Response window 2 Set the required parameters e Ship Data section Length Length at waterline LWL of the vessel meters LWL is the length of the vessel as measured from the bow ending of the waterline to the stern ending Width Beam the widest width of the vessel meters Draft Draft of the vessel meters Load Displacement Displacement of the vessel tons e Additional parameters section Angle of vanishing stability Sets angle of vanishing stability AVS of the vessel degrees AVS is the angle the boat can heel and still right itself Waterline area coefficient Waterline area coefficient non dimensional quantity Effective waterline area Effective waterline area square meters
40. 44 Sea area named wa Figure 140 List of objects under the mouse pointer SF NOTE If the reference point is a point on land select the Land area or the Coastline object and the reference point symbol will be plotted in the position of the mouse pointer on the land or at the coast line 4 Enter the reference point name in the Would you like to name the observation point field and press the OK button You may leave the point without a name just press the OK button and press Yes in the You did not give a name to the reference point Would you like to proceed anyway message window 5 The reference point will be added to the Reference points list and a reference point symbol Bibel will be displayed in the chart view Page 138 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 The point coordinates are displayed in the Position fields below the Observation table To change the reference point position type in new coordinate values and press the Change button The reference point will be moved to the new coordinates 7 Inthe Reference points list you can move points up and down select a point and press the Up button to move the point up in the list or Down button to move the point down in the list To remove a point select it in the list and press the Remove button To remove all points press the Remove All button Observation Points 1 Underwater awash rock Coastline 2 5 2 Select observati
41. Add License manually button and presents a sequence of commands that user should perform to reach a function si The text written like this identifies a task and is followed by numbered steps explaining how to do the task A IMPORTANT The Important icon marks information that is crucial for correct functioning of the system or a function ai D QP NOTE The Info icon marks a notice that can add important details to understanding a related topic The text written like this identifies a list of functions or options presented on a tab and is followed by short descriptions of each function or option 1 3 Normative References The ECDIS is created in compliance with the following international standards e IEC 60945 ed 4 2002 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems General requirements Methods of testing and required test results e IEC 61162 1 ed 3 2007 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Digital interfaces Part 1 Single talker and multiple listeners e JEC 61162 2 1998 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Digital interfaces Part 2 Single talker and multiple listeners high speed transmission e JEC 62288 ed 1 2008 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Presentation of navigation related information on shipborne navigational displays General requirements methods of testing and req
42. Cartesian Coordinates Also known as Rectangular Coordinates A two dimensional plane contains an x axis and a y axis Negative x coordinates lay to the left of the y axis and positive x coordinates to the right Negative y coordinates lay below the x axis and positive above the x axis Chart Nautical term for maps used in nautical navigation that show the depth of waters as well as land boundaries and other obstructions Charts may be paper or electronic and electronic charts may be of raster or vector type Chart License Chart Licenses unlock a Chart region Each license is made up of 16 digits laid out in the following convention 1234 1234 1234 1234 Closest Point of Approach CPA Predicted closest point a maneuvering boat will get relative to any target moving or otherwise located at a point on the relative movement line perpendicular to the reference ship The minimum horizontal distance between two crafts during a close proximity encounter Page 245 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software COG See Course Over Ground COM Port The interface through which the ECDIS can communicate with peripherals Visual series support 32 COM Ports Course The direction a boat is being steered Course Over Ground COG Is the track of the ship over the ground and is based on position changes CPA See Closest Point of Approach Cross Track Error XTE The distance of a perpendicular line drawn from
43. DOVER HARBOR U CALAIS France Routel Figure 173 Route gt Start Voyage tab 2 Select a route in the table of routes in the left hand part of the tab To show the route in the chart view press the Show Route button To hide the route press the Hide Route button 3 Indicate the waypoints of the route between which route will be monitored In the From table select the start waypoint and in the To table select the end waypoint Table headers will display the time of departure from the start waypoint and the time of arrival to the end waypoint in the brackets 4 Ifthe system is connected to an autopilot check the Autopilot ON OFF checkbox and the ECDIS will start sending NMEA sentences in the APB format autopilot sentence B to your autopilot 5 To switch to the route monitoring mode press the Start Voyage button The ECDIS will start monitoring the own ship on the route In the route monitoring mode the route is shown in red the voyage information panel is displayed under the navigational panel and the Voyage indicator state changes according to the current voyage situation Also when in the route monitoring mode the Destination approached and Exceed deviation alarms can be activated if set in the Config gt Alarm Setup gt Alarms tab 6 To quit the route monitoring mode outpress the Start Voyage button and confirm the operation 9301584 10 Page 161 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Softw
44. Date Format list The setting is applied immediately a i 4P NOTE The current onboard time is indicated in the Time and Date line of the Navigational panel The time value is calculated using the UTC time value received from the positioning device plus the time zone offset To see the UTC time left click on the Time and Date line and hold the button the time changes to the UTC time When you release the button the time changes back to the onboard time 9301584 10 Page 19 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 1 2 Monitor Brightness Setup A IMPORTANT Use of a brightness or contrast control may inhibit visibility of information particularly when using the night display palettes Setting monitor brightness control is located in the Config gt System tab e aa set monitor brightness do the following 1 Open the Config gt System tab 2 Inthe Monitor brightness control section set the brightness value either using the slider or by selecting a value from the drop down list System Alarm Targets Anti Collision Input Units lt amp q Ex Setup Tool Output and Time Monitor brightness control Default value 128 Figure 3 Config gt System tab Monitor brightness control 3 Press the Set button for the settings to take effect 4 To restore the default brightness value press the Restore Default value button Page 20 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 1
45. Drp calculated from given position distance to reference point H is a gradient matrix 2xN dimension with elements calculated as differentials of the LOP parameter by corresponded coordinate Lat or Lon dZ is a difference vector N size with element LOP calculated LOP measured Cp is a 2x2 matrix of the Latitude and Longitude effective radius calculated in the FL position gt Measurements aging When the positioning system for example Navstar GPS is used continuously and manual observation 1s for check the position by another than GPS data the aging is not applied to LOP measurements taken in different time In the Dead Reckoning mode we assume that Speed Over Ground error SOGerr affects to the aged measurements in SOGerr DeltaT D sin BRG COG for bearing measurements covariance and SOGerr DeltaT cos BRG COG for distance measurements 9301584 10 Page 239 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt Common examples of manual LOP fixes based on 3 bearing lines 1 Three reference points with bearing differences of 120 equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship Figure 231 Three reference points bearing difference is 120 equally distant from DR position a Ifthe time of measurements is the same lines of position are equally accurate the observed position is in the center of the error figure and the figure is a circle Figure 232 Observed position in the center o
46. Figure 177 Info gt Echo Sounder Diagram tab The diagram field double click in any position in the diagram field and the own ship position corresponding to the time and depth values in the identified diagram position will be marked in the chart view with an arrow A mark to clear the highlight press the Clear highlight button Using this option you can mark such things as special places or fish echoes The current draft graph the red dashed graph represents the current draft of the own ship The data for building the graph come from the Config gt Own ship tab The depth below keel graph the black solid graph represents the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom The data for building the graph come from the external echo sounder Bt To display sounding marks in the chart view do the following l 2 Open the Info gt Echo Sounder Diagram tab Check the Marks ON OFF checkbox The sounding marks will be plotted in the chart view as the own ship proceeds Select the interval of the marks plotting in the intervals list To delete all previously plotted sounding marks from the chart view press the Reset button 9301584 10 Page 165 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 2 AIS The ECDIS implements the full support for the Automatic Identification System Using the AIS functionality you can receive and view AIS data of the AIS targets located at a specified distance from the own ship and display the
47. ITU R M 1371 Message 15 It provides an external application with the means to initiate requests for specific ITU R M 1371 messages from distant mobile or base station AIS units A single sentence can be used to request up to two messages from one AIS unit and one message from a second AIS unit or up to three messages from one AIS unit The message types that can be requested are limited The complete list of messages that may be requested can be found within the Message 15 description in ITU R M 1371 Improper requests may be ignored 1 2 4 7 S AIR XXXXXXXXX X X ree Kak g x XKXXXKKKXX ee y x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt face storms x rennan nenea Lg ee a o pee e a Number of messages requested from station 2 Message sub section 9301584 10 Page 233 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt APB Heading track controller autopilot sentence B Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Commonly used by autopilots this sentence contains navigation receiver warning flag status cross track error waypoint arrival status initial bearing from origin waypoint to the destination continuous bearing from present position to destination and recommended heading to steer to destination waypoint for the active navigation leg of the journey 1 14 SUEPRER 0 6 AC Rex eae NP oe Be Be A CeHe gt Bek Ae ie Se a hh lt CR gt lt LE gt 1 A Status A Data valid V LORAN C blink or SNR warning V ge
48. MagneticVariation 0 75 Calc Mode Great Circle Presentation library v 3 4 Figure 30 Object Info panel Chart Legend 5 5 Additional Chart Windows The ECDIS provides the possibility to use additional chart windows besides the main chart window The additional windows are the look ahead window and the 3D window 5 5 1 Look ahead Window The look ahead window is a chart view window You can use it at the same time as the main chart view window and have two different views of the same area To open the look ahead window do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 2 Inthe New Window section press the Chart button The Look ahead View will open The look ahead window properties are the same as those of the main window The properties are set in the tabs of the Chart panel The properties are set for the chart window which is currently selected To select a chart window use the Look Ahead and Monitor buttons that appear in the upper right corner of the panel after you have opened the look ahead window The Chart Scale panel of the Look ahead View differs from that of the main chart view e In the Scale field the chart view scale and the over scale factor are displayed 1 97628 x10 The over scale factor shows in how many times the chart view scale is larger or A O smaller than the original chart scale 7 7 Foe 1 97628 S e The Zoom In button doubles the Look ahead View scale and the Zoom Origina
49. Make sure that the device you want to set as a primary or secondary heading source is connected to the ECIDS and registered in the Config gt Input Output tab 9301584 10 Page 147 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Heading sources are configured in the Heading sources section All devices providing heading that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the available heading devices list dead reckoning DR is also on the list though it is not an external input device Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data pasttrackandvector Reckoning Position Fix Ship Motion Mode Manual Center if Position Heading Relative I Enable paoue sources Ship in center P Primary heading source Speed Swapheadingsources Secondary heading source i True scale ship image Figure 152 Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position Source section 3 You can also set heading sources in the Position Heading and Data sources panel To open the panel left click on the Position Source indicator Open the Heading sources tab This tab is the same as the Heading sources tab in the Navi gt Navigation Data and all actions in one are immediately repeated in the other 1 2000 x50 SHIP 20 11 43 2009 09 11 i Position Heading Data ee sources sources sources A 36 16 636 N syto P heading source 000 08 253 E soc 10 0 kn Speed BREES ETLE E a Sec
50. New Object dialog 9301584 10 Page 71 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 Select an object from the objects list To find an object use the Search function enter the name of the object to the Search field and press the Find button 5 Geographic objects can have various geometry types After selecting the object set the object geometry type Select a Point Line or Area option The geometry types that are not available for the specified object remain dimmed 6 Clear the From Notice to Mariner checkbox if it is set and press the OK button Adding manual updates from notices to mariners is described below The Attributes pane will open where you can set the values of the new object attributes Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update ieee cl Sted Ett iti Z14A3310 l e Obstruction i e Added 2 10 2009 0 amp Extrascl e Obstruction Scale minimum Category of obstruction oe tlt Voom Figure 54 Chart gt Manual Update tab adding new object editing attributes 7 To set an attribute value select the attribute in the attributes list and enter the value to the Value field or select it from the drop down list if available 8 Set the object coordinates either plot the object in the chart view using the mouse pointer or set the object coordinates in the Metrics pane To open the Metrics pane press the Metrics button To return to the Attributes pane out
51. Output e Import S 57 module performing import of cartographic data from the S 57 format to the CM93v3 format e Anticollision module performing estimation of collision danger of the own ship and an AIS or ARPA target e ECDIS Input Output module controlling connection of input out devices to the system and processing data coming from the devices Licensing of software modules is performed in the same way as licensing of cartographic data To carry out operations with licenses of software modules in the Data gt Licensing tab select Software Modules from the Databases drop down list After that all other operations with installing of licenses are identical to the operations for installing data licenses 4 5 ENC Data in S 57 Format 4 5 1 S 63 Protection of ENC Data The ECDIS fully implements the IHO data protection scheme S 63 All elements of the scheme required on the Data Client side are available in the Data gt Import S57 tab To use ENC data protected with the S 63 scheme you will need to be able to perform the following actions e Send your user permit written in your dongle together with data request to a Data Server to order data e Apply S 63 cell permits to be able to decrypt the data e Apply Scheme Administrator SA certificate to be able to verify data authenticity e aa copy user permit to a file do the following 1 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Copy user permit button The Cop
52. Radar Image tab Set the position correctly in the Config gt Own Ship gt Position of Instrument tab Page 211 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software AIS targets are not displayed AIS transponder device is not Contact your system administrator registered in the system or registered incorrectly AIS display is off Turn the display of AIS targets on click on the AIS indicator it becomes green No AIS targets are available Check in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab AIS targets are too far from the Unmark the AIS visibility range option own ship in the Config gt AIS tab or set a smaller value No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed in the Input Output program module Data gt Licensing tab press the License list button and select Software Modules in the Databases drop down list The ECDIS IO ECDIS license should be installed All AIS targets have the Lost Check in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab Status If not apply the license and restart ECDIS ARPA Sonar targets are not displayed ARPA Sonar device is not Contact your system administrator registered in the system or registered incorrectly Targets display is off Turn the display of ARPA Sonar targets on click on the ARPA indicator it becomes green No ARPA Sonar targets are Check in the Info gt Targets tab available No license is installed for the Che
53. Sonar The ECDIS implements the full support for the ARPA and sonar data Using the ARPA and sonar functionality you can receive and view data of targets located by ARPA and sonar and display the data in the chart view A IMPORTANT For the ECDIS to be able to receive ARPA and sonar data ARPA and sonar should be registered in the ECDIS The registration is carried out in the Config gt Input Output tab 8 3 1 ARPA and Sonar Targets Data When ARPA and Sonar equipment is connected and configured in the Config gt Input Output tab ARPA and Sonar targets can be monitored in the ECDIS Target information can be viewed in the Info gt Targets tab The panel consists of two sub tabs the ARPA Targets tab and the SONAR Targets tab The ARPA Targets tab displays information about targets located and monitored with ARPA and the SONAR Targets tab displays information about targets located and monitored with sonar Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor ARPA targets SONAR targets 1 COG 270 0 T SOG 15 0 kn Status Tracked 146 39 NM 12h 40m 3s COG 025 0 T SOG 9 0 kn Status Tracked 36 08 305 N 000 09 605 E 4 COG 172 0 T SOG 22 0 kn Status Tracked 270 0 T 15 0 kn Tracked Range Bearing 271 120 NM 089 0 Time 2009 10 06 13 12 17 Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Acknowledge Acknowledge All Figure 184 Info gt T
54. Toggle Weather button This button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view In the Weather gt Weather Packages tab select the loaded data package in the packages table and press the Display button The data will be displayed in the chart view If you can t see the data make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather data When the display of weather data is on values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view f turn the display of data from a weather file do the following l In the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the Toggle Weather button This button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view When the button is pressed the ECDIS opens grb or xm1 files that were opened last If there were no weather files opened or you need to open different files use the Open Grib and Open Cyclones buttons The Open Grib button opens grb files with weather forecasts saved there and the Open Cyclone button opens xm1 files with cyclones data To open a file press the Open Grib or Open Cyclones button in the Open dialog select the file to open and press the Open button The data from the file will be displayed in the chart view If you can t see the data make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather data When the displa
55. Valid till fields To close the window press the Close button Information about installed certificate Information about installed certificate Issued by IHO S 63 Scheme Administrator Issued for IHO S 63 Scheme Administrator Valid from 2003 09 01 Valid till 2013 08 29 Figure 22 Information about installed certificate window 6 Incase an error occurred during operations with SA certificate the error message will be displayed in the Message log pane ai B SF NOTE The check of the validity of the SA signature against each ENC signature is done automatically when the ENC data are being converted to the CM93v3 format 4 5 2 Large Media Support In case S 57 data are provided using large media you can use the large media support functionality of the ECDIS to work with the data Bro convert S 57 data to CM93v3 format using large media support do the following 1 Insert the large media device to the computer 2 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab Enter a name of the database to be created by S 57 data conversion to the Database Name field and press the Install Media button The Install Media window will open Page 42 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 Press the Find Media button to load media information to the system Available media will be listed in the Available Media pane The following information about media is provided media name media contents and media locati
56. Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 18 12 2008 14 004 Monday Go Today Expandinfo gt gt ImportJWP s Figure 99 Weather gt Weather Presentation Figure 100 Weather gt Weather Packages Easy Mode Download button Download button 2 In the Weather Download Request dialog you can set the product parameters remove a product from the request set a geographic area for which a forecast is required set the period for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings Mi Weather Download Request Global ECMWF 150 km Tropical Cyclones Forecast For 15 nex 2008 Downloadat 43 44 Total 19 kb Send Request Cancel Figure 101 Weather Download Request dialog Overview Coastal request dialog 3 Set the data request select product parameters in the Products field set data coverage in the Coverage field select the forecast period in the Period field and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download the Setup Easy Mode procedure 4 Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the fol
57. a 9301584 10 Page 237 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software APPENDIX D Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs gt Algorithm All measurements are assumed as corrected by systematic device errors device description table allow modification of this corrections All measurements are assumed as containing not correlated random errors Gaussian distribution with 0 mean value and RMS retrieved from device description table All Lines of Position are assumed as Geodetic lines on the reference ellipsoid now fixed to WGS 84 Calculations on the ellipsoid use internal algorithm from dKart library A position FLa A is needed for the algorithm Initial position is usually received from dead reckoning Start position covariance matrix Ba is 2x2 diagonal with values for latitude and longitude covariance equal to 10000 m RMS value This makes no affect of a priory given position to the resulting estimated position The iteration calculates as well known minimum RMS daFL I 1 7 Ba A 1 B Ay A 1 8 Z 1 FL FLatCp dFL 2 where dFL dLat dLon position tranfser vector B is NxN N number of LOPs diagonal matrix with diagonal element Bii RMSd RMSd for distance measurements and Bjj RMSbrg RMSbrg Drp Drp RMSd is a RMS of distance measurements assumed as increasing on more distances in not a linear function RMSbrg is a bearing measurement error radians
58. and altitude offsets from the reference datum and the selection of the reference datum are also provided S DTM cect ag xg roar ay x x ag Ks cec hh lt CR gt lt LF gt gt GGA Global positioning system GPS fix data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Time position and fix related data for a GPS receiver S GGA hhmmesess 11111 lt a VIII e Ve yy ay Ky en See gt SO E ae ae Me Zo y xxxx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt eS _ Z N S X GPS quality indicator Number of satellites in use 00 12 may be different from the not processed number in view Horizontal dilution of precision X Antenna altitude above below mean sea level geoid Units of antenna altitude meters 9301584 10 Page 217 of 259 p lt p lt X X Xx User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 11 X X Geoidal separation the difference between the WGS 84 earth not processed ellipsoid surface and mean sea level geoid surface mean sea level surface below the WGS 84 ellipsoid surface Units of geoidal separation meters 13 X X Age of differential GPS data time in seconds since last SC104 not processed type 1 or 9 update null field when DGPS is not used Differential reference station ID 0000 1023 gt GLL Geographic Position Latitude Longitude Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Latitude and longitude of vessel position time of position fix and status S GLL 1111 11 a
59. and say no to saving the object B To edit a mariner object do the following l Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and select an object in the objects list You can also select the object directly in the chart view make sure that the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab is open find the object in the chart view and right click on it The object will be highlighted and marked with an arrow symbol To clear the highlight press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel Press the Edit button to switch to the mariner objects edit mode and to open the object editing tab 9301584 10 Page 79 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 Change the object attributes and position using the same operations as when creating an object see above 4 To save the changes press the Save button To cancel changes outpress the Edit button and say no to saving the changes 5 To delete an object select it press the Delete button and confirm the operation 6 3 2 Export Import of Mariner Objects Mariner objects are mainly intended for the use of the mariner However they can be exported to an external file that can be used for various purposes Exported objects are written to a file with the DAT extension Mariner objects can also be imported to the ECDIS si To export a mariner object do the following l Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and press the Export Import button t
60. are Modules oense A A esate 39 AS ENC Dain oa ORMAL oenn e ETE E A e OA 39 4 5 1 B05 Protectionmol ENC Data racist enacts a a a E a aeons 39 4 5 2 Large Media SUPPO reenen N O ete a ae ee 42 4 5 3 TORE 95 1OACIVI9 V a E N 43 Page 4 of 259 9301584 10 gt User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software CHARTS DISELA eure eee ree Nee oe rT ee Pe AN aE Nn TOE ee See ee Ieee 46 s1 Moving around the Chart VieW ieiccsni deena kee eban erasers ET 47 S22 SCN the C Marly 16 W ep aa TA nineteen sass seepneatdewis aurea neuron sasedseepnent ens eenesh caer 47 3o BOOKMARK aeren a e e e 49 54 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend oosnsinecsaiearii ieee 50 59 Additional Chart WINGO WS siensia nonen a a E EE a 51 5 5 1 Look ahcad Wind Wossssine ra TE dna cdma edeaivennaelianioaie 51 55 2 TEW MNCL OO shale Pai raten ol E aren etd E aren tesa uau eae entered aetna 52 5 6 Sene Up Clhart Display cee a a R a eee ae eee ede 55 5 6 1 Chart Presentation Models aires i cea ne aa E E EA EA E 55 5 6 2 DIS Vy Type ese Saeed ashen A E EE espa tl E S 56 5 6 3 Sapp lenc itan Dalias A 58 5 6 4 Dep ta Are as Presentato Neacuneae i ona E E EEEE EET 59 5 6 5 Depo MN Serina aa a a aa a EO 60 5 6 6 Te EIDE a E T T ED a aan Oe ICO ee 6l 5 6 7 Oiher SEINO Seragen ana E E oases cence ones otras cadet oases ese ee moaned ase nee 62 Nel Pinne C Nar eeen wiv edusascsadoaee eae aneaates wis eles alae Hesse lee eee eee 64 VOYAGE PRERARA TION eres ere en
61. are not displayed Show Speed turns on the display of speed on the leg values in the chart view Show Bearing turns on the display of bearing on the leg values in the chart view Show Named WP only Schedule if the checkbox is set only waypoints that have names are displayed in the Schedule table This allows displaying waypoints that are especially important for the timetable e Change settings of several waypoints to change settings of several waypoints at one go press the Parameters button the Route Parameters window will open Switch to the Change Settings tab set the waypoints between which route parameters will be changed set necessary parameters and press the Apply button for the changes to take effect The following route parameters are available in the tab From WP To WP in the From WP and To WP drop down lists set the range of waypoints between which route parameters Route Parameters will be changed Change Settings Default Settings SPD kn speed on the leg used by the From WP 1 owl ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from a 16 one waypoint to the next one in knots XID NM XTD NM allowable deviation from the track along the leg from one waypoint to the next in nautical miles RAD NM Great Circle RAD NM turning radius at the waypoint in nautical miles Figure 72 Route Parameters window Great Circle if the checkbox is set r
62. case there are no depth contours at all in the chart the ECDIS will give the alarm Safety contour not available e Safety depth The depth defined by the mariner e g the ship s draft plus under keel clearance to be used by the ECDIS to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this value All soundings that are deeper than the safety depth will be displayed in a light grey color while soundings that are less than or equal to the safety depth will be displayed in black e Shallow contour The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between medium shallow and very shallow waters Medium shallow water area lies between the safety contour and the shallow contour and very shallow water area lies between the shallow contour and the zero meter contour The shallow contour value should be less than that of the safety contour The shallow contour value is not used in other ECDIS functions e Deep contour The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between medium deep and deep waters Medium deep water area lies between the deep and safety contours and the deep water area is all water deeper than the deep contour The deep contour The deep contour value is not used in other ECDIS functions 3 To apply the Contour settings press the Set Parameters button 9301584 10 Page 59 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software ai B
63. chart view Right click on the object to open the Object Info panel find the object entry in the objects list and double click on the entry to highlight it in the chart view Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab To edit the object attributes press the Attributes Edit button The Attributes pane will open where you can edit the object attributes After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there the object appearance will change to reflect the attributes changes and the Modified action Modified Wil be added to the object actions list To edit the object metrics press the Metrics Edit button The Metrics pane will open where you can edit the object metrics The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there the object will be moved to the new position the object symbol in the previous position will be crossed with a red line and the Moved action will be added to the object actions list To delete the object press the Delete button Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The dataset to which
64. charts automatic updating and manual updating 6 2 1 Automatic Updating Using the Automatic Updating function you can automatically log on to the Jeppesen Marine Update Server over the Internet and download updates for the currently installed database An updates log of all chart corrections is maintained The Automatic Updating requires the system to be logged on to the Internet over any communication channel 3 To download chart updates over the Internet and to automatically register them do the following k 4 N Open the Data gt Auto Updating tab and press the Auto Updating button The Auto Updating pane will open Dynamic Auto Import Affe x Licensing Updating 57 oe ww Te Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database comands Databases Auto Updating SemiAuto Download updates Get size Cancel Updating Updating Log Processing Review Updates P Figure 49 Data gt Auto Updating tab Automatic Updating function Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop down list If only one database is in view the Databases drop down list is not displayed in the Data gt Auto Updating tab Press the Download updates button to start downloading updates You can monitor the downloading process in the Processing field All steps of the process are shown in the Processing drop down list To check the size of available updates before downloading pres
65. computers If changes in routes data were made on Master or Backup computers they have to be manually synchronized with Route Planning Station 9301584 10 Page 29 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 INSTALLING DATA 4 1 Installing and Displaying Databases 4 1 1 Installing Databases Installing chart databases on your system includes copying the databases to the system hard disk and registering them in the ECDIS application Installing can be done in the Data gt Databases tab B install a database do the following 1 Open the Data gt Databases tab Chart Add Remove Dynamic D Auto Import tab Catalogue Database Licensing Licensing mmaa Updating 57 Registered DB Available databases ChartletsBase Issue 1 Professional Issue 380 TestBase Issue 1 4 b Check integrity Check signature Unregister database Find databases Register database Figure 9 Data gt Databases tab 2 Connect the data storage device with the database to the system and press the Find databases button Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system All detected databases are listed in the Available databases pane name and issue number Signature check in progress 3 Select the database name in the Available databases pane the Register database and Check signature buttons become active The Check signature button only becomes active if the signature c
66. control value is set to the minimum Buzzer for all alarms is disabled Buzzer for the particular alarm is disabled C Map Professional database is not registered licensed or added to the view Tides display 1s off Corrupted GRIB file received from the server Was Weather display is off No weather parameters selected to be displayed are Mark all filter options System Track Voyage User records Targets and AIS targets Display a different page in the log book and try to archive that page again The currently displayed page and pages for days before and after the current page date cannot be archived The Active page and pages for days before and after the Active page dates cannot be archived The Active page and pages for days before and after the Active page dates cannot be archived The Dusk or Night palette is set Change the palette to Day Contact your system administrator to change the brightness value Enable the buzzer check the Buzzer On Off checkbox in the Config gt Alarm Setup tab Enable the buzzer check the Buzzer checkbox of the alarm in the Config gt Alarm Setup gt Alarms tab Register license and add Professional DB to the view Turn the display of tides on check the Switch Tides On Off checkbox in the Info gt Tides Info or Streams Info tab Request the same package once more Turn the display of weather data on press the Toggle Weather butt
67. hh lt CR gt lt LF gt o f o memes ee remem Target course degrees Page 224 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software true relative T R Distance of closest point of approach Time to CPA min increasing Reference target R null otherwise Target status L Lost tracked target has been lost Q Query target in the process of acquisition T Tracking a Seems OO 2 4 Time of data UTC as fa Type of acquisition gt VBW Dual ground water speed Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 e Water referenced and ground referenced speed data CNP aay x a a Aa a aa a Aaaa DO aa a A O No Field Description Comments Longitudinal water speed astern knots a Transverse water speed port knots Status water speed A data valid V data invalid a mom Longitudinal ground speed astern knots Transverse ground speed port knots Status ground speed A data valid V data invalid Stern transverse water speed port knots fs fA Status stern water speed A data valid V data invalid not processed s ixx Stern transverse ground speed port knots Status transverse ground speed A data valid V data not processed invalid 9301584 10 Page 225 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt VDM AIS VHF data link message Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used to transfer the entire co
68. i an 147 primary and SCCONCALY tosses Sete eae diets eid 135 POU VIAL CATE eio A 64 qduick access DULONS uaria ita aa aE E 16 radar Gis play WGI CalON sssini e Ea 14 radar a eaei a E teste 175 PElALIN MONONA aaa AE e 153 154 TCP AY AE E EA E A A E ceotsaaee 201 touteciitical NOMS possetis a E 90 ronte COM NOC shite bases nace e E 87 TOWLE SEXO LONG gts 2 seals tel hee ats ee ane a 92 route monitoring TMOG sence tes cadectebencen E E E wemcanaael 161 PANE sareman iae ee a e en A 162 route YO LAIN sis as ects ad ak ace E EAE 89 route planning EMA UO EITC seh AA acl ee A Nira e a a erate aes 81 CPILIC Al DOIUMS espian teh crcccece set encanseseta sect cacap cosets an 90 GX POPE TOMS TO Mes isan eaten tite essed eles alta 92 EX POEL O AEV CE tiie Bs lial hose ata gi Ue A oe dite 93 aport HOM dEV Cenna eeeseees termes 94 Mana Neen ato nO A See manual route planning TOULG Plin linpp EA aA Lea 89 SEE I E E A A E N anitsateauin 91 route SCH CUNC arrani E 91 DAS PO GC MIV se sawestascicet cate ence eee etaecpe eee ascends 43 nS PUPA 18k eee ene ee eee ge ret ee ee eae 45 S 63 protection AP Ply Cell PeriaNiS ccies ec eouaetes cine ee eld een teen oe ieee ee 40 apply SA CeruliCate rrenean a ra Mee neat atecies 41 ce lperm iS HS Een a nr ee 41 COPY USEL permit t Hle zarisane nea 39 Current SA certificate MiO seceru an n 42 Uns tall CSU Permis inoa cla ss cae hrc 4 SA certificate ADDI aere an E E E wbuseauluauehes2 41 current certifi
69. id ets 14 alarm conditions MS zscse cr22c20s coceevesctess tet n EE 160 alarms PIS NOS iaae E nena 159 alarms panel onionenn seco ewes ceatee cali n cessed ence 156 LUN UT ULI iN eea clea dace trades Van iid des 157 ARPA TOS bos 20223 oa tctecaaee tebe open te ven tn Sones cee cea te ecte ceca eects 159 conditions MSU nt cciccerse tie stat detesee a tl seed 160 depasi teen el eee eel Malacca tals eee 159 Sonir loshon Misueeneemateoniaras 159 wamne Spanne keas o cae tats de tnaas 156 ATS TAC OE nasrane ea a e EAP aE EEA 15 ane mome Gene a Ne ene er eres eee ete ener sn 150 anti collision display COllision risk indication assess 187 COMIC UPANION 2 237 crete et ecco roles otal oe eet 185 Graphic lemen ariera e acto te rt ee ceust caste 184 limits violation indication c cc cccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 UNC ONY sees a cates een ee aurea A Ds ae Pa es 176 antisroundine alairni a tn cansrsvecencancsince 157 ARPA taro els datione E ere mea umraecntaneues uae 172 TAPS CIS display mincod EAA 173 ARPA lost al arin neisiu EA 159 ARPA targets display indicator cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 astronomical information cc ccceeeeeeseeeeseeeseesssstsseeeeees 99 automatic chart updating seen 67 automatic route planning cenoria EE 81 DESES CANS TOC o erraia a doesn adv tandadeile nantes 151 black adjust symbol ccc ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 DOOKMALKS sais netcrsagcctsndenchabisgecittedwitahi
70. lv Chart boundary Lat Lon grid Use SCAMIN Set Parameters Figure 44 Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Other settings tab 5 0 m 52 simplified j p 20 a Low accuracy ind Text dscr symbol 2 0 m m Page 62 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 To display an element in the chart view set the checkbox to the left from the element name to hide the element from the chart view clear the checkbox There are the following elements in the Other settings tab Plain borders Turns on the display of borders of various special areas caution areas deep water areas etc as plain dashed lines The setting only works for the S 52 presentation INFORM symbol Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the Information attribute Quality symbol Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating the quality of the electronic chart The setting only works for the All Other display type The quality symbols correspond to so called zones of confidence There are six categories of the confidence zones The categories are defined by the quality of survey in particular by the positional accuracy the depth accuracy the seafloor coverage and typical survey characteristics The categories are the following in brackets the position accuracy is given as an example Al 5m A2 20m B 50m C 500m D worse than 500m and U data not assessed For the S 52 pre
71. mail MAPI 1 Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request confirmation dialog 2 In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and data received and downloaded automatically 3 If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request confirmation dialog 2 A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml 3 Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no 4 You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder 5 The ECDIS will load the data automatically 9301584 10 Page 103 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request confirmation dialog A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on
72. nr er ne er ee 65 Gill Charts Catalo SUG ecysi se soseiai Saunt vas a E a E eaters eae meer 65 6 1 1 Searcmime Carts alalO ue easi eei e aoi 65 6 1 2 Viewine Chart Boundaries by Scale Levels secures an aT 66 62 Correctine the Chart 1s ecco ee etree use een ce ee ae ee eee ee eee 67 6 2 1 Agoma ACAI ass seas lt ne a ne hdacrpats anata oes adadsnaaeetnersteaaeyeaeae 67 6 2 2 Semi atoman UCAS 3 cena acesehesrdean ta fadesncaneausaytnceselasndeap es ia Oet 68 6 2 3 Updating LOS Review OC pq ates acct coo ce se e aa EEE T EE aia 69 6 2 4 Manual PAU sierra T EN 70 Do Manner OD COIs sna a A T eee T9 6 3 1 Creatine and Editime Mariner ODI CCUS amia sE 78 6 3 2 Export Import of Marner Objects asrina indec aetna Wasa ee 80 04 RouE Pheri and Potni oroni vases cess cctv A ctv eet edged e eG eS 8 1 6 4 1 Automate Roule PLANTING 25325 cancciane N ia dualistadavausaaacvalioumaiauud aavaialaieueee 8 1 6 4 2 Manual Route Plannin yenan n ee eS Se ee eee ee 84 6 4 3 Route Edit ModE res e aust A et anetera nena EE ss aataeaaeisa 87 6 4 4 POEPIE a E E ern ren Cree eemrennmany ee ner ny 89 6 4 5 PROGINS CAIICAI IT OMS ease taiece cetacean ee eee ae ee ee T 90 6 4 6 Edine Route Schedule sarapa OE Pn RN 9 6 4 7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File 00 0 0 ceceeeseeseseeesssesssssssssssssesssessssseeeens 92 6 4 8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a Device ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseseesssesessssssseeeeeens 93 0o Tides a
73. plugged to the radar board Plugged radar is powered off Radar data reception is not started in the ECDIS Radar board is not plugged to the ECDIS Wrong setup of the radar board The display of the radar image is off Radar indicator is orange and the Hide radar image option in the Info gt Radar Image tab is marked No chart data is displayed Wrong configuration of the Sea Rain and Gain parameters Wrong setup of the radar board Own ship heading and radar image are not adjusted Position of the radar onboard the own ship is set incorrectly Try to edit this route if it s not possible the route is broken Contact your system administrator for printer setup Stop transmitting the route from the device press the Import button in the Route gt Export Import gt From To Device tab restart transmitting the route from the device Plug the radar to the radar board Power the radar on Start the radar data reception press the Start radar button in the Info gt Radar Image tab Plug the radar board to the ECDIS Contact the support service of the equipment provider Turn on the display of the radar image Display chart data Set the Sea and Rain sliders in the Info gt Radar Image tab to minimum and the Gain slider to 60 70 Contact the support service of the equipment provider Adjust the heading and the radar image using the Orientation adjustment slider in the Info gt
74. press the Relative button in the Ship Motion Mode section In the relative motion mode the own ship symbol is stationary and the chart is moving 2 The own ship position can be set in the following ways a In the center tick the Ship in centre checkbox and the ship will always be in the center of the screen Manual Center Enable b Manually in the Manual Center panel check the Enable box to activate the manual selection of the fixed ship position Then press the Set button and in the chart view select the fixed ship position by left clicking in the selected position the selection mode is indicated by a red frame around the chart view Set Figure 165 Navi gt Navigation Data tab Manual Center section c Automatically if the Ship in center or the Enable manual center checkboxes are clear the own ship position in the chart view is set on the outer boundary of the own ship redraw area 7 5 6 Light Sectors The ECDIS allows displaying lights sectors and their visibility distances in the chart view ot To turn on and setup the lights sectors display do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab and switch to the Light sectors tab Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors iv Real length Highlight S52 TEERAA W Highlight sectors C Chosen sectors 5 0 52 simplified a Saf
75. received from an input device is less than the set depth limit 4 After the depth alarms parameters have been set press the Apply button QP NOTE The depth value received from an input device is displayed in the navigational panel in the following format DPT 5 0 30 0m where the first value is the depth from the water line to the transducer and the second value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom Depth information is displayed in the graph in the Info gt Echo Sounder Diagram tab si To set a target lost alarm do the following 1 Open the Config gt Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab 2 Check the Target lost alarm checkbox to set an alarm for loss of ARPA or Sonar targets and the AIS lost alarm checkbox for loss of AIS targets 3 Settings are applied immediately 9301584 10 Page 159 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 6 4 Alarm Conditions List The following alarm conditions are processed in ECDIS Position device is lost The signal from the positioning device is not being received To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Ship is out of coverage The own ship is not in the chart view The alarm is deactivated when the own ship is in the chart view again To avoid the own ship out of the chart view use the navigation mode see chapter 7 5 1 Navigation Mode In this mode the ECDIS holds the own ship in the chart view automatically Chart leve
76. right corner of the window The Forecast for box is only active for Historical Weather function and the Download at box is only active for the Scheduled Download function To reset the Easy Mode data request to the default settings press the Reset button To save the data request for the use press the OK button The Easy Mode request configuration will be saved The request is used each time you download data using the Easy Mode download option Page 106 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 3 Overview and Coastal Download The Overview and Coastal download options are preset options The Overview download option only allows downloading the Global ECMWF 150 km weather model the European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 150 km grid and Tropical Cyclones data The Coastal download option only allows downloading the Global ECMWF 50 km weather model the European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 50 km grid and Tropical Cyclones data e Aa download weather data using the Overview or Coastal download options do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Press the arrow near the button to open the download options menu Select the Overview or Coastal option The Weather Download Request dialog will open Weather Weather
77. route schedules add control points check routes etc ot To create a new route do the following 1 Open the Route gt Route Planning tab and press the New button The Create New Route dialog will open Start Route oTo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import RouteName FromPort el ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria ANTOFAGASTA CALDERA ANTOFAGASTA Chili CALDERA Chile KOBENHAVN COPENHAGE KOBENHAVN COPE YSTAD Sweden KOBENHAVN COPENHAGE KOBENHAVN COPE YSTAD Sweden Figure 66 Route gt Route Planning tab 2 In the Create New Route dialog enter the name of the new route to the Enter name of a new Route field and press OK Create New Route Ea Enter name of a new Route New Route Figure 67 Create New Route dialog Page 84 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 The new route will be created and added to the routes list The ECDIS will switch to the route edit mode You can start plotting the route waypoints and enter other route information More details about plotting waypoints see below fie x I M CI Print Route Charts Check Route Parameters gt WPT CP Schedule Dangers Cautions Total distance 0 000 NM RAD NM XTD NM SPD k RL DIST NM DTA NM TTG Figure 68 Route gt Route Planning tab creating a new route 4 After all waypoints and route information have been added press the Save button
78. save the route under a different name press the Save as button enter the name in the Save Route as dialog and press the OK button The route with the latest changes will be saved as a new route The old route will remain in the routes list View the route in the chart view to view the route in the chart view press the Show button The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to display the whole route in the chart view Print the route plan the WPT table out to print the route plan out press the Print Route button The WPT table will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print View charts covering the route to view charts that cover the route press the Charts button Charts covering the whole selected route will be highlighted in the chart view Check the route for dangers to check the route for dangers press the Check Route button The whole route is checked leg by leg and all found dangers and cautions are listed in the Dangers and Cautions tabs The tabs are created inside the Route Planning panel and organized in the same way as the Object Info panel Also all legs are marked with colors These colors mean the following Blue the Check route tool has not yet checked the leg Red the Check route tool has found dangers along the leg presen
79. ship on the chart also corresponds to the replay time The buttons on the Replay panel are the following gt Play If the Cycle playback checkbox is ticked playback will be resumed from the first record otherwise replay will be stopped after reaching the last record Stop lt a gt gt Step back forward buttons allow viewing the ship s movement step by step M gt a To begin To end buttons go to the first or last logbook record e Switch playback off button switches the Playback Mode off Pressing the button is equal to releasing the Start Play Back button in activated condition called Stop Play Back in the Log Book panel The Replay panel will be removed from the screen and in the chart window the current ship s position will be displayed 9 4 Navi Calculator The navigator s calculator is an additional tool designed to help you in performing various geodetic tasks not solved automatically by the ECDIS The Navi Calculator performs the following tasks e inverse geodetic problem e direct geodetic problem e calculating great circle points e converting coordinates from one datum to another si To solve the inverse geodetic problem do the following 1 Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Distance Bearing tab Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization E es x Diagram Monitor image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Distance Bearing Great Circl
80. the SemiAuto updating procedure In the Updates Review it s not possible to expand records after the chart name record Manual Update object is created but not displayed on the chart S57 data is stored on the removable device but the S57 Source Data list in the Data gt Import S57 tab is empty Internal error message 1s displayed during import of Page 208 of 259 Charts you are trying to open using dynamic licensing are already licensed Service is not initialized The credit rest is not enough to perform dynamic licensing DB 1s not licensed Wrong DB 1s selected Removable device is write protected Problem with eToken No license for the current DB is installed Created object is not displayed on the current Display Type Created object is applied to the chart which is no longer displayed due to manipulations with the chart The object has a Scale minimum or Scale maximum attribute and the chart view scale is smaller than the minimum scale or larger than the maximum scale The list has not been refreshed automatically Name of the S57 data folder on the removable device is not ENC ROOT Problem with eToken To check this open the Data gt Licensing tab select the ENC DB in the Databases list and press the Licenses list button Request and download updates for the database Refill the credit Apply license and try to receive updates once more Selec
81. the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server 2 In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically 3 If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request 1s saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Press the Send Request button A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml 2 Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no 3 You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder 4 The ECDIS will load the data automatically e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server 2 A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer 3 Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no
82. the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop down list If only one database is in view the Databases drop down list is not displayed in the Data gt Auto Updating tab 3 Set the maximum return email size select an option from the Maximum return email size drop down list The option should be used if there is a limitation on the email attachment size from your email provider or the answer file needs to be stored on a floppy disk Check with your email provider and set the required size The updating server will then divide the replies into several emails in order to comply with these limitations 4 Save the updates order in the folders tree in the left hand pane select a directory to which the order file will be saved and press the Save order button Confirm the operation The order file will be saved in the specified directory 5 Send the order file as an attachment to updates c map no It is very important that you send the new order file to the updates server and not the same file as before as this will result in duplicate update being received 6 After a short period of time you will receive the answer from the Updates Server with updates attached to it Save the update files to a data storage device and connect the device to the system 7 To install updates select the folder where the updates files are stored in the folders tree and press the Get updates from directory button The updates
83. the list To select the object double click on the last action performed with the object or select the last action and press the Highlight button The object will be selected and you can start editing it 4 To edit the object attributes press the Attributes Edit button The Attributes pane will open where you can edit the object attributes After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The object appearance will change to reflect the attributes changes and the Modified action Modified Will be added to the object actions list 5 To edit the object metrics press the Metrics Edit button The Metrics pane will open where you can edit the object metrics The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The object will be moved to the new position and the Moved action will be added to the object actions list 6 To delete an object select it and press the Delete button Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK The object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action X Deleted iti be added to the object actions list Page 74 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software asi To edit a chart object do the following l Select the object in the
84. the maximum scale at which the object starts to be displayed in the chart view Page 78 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Scale minimum the minimum scale at which the object is displayed in the chart view if the attribute is not set the object is displayed at all scales e Category category of the object often defines the object appearance e Object name the name or the number of the object e Local time time of the observation clear the checkbox in the Local time field and the attribute will be ignored e User s remark information related to the object and entered by the user e Input identifier name or initials of the object author e Position finding method for Position only select method of the position determination from the drop down list e Orientation for currents only direction of the current in degrees e Current strength fro currents only speed of the current in knots 5 Plot the object in the chart view e Point object move the mouse pointer to the chart view and left click in the selected position to plot the object To move the object left click in a different position the object will be moved to the new position You can also drag the object to a different position To do so left click on the object to capture it with the mouse pointer drag the object to a new position and left click once more to plot the object
85. the ship to an active route leg Determines how much the ship is straying from the course of a Route Current The flow of water characterized by direction and speed Current speed and direction may change with the tide See also Ebb Current and Flood Current Dangerous Target Tracked radar or reported AIS target with a predicted CPA and TCPA that violates values preset by the user The respective target is marked by a dangerous target symbol Data Sentence The unit of information sent between peripherals and the ECDIS conforming to the NMEA 0183 specification Dead reckoned Position DR position extrapolated from the last accepted position update based on present course and speed Dead Reckoning A method of navigation where known values position course speed time and distance to travel are used to calculate unknown values Values such as set and drift can also be incorporated Page 246 of 259 Deviation Changes in the magnetic field due to the ferrous composition of surrounding objects affecting the measured direction of magnetic North Deviation is measured as the angular difference in direction between the actual magnetic heading and the compass heading DGPS Differential GPS A network of 60 radio beacons in conjunction with a GPS that sends correction information used to reduce positional error to the 1 3 meter range Digital Selective Calling DSC A type of VHF radio that allows boats
86. tidal stream stored in the database In case it is impossible to define ebb and flood states for a tidal stream the graph can only be displayed in one mode and the Direct Changes button will not be displayed in the graph area at all e Speeds Directions summary information about time speed and direction of a selected current stream is given Graph Speeds Directions Tepe Oconee 14 0 1 91kn 30 00 00 0 1 60kn 30 00 Flood 15 0 1 18kn 30 00 Flood 01 0 2 12kn 30 00 Flood 16 0 0 22kn 30 00 Flood 02 0 1 97kn 30 00 Flood 17 0 0 78kn 195 00 Ebb 03 0 1 27kn 30 00 Flood 18 0 2 27kn 195 00 Ebb 04 0C 0 31kn 30 00 Flood Am AF mM nan Aer AAO me ar ArmA manr Aer AAN mee Figure 89 Tidal stream information Speeds and Directions table Page 98 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 5 3 Astronomical Information Information about celestial bodies is available in the INFO gt Astro Info tab B access information about celestial bodies do the following 1 Open the Info gt Astro Info tab Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System mcm Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info pitta Monitor luTcTime gt _ResetTime Astronomical Info In UTC Format 2009 10 02 08 21 sun Moon Planets Time Zone and Daylight bias altitude 30 79 Standard Transit Civil Twilight Nautical Twilight ise 2
87. time field under the time type drop down list e Make the current date and time the date and time for calculation of tides and streams characteristics To do so press the Current Time button The date and time field will became grayed and the value in the field will change to the current date and time value Results In UTC Results In LocalTime Figure 82 Selecting e Results of tides and streams calculation can be presented either in UTC time type for tides time or in local time formats Select the time format for the tides information information in the drop down list in the lower left corner of the Tide Info section 4 To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated in the chart view press the Play button Each new position of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period 9301584 10 Page 95 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 Tide Info Displays tide or stream information in the selected station General tides information includes the following parameters e Time Zone The time difference between standard local time of tide location and UTC e Tide Type Can be Diurnal Mixed Diurnal Mixed Semi Diurnal and Semi Diurnal e From High Water Time passed from the last high water event e From Low Water Time passed from the last low water event e Current Water Level Shows the water level of the specified Tidal object at the tim
88. to maintain the evasive manoeuvre until the target has been passed the TCPA value in the Info gt Targets gt ARPA Targets tab is unreachable 1 66776 x15 No official data available Refer to paper chart Figure 214 Evasive action is maintained until TCPA is unavailable 11 When the relative distance to the target is equal to or less than the CPA limit the collision danger sector disappears and the collision danger line only is displayed 1 66776 x15 No official data available Refer to paper chart Figure 215 The distance to target is equal or less than the CPA limit only collision danger line is displayed 9301584 10 Page 193 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 12 The collision danger line disappears from the screen when the target s closest point of approach has been passed i e the TCPA value in the Info gt ARPA Targets gt ARPA targets tab is unreachable 1 66776 x15 SHIP 17 07 11 2009 01 28 i Mo official data available Refer to paper chart Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 pm M7 TargetVectors Apply Parameters Figure 216 The collision danger line disappears 13 The own ship can now change the course to come back to its original track line t No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 66776 x15 SHIP 17 09 29 2009 01 28 a 65 51 300 N 031 09 948 W esos 20 0 m ecos 000 0 270 0 15 0 kn 2009 01 28 13 09 29
89. violet circle and added to the itinerary Outpress the Add Waypoints button ot To edit the waypoints list do the following l 2 To remove a port waypoint from the list select the port waypoint and press the Remove button To move a port waypoint down or up in the list select the port waypoint and press the Move up or Move down button To clear the list remove all ports waypoints press the Clear All button When the Highlight Ports option is checked all ports in the list are displayed on the chart as white circles and the port selected in the list is shown as a violet circle To change the screen position so that the port selected in the list were in the screen center press the Go to button It will also be marked with an arrow To calculate the route do the following l Add all ports and waypoints you want to include in the route edit the ports waypoints list and press the Calculate button The ECDIS will calculate the shortest route of all routes available by taking into account your current draft The calculated route will be marked on the chart as a yellow line Page 82 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software si To add restrictions to the route calculation by disabling passages do the following 1 Open the Disabled passages tab and check the passages you want to close for route calculation Disabled Passages _ Arctic Bering Sea Arctic North Sea Route Arc
90. will be extracted from files and registered in the database Page 68 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 6 2 3 Updating Log Review Updates During the updating process the updates log is kept where the list of updated datasets is recorded as well as the list of all changed objects In the list of changed objects objects are grouped by hydrographic organizations that issued the updates by datasets to which the updates were applied and by numbers of files in which the updates are stored You can view the both lists in the Data gt Auto Updating gt Updating Log Review Updates pane si To view the list of updated charts and a complete list of updated objects do the following Open the Data gt Auto Updating tab and press the Updating Log Review Updates button The Updating Log and Review Updates panes will open ole x Auto Import Updating S57 Professional Review Refresh Clear Highlight HO Estonian Maritime Administration EMA EE203001 a Book update No 009 Edition 1 Date 2009 RESARE 654 Added Moved 19 Book update No 010 Edition 1 Date 2009 r Chart Catalogue Add Remove Database Dynamic liceanag Licensing Databases Databases Auto Updating Updates log Remark Name Status Number Z14A50JA Accepted Z14A50PA Accepted Z14A513A Accepted Z14A513A Accepted SemiAuto Updating l 2009 10 02 13 21
91. your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive data files in the response e mail Save the files to any location on your computer Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling S setup the Easy Mode option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages panel 2 Press the Settings button and select the Setup Easy Mode option from the drop down menu The Weather Download Request dialog will open In the request dialog you can add a product to the request set the product parameters remove a product from the request set a geographic area for which a forecast is required set the period for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings Gi Weather Download Request Global ECMWF 150 km a Tropical Cyclones Forecast For 145 nex 2008 Download at 11 36 Total 19
92. 009 10 02 10 58 Bearing 93 93 GMT 05 00 Bogota Lima Quit Sii pimuth 66 67 p Daylight bias o min Latitude N 39 30 700 Transit 2009 10 02 16 49 Bearing 179 28 Altitude 46 72 Set 2009 10 02 22 41 Bearing 265 45 Longitude W 075 33 400 Duration 11 43 hours Results In UTC Figure 90 Info gt Astro Info tab 2 If a tidal or a tidal stream station is currently selected astronomical information is presented for coordinates of the selected station and the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude fields For calculating the local time if this time type is selected in the drop down list at the bottom of the time and coordinates pane the time zone of the selected station is used the time zone is displayed in the Time Zone field The Latitude Longitude and Time Zone fields are grayed and you can only change date and time 3 If no tidal or tidal stream station is currently selected astronomical information is presented for coordinates of the current chart view center the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude fields For calculating the local time if this time type is selected in the drop down list at the bottom of the time and coordinates pane select the time zone in the Time Zone drop down list 4 Using date and time tool set the date and time you need astronomical data for The Reset Time button resets the
93. 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt ZDA Time and date Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 UTC day month year and local time zone S ZDA hhmmss ss xx xx Xxxx xx xx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 immesforcime Year UTC om esmtnneniae ne eet 9301584 10 Page 229 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software APPENDIX C List of Output Sentences The table below lists sentences which can be transmitted by the ECDIS and devices for which the sentences are intended gt ABM AIS Addressed binary and safety related message Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence supports ITU R M 1371 Messages 6 and 12 and provides an external application with a means to exchange data via an AIS transponder Data is defined by the application only not the AIS unit Comments ABM Sey X x XXXXXXXXX xX aan s s x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message to 9 z l Sentence number 1 to 9 4 XXXXXXXX The MMSI of the destination AIS unit for the ITU R M 1371 Message 6 or 12 Sequential message identifier 0 to 3 AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message 6 x ITU R M 1371 Message ID 6 or 12 7 e Encapsulated data s l Number of fill bits 0 to 5 X X X X X XX S S 9301584 10 Page 231 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt ACA AIS channel assignment message Standard IEC 61162
94. 125 System M Orma UON n eae 22 3 1 6 COF Diierentla Om LES konsens r E a a a 23 32 Wndatine FODIS SONWANE R 24 I2 Systeni SON Wale VeTSION cari n E a ane eee 24 32 2 D lphin ECDIS application Versio seara a E es 24 3 2 3 Verification of System Soltware V CrSiOM ies ccasacscassaseaansnrantanstsasanedanscuagecsatenanansaudanssaseaedeonseans 25 D7 Dala yc WE OMIZ AMON eea E E A E EE E E 26 3 3 1 Sync Monizanon Monor sasasi E E E S 26 3 3 2 ROULES Sync HT OMI ZAM OU sene a sang a daalsala ean se ene 29 4 INSTALLING DA We artes erent me ert E eee eae eee ee ere ee ee 30 A Installing and Displaying Databases ciccpscc cidescckctesicctenactsctsans sc voeadeseakebndicatemacde beans avec ems 30 4 1 1 Vins beanies Databas ESen ea e EEE UE E O EEE toa gat adeno as E etd EEUE 30 4 1 2 Display Databases vascsisssaaclsisisnsnessdaacctstesisns e aesa aaar eea e aea a r eana 32 dk Licens Do DA aena aa A NA 33 4 2 1 Tinstalhine Licenses Mam Ua ysis sien a cttescn gaat weet cnl tend el ce le ell alien all el ance ti tld ald 34 4 2 2 Installing Licenses TOM File ainni O 34 4 2 3 Getting Licenses Expiring Before a Specified Date nnnnnnnnnununssssssssrsesrrererrrrrrrrrrerrrrren 35 4 2 4 Viewin Licenses Listsrecpini soa A S 36 4 2 5 Dynamic Licens Nieres iawn vale aang cans Atanas ic mah aati aaatcavans 36 AS Installine New Versionmof the Alaa ASG scsi encceaiouhcceasnaicacarctecaunesareenlounecuauiacacaetawaanen EA 38 AA Auieensimne Sotw
95. 2 7 9min 2009 10 02 14 56 2009 10 02 14 56 Omin 18 2 3 8min 2009 10 02 15 04 2009 10 02 15 04 Omin j 2 8 9min WP Name ETA ETD Stopdur Speed DIST NM Timetonext 2 3 4 5 Figure 75 Route gt Route planning tab Edit mode Schedule table 3 The following route schedule parameters are displayed in the Schedule table e ETA Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated date and time of arrival to the waypoint Can be set by the user e ETD Estimated Time of Departure Estimated date and time of departure from the waypoint Can be set by the user ai i 4P NOTE If you change the arrival or departure time date the ETA and ETD for each waypoint are changed accordingly e Stop dur Stop duration at the waypoint It can be applied for waypoints representing pilot stations and ports as a route can include a number of intermediate ports of call e Speed Estimated speed in knots on the leg from this waypoint to the next It is taken from the WPT table and can be changed here If you change the speed value in the Schedule table it is changed in the WPT table too e DIST The distance from the waypoint to the next one along the leg Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG gt Units and Time tab the Distance Units section The Distance is taken from the Waypoints table e Time to Next Time that will be spent to reach the next waypoint It is calculat
96. 256 of 259 large media Supporti nsii ane oke 42 licenses AVIVA TIN O s e rE EE 36 Expired Deloc aonni A 35 mstall Trom ilemi eee eestor eal eco 34 list of installed licenses ccceeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 manual INStallat Oticce n ciccer nan E 34 Sorva re module S aoii a a 39 Hoeness Tomni Ramee ner eee On ana 34 INC EHSESSI1S Uiscastierrerdawiemeainsnede nn cami cndavirmati R 36 hecenin dalare een ace one amen aE ae Re ee 33 light sectors display cccccccccccccsccccccceeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 154 TES OF postion TIX siriarren E E 137 accept observed position sundosa lies 141 calculate observed position ccccceeeeeeeeeesesseseeees 141 enter observation results ccccccceeeseeeeseesseesseeeens 139 set advanced parametrs cccccceesessesseseeesssssssseeees 143 SCL TEICIENCE POMS rerien E sees cee 138 log book als oy 0 11 AE Ee ee OE Rene en 200 CXPOUL PACS eimen tte ascites eek heen areal 200 IpO DAO C255 heist bolts acesiselt cote maar heled ceaseless cesces 201 Pay 0 6 aoe eee re yey pore eee ee erm Pere nee ere ee ree mere eee 201 WICW CUITS piseanna n aS 198 look ahead WINdOW oorsien oniiir in E EAS 51 Man OVET DO OE een ea a 197 manual chart updates TRUS COTY e E LO EO Ea 70 mandal COTS WM iie heal Rcadeceedi Antec ataeaaet 34 manual route planning CEC ALS NEW TOUET 84 edit 021610 caer en PE eR ee ne ETT ea RON a Eee a Aten oD 87 DIOL Way POLIS cenn
97. 28 inspect ship POSIMOM3 5 0s 232 Addsetae dese ieecestecd i 130 TOULE COMP ATISOM nisan ean E E E 129 HIMES SOMES gania a a a E 126 weather forecast display conNeurati on aaa a a eee EE 120 Page 257 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software CYC LONG Scud 50d se Sei ck Sad ss Secret bed As Se nett sneha alae See 124 TCS SITWAUION erene a aaar 125 ONO oa a Stites ote Saeco 119 weather forecast download COASTAl COW NIOAC sodas meatier de eal edt Gece dase 107 CUSTOM COWNIOAL eee e ec ceeeccceeeccceeecceeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeees 109 Eas Y INIOGG erg pn anaa a ee ee aS 103 Easy Mode se UD rana E 104 overview download reserare a n e e a 107 scheduled download ccc cc cceecccseeccceeecccesecceeseceeeeeceens 111 Page 258 of 259 SCUU cic ni cet et sds hoe See weather download setup SUDSCHIPUON ezearen e See weather subscription weather pac kapes erhian eteagestott teaueets 113 Weather PACKAGES vescunssecceensesacaeseeitansecataeuaeenceiteetnecctentke 113 weather subscription downoad oa cect Sacra li Pah stale dnl eset ran eal es ec alaaatn 100 POMC W nate tnceseuea E esa a NA Geeee tne 102 a e AEAN EAE TA AAE hanes Lies a tee en an oles 102 WANS EMS OF daai oa e e A ais Catel isl eel antes hing 150 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 9301584 10 Page 259 of 259
98. 28 09 2009 13 09 UTC Perform check on startup Refresh Info Figure 4 Info gt System Info tab 9301584 10 Page 21 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 1 4 Disk Space Control To work properly ECDIS requires a certain amount of free disk space Control of free disk space is performed every 30 minutes and in case the space amount is less than required a Critical free disk space warning appears suggesting you take measures to clean up the disk In the warning recommendations and automatic cleanup options are provided Critical free disk space warning You are running out of free disk space 10813 6 Mb is free Press Summary button to see more detailed information Summary Cleanup recommendations Delete logbook records for the distant periods Use Log Book panel Delete routes that you don t need Use Routes panel Delete manual updates records that you don t need Use Chart Manual Updates panel Delete mariner objects records that you don t need Use Chart Mariner Objects panel Delete weather data that you don t need Use Weather panel Auto cleanup Some cleaning can be done automatically W Realtime updates W Old logbook records W System log files cleanup Figure 5 Critical free disk space warning 3 1 5 System Information The Info gt System Info tab gives the user easy access to the System ID and the version of the CM 93 3 SDK installed
99. 3 System Check up While working with the ECDIS you need to be aware of the system current state The access to the system check up information is provided in the Info gt System Info tab The system check up includes checking databases status Databases status tab licenses status Licenses status tab disks status Disks status tab and talkers status Talkers status tab To perform the system check up at the ECDIS startup check the Perform check on startup checkbox To refresh the system check up information press the Refresh info button while the refreshing procedure is running the button label is Abort During the system check up the message indicating the process running appears in the Alarms indicator E OnBoard tests running Once acknowledged the message is removed from the current alarms list In case the Perform check on startup checkbox is not set the check up is carried out automatically every seven days Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization lt E fl x Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor System ID C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Version 5 0 82 38 Copy User usr file Databases status Licenses status Disks status Talkers status Database Integrity Signature Database ChartletsBase Issue 1 N A N A Database Professional Issue 380 OK OK Database TestBase Issue 1 N A N A Last check date
100. 4 0 m ecoe 000 0 Figure 207 Speed change by the own ship to avoid collision Page 189 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 As the relative distance is decreasing the own ship speed vector length has to be adjusted in order to still be able to judge the collision risk and the potential evasive action The Figure 208 shows that the own ship speed vector length should be decreased below the present 12 minutes by using the Vector Length option f No official data available Refer to paper chart Mna ray ww iss a a He ai waun ol oh ie al igi A ba Sraranassi ean rannat Figure 208 Adjust the vector length 5 The vector length is now decreased to 3 minutes and the OOW can still judge collision risk The collision danger sector and line are scaled accordingly f No official data available Refer to paper chart Figure 209 The length of the own ship speed vector is changed to 3 minutes Page 190 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 6 When the actual TCPA is less than the specified minimum TCPA the CDL is highlighted in red bold to attract the attention of the user Further decrease in the length of the own ship speed vector is required An evasive escape action should be urgently considered by the user 1 133553 17 5 SHIP 17 02 08 2009 01 28 No official data available Refer to paper chart z 65 49 324 N 031 12 459 W esos 30 0 kn ecoc 000 0
101. 74 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 4 Radar Image Overlay The ECDIS provides the possibility to display data received from radar in the chart view as a radar image overlaying the chart To turn the display of the radar image on or off left click on the Radar indicator If the display of the radar image is off the Radar indicator is orange E if the display of the radar image is on the Radar indicator is green _Radar_ Bt To configure the display of the radar image do the following 1 Open the Info gt Radar Image tab If no radar board is connected to the ECDIS all controls of the Radar Image tab are inactive Echo Sounder AIS Tinge Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization f le x Diagram Monitor _Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Stop Radar Orientation Adjustment Hideradarimage Show position Radar Pulse Short Pulse Use demo signal VIDEO SYNCHRO BEARING HEADING Figure 186 Info gt Radar Image tab 2 To start reading radar signal press the Start Radar button when pressed the name is Stop Radar 3 To turn the display of the radar image on or off use the Hide radar image checkbox it works in the same way as the Radar indicator described above To hide the radar image check the checkbox to display the radar image clear the checkbox 4 To turn on the display of a special symbol indicating the position of the radar on boar
102. 84 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 To print the CP table out press the Print CP button The CP table will be converted to the doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print 9 To save changes press the Save button All changes will be saved and the route edit mode will be switched off 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule The route schedule is created together with the route itself Times of navigation between waypoints are calculated using the distance between the points and the own ship speed parameters You can edit the route schedule entries change time of departure and allocate time for stops in waypoints Bro edit the route schedule do the following 1 Open the Route gt Route Planning tab select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route edit mode 2 Inthe route edit mode switch to the Schedule table Now you can edit the route schedule Start Route Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import a ST seo gt ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria z Print Schedule _ Print Schedule Charts _ Check Route Parameters WPT cP Schedule Only named WP Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m ALGER Algeria 2009 10 02 14 44 0 6 2min 2009 10 02 14 46 2009 10 02 14 46 Omin 0 3 1min 2009 10 02 14 47 2009 10 02 14 47 Omin i
103. Bearing Line advanced bearing line Page 140 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software o calculate the observed position do the following l To calculate the own ship position press the Calculate button The position will be calculated and plotted in the chart view as a EE symbol The position coordinates and the position offset from the current DR position of the own ship are displayed in the Result pane of the Navi gt LOP Position fix tab Figure 146 Calculated position in the chart view and in the Result section The coordinates of the manual position fix are displayed in the Position section of the Result pane The Discrepancy pane displays offset of the manual position fix from the current DR position of the own ship distance from the own ship to the manual fix in the Distance field bearing from the own ship to the manual fix in the Bearing field and the root mean square error of the position fix in the RMS field The RMS error is displayed in the chart view as an RMS error ellipse Figure 147 RMS error ellipse Bo accept the observed position do the following l To accept the position fix as a new DR position of the own ship press the Accept Position button The own ship symbol will be moved to the fix and the DR will resume positioning of the own ship from the fix If the dead reckoning is off the own ship is not moved to the manual fix After the manual fix has been a
104. CONFIG gt Units and Time tab Distance Units section The parameter value is calculated automatically and is not editable DTA xx Distance to Arrival distance from this waypoint to the last waypoint of the route destination Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG gt Units and Time tab Distance Units section 9301584 10 Page 89 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e TTG Estimated time that will be spent for sailing from this waypoint to the next e BWW Bearing Between Waypoints bearing from one waypoint to the next Expressed in degrees e Name The name of the waypoint optional parameter 5 To save changes press the Save button All changes will be saved and the route edit mode will be switched off 6 4 5 Adding Critical Points You can specify a critical point on the route for the ECDIS to give an alarm if the own ship is going to reach the critical point within a specified time or distance Bro set a critical point do the following l Open the Route gt Route Planning tab select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route edit mode In the route edit mode switch to the CP table Now you are in the control points edit mode and can add new and edit existing critical points ole x TE Sve Saves Show ARZEW Algeria rh Print CP Charts CheckRoute Parameters Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m Es 95 18 378 N 013 08 761
105. DTG Distance to go from the current waypoint to the end waypoint e BTW Bearing to the next waypoint from the own ship depends on the own ship current position e BWW Bearing from the current waypoint to the next waypoint e DWP Distance from the current own ship position to the next waypoint e XTD Cross track distance on the leg the value is positive if the own ship is to the left from the route and negative is the own ship is to the right from the route Ifthe indicator is green the actual XTD is less than the planned XTD on the leg Ifthe indicator is red the actual XTD exceeds the planned XTD on the leg e WPT List of waypoints that are not passed yet select a waypoint in the list and in the TTG and ETA lines below the time to go to and the estimated time of arrival to the selected waypoint are displayed respectively e TTG Time to go from the current own ship position to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list e ETA Estimated time and date of arrival to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list 7 7 3 Goto Waypoint Function The Go to Waypoint function allows you to plot one waypoint that will be your destination For example if you are approaching a pilot station and port control suggests you drop anchor at some position and wait for the pilot there you may use the Go to waypoint function to set the required point and proceed there without the full route planning procedure B To use the Go
106. E f Pilot station 55 21 104 N 013 44 364 E OOhr 30min Establish VHF connection Figure 74 Route gt Route planning tab Edit mode critical points table To plot a critical point in the chart view move the mouse pointer to the critical point location and left click The critical point will be added to the CP table A critical point symbol is an orange circle with a cross inside D The other way to add a critical point is to enter its coordinates to the LAT and LON fields of the CP table To move a critical point to a new position left click on it to capture the point with the mouse pointer move the point to a new position and left click once more to plot it there After the coordinates of the critical point have been set add the following information about the critical point to the CP table e D T Indicate if the system will give alarm when approaching the critical point within a specified time or within a specified distance For distance you should put a tick a sign in the cell and for time a dash sign To select a sign click in the cell and the sign that is now displayed will change to the other e DIST TIME The value of the distance or the time at which the system should notify the mariner about approaching the critical point This field depends on the D T choice e Remark Here you can enter the critical point information 7 To delete a critical point right click on it Page 90 of 259 93015
107. Failed tasks table and then after 3 minutes back to the Tasks to perform table The Tasks to perform table has the following fields Target the role of the target computer all computers with the indicated role will be sent synchronization data Data type type of data that should be synchronized can be Databases Updates Manual Updates Mariners Objects Routes Own Ship Configuration or Chart Data Manual indicates if the task was carried out automatically Manual No or manually Manual Yes Clear metadata indicates if synchronization metadata are to be deleted Yes or not No metadata are deleted if the number of failed attempts to carry out a task has reached ten Synchronization Synchronization Status Synchronization status Stopped Current state Stopped no synchronization is available Figure 7 Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab Tasks to perform tab e Failed tasks the list of failed synchronization tasks tasks are moved from the Failed tasks table back to the Tasks to perform table after 3 minutes with the number of attempts increased by one after the number of attempts to perform the task reached 5 the task metadata are cleared and the number of attempts is set to zero the task completion tries are continued The Failed tasks table has the following fields Target computer the name of the target computer only computer with the indicated name is sent sy
108. Flood The movement of tidal current up the shore or up a tidal river or estuary Geo reference To establish the relationship between page coordinates on a planar map and real world coordinates Global Positioning System GPS A worldwide radio navigation system developed by the US Department of Defense In addition to military purposes it is widely used in marine terrestrial navigation and location based services Uses stationary satellites or a surface signal to locate the ship with a very high degree of accuracy The term GPS is frequently used to refer to GPS receivers GPS See Global Positioning System Great Circle A Great Circle is the shortest distance between two points on a spheroid A great circle is formed at the edge of a plane crossing through the center of a sphere Unlike Rhumb Lines great circles generally do not have constant bearing the equator and the meridians are prominent exceptions Greenwich Meridian See Prime Meridian GRIB Gridded Binary A general purpose bit oriented data exchange format GRIB is an efficient vehicle for transmitting large volumes of gridded data over high speed telecommunication lines using modern protocols GRIB weather communicates large weather data files efficiently Heading The direction the ship is oriented High Water HW The maximum height reached by a rising tide Higher High Water HHW The highest of the high water or single high water of any sp
109. IDE VALOIS erena E a sobstas de aus dineamatadanuataawdndentaais N 253 Pare TNS Niare cic aaah asd aati leicht cso NAE ts esa ed asa a ccansioatd ica A A 255 9301584 10 Page 7 of 259 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 User Manual Structure The ECDIS User Manual contains detailed information about all the functions of the ECDIS The user manual consists of eight chapters each containing a number of sub chapters Each chapter presents information on how to perform specific tasks using the ECDIS The order of chapters is determined by the order of tasks that the user faces when navigating at sea 1 2 Typographic Conventions The ECDIS User Manual is written under assumption that the user is familiar with the main principles of work in the MS Windows environment and has experience in using MS Windows applications This manual uses certain conventions to provide a consistent mean of recognizing specific information as follows Keys are physical keys of the computer keyboard Buttons are displayed graphically on the screen Text written like Chart refers to the names of keys and buttons as well as the names of all other user interface elements Program messages are written like this Would you like to copy the database to a local hard disk Text written like Data gt Licensing gt Add License manually is contracted from press the Data button open the Licensing panel and press the
110. In this case check the DTM sentence checkbox when registering the device in the ECDIS With the DTM sentence the ECDIS receives the position correction automatically and you don t have to enter it manually 7 2 5 Position Discrepancies When the own ship position is defined using more than one method there can be discrepancies between position values The discrepancies are displayed in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position discrepancies section Position Discrepancies Pri Sec 0 555 NM Pri Man e Primary Secondary discrepancy between positions coming from primary and secondary position sources displayed if the Show Figure 151 Position secondary checkbox in the Navi gt Navigation Data gt Position discrepancies sources tab is checked e Primary Manual discrepancy between positions defined by primary position source and by manual observation LOP position fix 7 3 Heading Sources In the ECDIS you can use two ways to get the own ship heading e One or more external devices providing heading information compatible with the NMEA interface The devices should be registered in the ECDIS e Dead reckoning see chapter 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning Several devices providing the own ship heading data can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time One of the devices is used as a primary heading source and one as a secondary heading source Bo set a device as a primary or a secondary heading source do the following 1
111. Is Topografische Dienst Netherlands Source Identification code 10B v Cancel Show Figure 57 Add New Object from Notice to Mariner dialog 7 Select the database from the Databases drop down list 8 Enter the number of the Notice to Mariners to the Notice field 9 Select the code of the data producing agency in the Source Producing Agency drop down list the name of the agency will be automatically displayed in the field to the right 10 Select the name of the chart to which the object will be added in the Source Identification Code drop down list to view the selected chart press the Show button Press the OK button to continue the operation or the Cancel button to cancel the operation 11 If you press the OK button the chart view is scrolled so that to display the specified chart and the Attributes pane opens 12 To set the object attributes and metrics repeat steps 7 to 11 of the previous procedure ai Bi SF NOTE If you add a manual update object from a Notice to Mariners the object is added to the chart dataset specified in the Source Identification Code field of the Add New Object from Notice to Mariners dialog of To edit a manual update object do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab 2 In the databases drop down list select a database In the History pane the list of updates applied to the specified database will be displayed 3 Find the updated object you want to edit in
112. N O12 31 361 E fedex Tempa alure alus label in selected units Ti othon in selected unite ae ee aa R CY PRR ERP Fe oo SPAAR fenan PL N U NNT FERF SRRRP REE RE RE R Swell waves na a Total waves Legend gt gt Figure 117 Display of the temperature using the Contour type symbols e Symb point symbols Vector parameters such as wind are displayed using point symbols showing the parameter strength and direction Numeric parameters such as temperature are displayed using the X symbols plotted in the coordinates of the parameter readings Weather Legend Pressure ENST Label with wind speed and direction in form ene Temperature f F rEFF EF le kn 0 to is J kn 5 0 8 MS MD SB 4 4 OS Legend gt gt Figure 118 Display of the wind strength using the Symbol type symbols 9301584 10 Page 121 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Text point symbols Numeric values of parameters are plotted in the coordinates where the parameters readings were done ee a ee i e Ee 58 07 195 N 005 47 462 E alex Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 15 02 2009 00 00 sunday Go Today __ Step 1 Hour Weather Legend Area Cont Symb Text Temperature Temperature yale label in selected units j lather in aeciai
113. OAA supplies navigation chart information for the coastal U S and the Great Lakes region Overscale Display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the compilation scale Overscaling may arise from deliberate overscaling by the mariner or from automatic overscaling by ECDIS in compiling a display when the data included is at various scales Pan To move the view window over the chart Also called Scrolling Past Track An onscreen and or logged record of a ship s previous movements Polyconic Projection The polyconic projection involves projecting the surface of the Earth onto a series of cones situated with their apexes over the poles Port Port designates the left side of a boat as seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow Port side is indicated with a red light Prediction Vector A vector displayed in front of the vessel showing where the boat will be after a specified period of time assuming no intervening heading or speed changes Prime Meridian The meridian of longitude which passes through the original site of the Royal Observatory in Greenwich and used as the origin of Longitude Also known as the Greenwich Meridian Page 249 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software RADAR RAdio Distancing And Ranging Microwave pulses used to detect objects usually metallic based on wave reflection Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services RTCM In the
114. OK button The object will be displayed in the chart and added to the Manual Update History list the Added action Added will be added to the object actions list QP NOTE The new object is added to the Extrascale dataset To add a manual update to the chart from a Notice to Mariners do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab 2 Inthe databases drop down list select a database to which you want to add a manual update 3 Press the Add New button The Add New Object dialog will open Type Point C Line C Area Search Find Obstructions and foul areas Obstructions in general a Snags stumps a Wellheads a Diffusers y cribs Ga fish havens a foul areas WV From Notice to Mariner Figure 56 Chart gt Manual Update tab Add New Object dialog 4 Select an object from the objects list To find an object use the Search function enter the name of the object to the Search field and press the Find button 5 After selecting the object set the object geometry type Select a Point Line or Area option The geometry types that are not available for the specified object remain dimmed 9301584 10 Page 73 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 Set the From Notice to Mariner checkbox and press the OK button The Add New Object from Notice to Mariner dialog will open Add New Object from Notice to Mariner Database Professional Notice 111 Source Producing Agency
115. Out button halves it e The Original Scale option changes the scale to the original scale of the chart that is currently in the view bins e The Best scale option displays a chart with the largest scale available for the position of the own v Best Scale ship The chart is displayed at its original scale SF NOTE The Best Scale option is only available if the Navigation mode is on Bro scale the chart view using the mouse wheel Turn the mouse wheel forward to increase the current view scale and backward to decrease the current view scale This way the current view scale is increased decreased by 5 with every turn of the wheel SF NOTE In case the mouse wheel has no effect left click in the chart to return the active focus to the chart view 5 3 Bookmarks The current chart view is defined by the position of the screen center the current scale and the current chart display settings Using the Bookmarks option you can save the current screen coordinates and chart settings to a bookmark When this bookmark is opened later the displayed chart will be identical To use bookmarks do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 2 Enter the name of the bookmark to the bookmark names field in the Bookmarks section 3 Press the Add button The bookmark will be saved and added to the bookmarks list 4 To open a previously saved bookmark select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop down list and press the Go To
116. Page 102 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download The Easy Mode download option is a preset option and allows you downloading weather forecasts with one click This option allows downloading of all weather products listed in your subscription Configure weather download request using the Setup Easy Mode function After the request is configured you can order data by simply pressing the Download button in the Weather Presentation Easy Mode or Weather Packages panels e Aa download weather data using the Easy Mode option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series _ Packages Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 10 12 2008 15 00 Wednesday Go Today Download v Settings Expandinfo gt gt ImportjwP Figure 94 Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Figure 95 Weather gt Weather Packages Mode Download button Download button 2 Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E
117. Scroll the chart view to the chart you want to open and zoom in The chart will be opened and added to the non reported charts list The price of the chart will be deducted from the credit rest value To view the non reported charts list press the Non Reported button and to view the reported charts list press the Reported button In both lists names and data access expiry dates are displayed a i SF NOTE You can only view charts of the collections you are subscribed to 3 To refresh the data displayed in the Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab press the Refresh button 4 The use of charts should be reported to the server within a specified time the mandatory date of the next report If you fail to report the charts you will be denied access to both reported and non reported charts To resume the access to data all charts should be reported and confirmed 5 To report the use of charts request updates using automatic or semi automatic updating functionality see chapters 6 2 1 Automatic Updating and 6 2 2 Semi automatic Updating Reports on the use of dynamically licensed data are sent automatically together with the update request and the confirmation answers containing new credit rest value new date of mandatory report and expiry date for all reported charts are sent back with updates L Aa change terms of the dynamic licensing service or to terminate the service do the following 1 Contact Jeppesen Marine and agree on the te
118. Software 5 To specify the device used to make the observation double click in the Tool field to make it editable and select the device from the devices drop down list Depending on the specified device the error correction for the device is used in the position calculation ai D 4J NOTE The type of position fix you are using defines which fields of the observation entry should be filled For example for a fix by bearings Bearing Fix time and Tool fields should be filled and for a fix by ranges only Distance Fix time and Tool fields should be filled 6 To add an additional observation for a reference point select the point in the Reference points list and press the Add button to the right from the Observation table a new observation line will be added to the table You can enter observation data to the new line 7 To remove an observation select it in the Observation table and press the Remove button to the right from the table 8 After the observation data have been entered the line of position LOP built using the data is plotted in the chart view with the time of observation displayed on the line LOP s with different observation time are advanced to the time of the latest observed LOP When advancing a LOP the own ship course changes speed changes and set and drift between the two lines are accounted for Advanced LOP s are marked with a TPL mark Figure 143 LOP Range Figure 144 LOP Figure 145 LOP Arc
119. Software and Cautions panel Cautions list is displayed in the Cautions tab Voyage indicator has the following states When in the route monitoring mode the voyage has been started the Voyage indicator displays warnings regarding the own ship proceeding along the route see chapter 7 7 Route Monitoring i Voyage Voyage Off course Dev Ex B O ou The route monitoring mode is off The own ship is on the route The own ship course deviates from the route course The deviation from the route XTE is more than the set value Own ship is too far from the route The indicator notifies that the own ship is approaching a waypoint Set the time before the waypoint at which the ECDIS will notify you using the Pre turn Warning setting in the Route gt Start Voyage gt Settings tab The indicator also notifies that own ship is approaching a waypoint The indicator is supposed to prompt the mariner to start turning Set the time before the waypoint using the Pre turn Acknowledgement setting in the Route gt Start Voyage gt Settings tab Own ship is at the waypoint and must turn to take the next leg course Own ship does not move or moves in the direction opposite to the direction of the route Own ship reached the voyage destination point System Warnings indicator has the following states The System Warnings indicator notifies the user about the caution conditions see chapter 7 6 Al
120. To display hide the supplementary data of a specified database do the following l Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab The supplementary data display is configured in the Supplementary Chart Info section Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update New Window Bookmarks Display Type Supplementary Chart Info Base Databases Professional New Center C MAP Tides tidal heights and streams N 00 00 000 GMDSS areas E000 00 000 __ SAR regions Improved background and overview charts Print Chart Goto Position oe Figure 40 Chart gt Data Display tab Supplementary Chart Info 2 In the Databases drop down list select a database If the database contains supplementary data layers they will be listed in the pane below 3 To display a supplementary layer data set the checkbox to the left from the section name The data will be displayed immediately To hide a supplementary layer data clear the checkbox near the data layer name Page 58 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 6 4 Depth Areas Presentation Depth areas presentation is configured in the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab in the Contours section In the section values of three contours are set the safety contour the shallow contour and the deep contour The value of the safety depth is also set here The contours values are used in the ECDIS for distinguishing on the chart d
121. To view information about a tide you should select it To select a tide right click on it in the chart or find it in the tidal stations list and select it there Information about the tide is displayed in the Tide Info section Echo Sounder Ti i Synchronization Diagram i Monitor K Switch Tides On Off UTC Time curenttime Time Zone UTC 05 00 2009 10 02 13 58 Play Tide Type Semi Diual 0 8 n mi above entrance Allowa J From High Water 01h 32m 130th Street Hudson River 2 5 miles above mouth Little Sa From Low Water 07h 40m ae ATT TT TINT PA tcl IE Current Water Level 1 47 X dL 3 miles above A1A highway bridg ann oo NA 37th Avenue Long Island City Ez E a o 39 62 2S aan esas TE J T 2000 1003 0223 Waters 1m gt Figure 80 Info gt Tides Info tab After the tide has been found information about it as well as the information about a tidal stream can be displayed for any date and time To set the date and time use the time configuration tool the same for Tides Info and Streams Info panels Using the tool you can do the following actions Figure 8 Time setting e Choose the time type UTC Time or Local Time in the time type drop down list Local Time is the difference between the UTC Time and the Time Zone e Set the date and time for calculation of tides and streams characteristics set the date and time in the date and
122. Token Each license is issued for a specified System ID You will be able to use a license only if it is issued for your System ID and only if the correct eToken is connected to the system The System ID information is available in the Data gt Licensing tab and in the Info gt System Info tab For details about ordering and purchasing licenses contact your charts supplier After the licenses have been obtained as a licenses file or as 16 digit license codes they must be installed on the system to enable the ECDIS application to decrypt and use the data for the chart database only the coverage for which you have purchased licenses can be displayed 9301584 10 Page 33 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 2 1 Installing Licenses Manually You can install licenses manually if you have 16 digit license codes e aa install a license manually do the following 1 Open the Data gt Licensing tab 2 Inthe Databases drop down list select the database for which you are applying the license 3 Press the Add manually button to open the pane for manual licenses installation Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic nee Auto Import lt y es ex Catalogue Database Licensing Updating 57 System ID Databases C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Professional Data Set or Area Name Add License manually Display expired licenses before date Zone 0 Zone 1 Area 1 Zone 1 Area 10 7 A AAA Licen
123. Total 9450 kb Save Request Load Request Delete all scheduled Send Request Cancel Figure 107 Weather Download Request dialog Scheduled request dialog 3 Set the data request add products from the Add new product drop down list select product parameters in the Products field set data coverage in the Coverage field select the forecast period in the Period field and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download the Setup Easy Mode procedure 9301584 10 Page 111 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 8 You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later To do so press the Save Request button in the Save As dialog indicate the location where the file will be saved enter the file name and press the Save button The request configuration will be saved to an xml file To download a previously saved request configuration press the Load Request button in the Open dialog select the request configuration file and press the Open button The request configuration will be loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog After the request has been configured in the Download at box select or enter the time at which you want to receive weather data every day Press the Send Request button Depending on the communication type set in
124. United States the Federal Communications Commission FCC and U S Coast Guard use RTCM standards to specify radar systems Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons and the basic version of Digital Selective Calling DSC radios Range The distance between two specified points usually the ship and a mark Range from Ship to Cursor The distance between the ship icon and the cursor Raster Chart Charts where the chart information is stored as a rasterized image Examples are raster charts are Raster Plus RPL BSB and GeoTIFF Rasters are the scanned images of the original paper chart Rate Of Turn ROT The speed at which heading is changing Rhumb Line A Rhumb Line is a line of constant bearing Unlike great circles rhumb lines are usually not the shortest path between two points on a sphere Part of the utility of rhumb lines is that they can be drawn as straight lines on Mercator projections Rhumb lines have the advantage of being easy to navigate because they follow a constant bearing The parallels of the earth are examples of rhumb lines Rhumb lines are undefined values at the poles A rhumb line of sufficient length will usually tend to spiral around the earth towards a pole forming a loxodrome Such spiraling rhumb lines will form a logarithmic spiral on a polar stereographic projection ROT See Rate Of Turn Route Desired path of travel created on a chart or grid and consisting of starting ending and a
125. a point object indicating a predicted or actual tidal stream or current vector with effective time and strength In the table below comeey pet Prenatan types attribute sets and categories of mariners objects are described Geometry Type and Presentation Type and Presentation Object Attributes Category ram ame ae Information Scale maximum undefined apnea Scale minimum NMT not more than Category of NLT not less than clearing line Information Scale maximum Scale minimum Information Object name Scale maximum Scale minimum Local time User s remark Information Object name Mariner s Scale maximum feature Scale minimum Local time User s remark Page 76 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Information Scale maximum Scale minimum undefined Mariner s note Category of Information h mariners note caution Local time User s remark Information Object name Manufacturer s Scale maximum feature Scale minimum Local time User s remark undefined dead Ea reckoning estimated Scale minimum visual astronomical Input identifier Radar Decca GPS l Glonass Local time Loran Tchaika Position finding MFDF Omega method Transit Tsikada dGPS dGlonass dOmega dLoran dDecca Position Orientation Scale minimum undefined Tidal stream or Category of current current vector and tidal stream predicted Curr
126. abase Name Test z Convert Install Media Copyuserpermit Apply S63 cell permits Apply SA Certificate 57 source data Processing Chart Add Remove Catalogue Database Licensing ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d UPDATES Turn off the errors report Show Log ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d BASE ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d BASE lV ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d BASE lV ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c UPDATE ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c BASE M ENC Database H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c BASE na b Find databases Figure 24 Data gt Import S57 tab detected S 57 exchange sets displayed in the S57 source data pane 3 In the Database Name field enter the name of the database that will be created during the conversion process 4 Select an S 57 exchange set to be converted in the S 57 source data pane and press the Convert button The data conversion process will start The process is performed in two stages a At the first stage verification of S 57 data is performed Errors found during the verification process are recorded to a LOG file If any critical errors are found the conversion process is cancelled You can turn off the display of error messages To do so check the Turn off the errors report checkbox To turn the error messages display on clear the Turn off t
127. able 4 The following information is automatically entered and appears in the waypoint table as you plot waypoints on the chart WP Waypoint number cannot be changed LAT Waypoint latitude LON Waypoint longitude RAD NM Assigned turning radius at the waypoint Expressed in nautical miles Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window XTD NM Cross Track Distance XTD deviation from the track along the leg from this waypoint to the next The XTD value is used for determining dangers and cautions along the route Expressed in nautical miles Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window SPD Assigned speed on the leg from this waypoint to the next Expressed in knots Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window RL A choice of whether Rhumb Line v or Great Circle sailing will be applied from this waypoint to the next To switch between the Rhumb Line and Great Circle sailing click in the sell Default value is set in the Route Parameters gt Default Settings tab press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window DIST xx The distance from this waypoint to the next Expressed in measurement units set in the
128. achment communication type you will have files with weather packages saved in some location on your computer To be able to use the data you will need to load the files to the ECDIS To load weather packages press the Import JWP button in the Open dialog select the packages files and press the Open button The files will be loaded to the ECDIS Viewing extended information about a data request or a data package To view expanded information about a data request that is being processed or a received weather package select the package in the packages table and press the Expand Info button the button label will change to Hide Info The information will be displayed in the window below To hide the information press the Hide Info button Initiating the send receive process The Send Receive button initiates the data exchange procedure for a data request in case it is not done automatically The data exchange procedure includes sending the weather data request to the weather server and receiving and proceeding weather data packages The automatic send receive should be set through the Setup Connection function see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup Displaying weather data on the chart The Display button displays weather data received in a specified weather package on the chart To display weather data select a weather package in the packages list and press the Display button 9301584 10 Page 113 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Applica
129. adcast of either ITU R M I 371 w 6 or 12 S ABK XXXXXXXXX o gt ARN CRS SES fem ee 9301584 10 Page 215 of 259 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software gt DBT Depth Below Transducer Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Water depth referenced to the transducer S DBT x x f x F hh lt CR gt lt LF gt C ps owes M Measurement unit M for meters re Wo jo Woo Measurement unit F for fathoms not processed gt DPT Depth Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline Negative offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the part of the keel of interest For the ECDIS the offset is always negative so as to provide depth relative to the keel S DET aie cae a ar x x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt se mw own SC COR Water depth relative to the transducer in meters en Offset from transducer in meters distance from transducer to Maximum range scale in use not processed Page 216 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software gt DTM Datum Reference Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Local geodetic datum and datum offsets from a reference datum This sentence is used to define the datum to which a position location and geographic locations in subsequent sentences are referenced Latitude longitude
130. ahead the own ship All objects entering the guard zone and considered to be dangerous activate the alarm B To turn on and setup the anti grounding alarm do the following 1 Open the Config gt Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Antigrounding alarm tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units paian Setup as Lael Tool Ship Output and Time Buzzer On Off Antigrounding alarm Alarms Time of prediction 1 min Dangers safety distance 0 100 NM V Guard Zone sector 90 WV Danger objects inside Guard Zone Set Parameters Figure 170 Config gt Alarm Setup tab Antigrounding alarm tab 2 Set the anti grounding guard zone area it can be defined either by the time of prediction value or by the dangers safety distance the zone with the bigger area is considered as the anti grounding guard zone a Time of prediction enter a time value to the Time of prediction field default time is 5 minutes The time of prediction defines the length of the anti grounding guard zone which is the distance the own ship will cover for the specified time proceeding with the current speed b Dangers safety distance enter a distance value to the Dangers safety distance measurement units are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab The guard zone will be build using the set distance 3 To turn the display of the guard zone in the chart view on check the Guard Zone Sector checkbox To turn the guard zone d
131. ail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive data files in the response e mail Save the files to any location on your computer Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup Page 108 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 4 Custom Download The Custom download option allows downloading all weather products listed in your subscription Bro download weather data using the Custom download option do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode or the Weather gt Weather Packages tab Both these tabs have the Download button Press the arrow near the button to open the download options menu Select the Custom option The Weather Download Request dialog will open Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather _ Presentation Easy Mode Presentation AlarmArea TimeSeries Packages Date 15 12 2008 14 00 Monda
132. ake considerable time during which other functions of ECDIS are not available It is highly recommended to download weather data when not in operational mode The ECDIS implements the functionality allowing you to use Jeppesen Marine Weather service Using the weather functionality you can download weather and cyclones forecasts display weather data on the chart as well as analyze routes in terms of weather conditions along them and set alarms based on specified values of weather parameters Weather forecasts are produced as GRIB files and cyclones forecasts as XML files The forecasts are made for a specified period of time and you can see the weather parameters change within the time period for which the forecast was created The forecasts include data for a number of weather parameters such as pressure wind precipitation etc The parameters can be displayed on the chart separately Readings of weather parameters are provided at regular intervals of time The time for weather display can be set with a special time tool If there is no reading of a weather parameter for the time set for the parameter display the parameter value will be interpolated To get access to downloading weather data you will have to download subscription first Subscription provides information on weather products and weather parameters available to you You can download weather data over the Internet using the HTTP connection or by e mail 6 6 1 Weather Subscription
133. al number of updates 12 Plan 5 000 Apply Mark All Clear All Figure 47 Data gt Chart Catalogue tab chart information pane 5 To use the Find option for searching charts enter the name of the source paper chart to the Find field As you are entering the name symbols charts which have the symbols you are entering in their names will be selected in the catalogue Keep entering the chart name symbols until you find the right chart 9301584 10 Page 65 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 1 2 Viewing Chart Boundaries by Scale Levels All charts in the Jeppesen Marine chart database are divided into groups according to their scales and intended usage The groups are called scale levels see chapter 5 2 Scaling the Chart View Using the Chart Catalogue function you can display boundaries of charts in the chart view by scale levels asi To display chart boundaries by scale levels do the following 1 Open the Data gt Chat Catalogue tab 2 Select a database in the databases drop down list 3 In the Chart Boundaries section check checkboxes next to the scale level names and press the Apply button Boundaries of charts assigned to the selected scale levels will be displayed in the chart view 4 Use the Mark All button to mark all the scale levels and the Clear All button to unmark all the scale levels Underscl Larger scl Navig All other Nav Info Periodic Radar AIS ARPA Dangers Voyage Warnings Alarm Saf
134. alue gt lt setting gt lt section gt lt section name DirFinder 1 gt lt setting name BrgRMS gt lt value gt 0 1 lt value gt lt setting gt lt setting name BrgCorrection gt lt value gt 0 0 lt value gt lt setting gt lt section gt lt section name DirFinder2 gt lt setting name BrgRMS gt lt value gt 0 1 lt value gt lt setting gt lt setting name BrgCorrection gt lt value gt 0 0 lt value gt lt setting gt lt section gt lt root gt vid Save Reset_ __ Close Figure 149 LOP Position fix advanced parameters window 9301584 10 Page 143 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 To edit the LOP Position fix advanced parameters enter new values to the lt value gt fields of appropriate settings without changing the structure of the MODevices config xml file In the table below sections and settings of the file are described Section Setting Default Description Value DRActualisation SogRMS Ce Speed over ground root mean square error RMSE in knots For example if your speed over ground RMSE is 0 2 knots set the SogRMS value to Oe Radar BrgRMS Oe Radar bearing RMSE in degrees For example if your radar bearing RMSE is 0 5 degrees set the BrgRMS value to 0 5 BEQCOLreclLion Radar bearing constant correction in degrees If the radar bearing line deviates anticlockwise the correction should be positive if the bearing line deviates
135. ance equal selected CPA limit Traffic scenario identical to Figure 193 and Figure 194 Target 4 Target 5 i r r h Target 2 Somos W larget 3 i Own Ship W Target 1 Figure 201 Display of CDL CDS to the acquired targets from Figure 193 and Figure 194 Safe areas are easily identified in true motion overview 9301584 10 Page 183 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Target 4 Target 5 X Target 2 Target 3 Own Ship W Target 1 Figure 202 A change of course to starboard to pass ahead of target 4 and astern of target I with a safety distance margin equal selected CPA limit 8 5 2 Graphic Elements of the Anti collision Display The anti collision display functionality is based on visualization of potentially dangerous situations that can result in collision The anti collision image is built of collision danger lines and sectors built in true motion between the own ship and the targets surrounding it If there is a danger of collision of the own ship and any of the targets or if the distance or the time to closest point of approach between the own ship and a target are less than the user specified limits color indication is introduced in the anti collision image In the figure below all main features of the anti collision image are displayed Target Target Speed Vector CPA Limit Collision Danger Sector Collision Danger Line Own Ship Speed Vector Own Ship Figure 203 G
136. and Secondary Position Sources In the ECDIS you can use two ways to position the own ship e One or more GPS devices DGPS WAAS EGNOS etc compatible with the NMEA interface GPS devices used for positioning should be registered in the ECDIS see chapter Error Reference source not found Error Reference source not found e Dead reckoning see chapter 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning Several positioning devices can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time One of the devices is used as a primary position source and one as a secondary position source Both the own ship position defined with the primary positioning device and that defined with the secondary positioning device can be displayed in the chart view see chapter 7 1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track Using the display of both primary and secondary positions of the own ship you can monitor the reliability of various positioning devices L set a positioning device as a primary or a secondary position source do the following 1 Make sure that the positioning device you want to set as a primary or secondary position source is connected to the ECIDS and registered in the Config gt Input Output tab see chapter Error Reference source not found Error Reference source not found 2 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position sources are configured in the Position sources tab All positioning devices that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the Secondar
137. are The following route monitoring options can be set in the Route gt Start Voyage tab To set a pre turn warning switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre turn warning field Within the specified time from the course shift point the Voyage indicator in the indicators panel see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel will switch to the WOP Warn state the indicator color will become orange To set a pre turn acknowledgement switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre turn acknowledgement field Within the specified time from the wheel over position the Voyage indicator in the indicators panel see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel will switch to the WOP Ack state the indicator color will become red To be able to see tooltips when moving the mouse pointer over a waypoint in the chart view switch to the Settings tab and check the WPT tooltips checkbox To reverse the route so that the end point becomes the start point press the Reverse Route button and confirm the operation To restore the route initial direction outpress the Reverse route button and confirm the operation If the WPT labels checkbox is set waypoint labels are displayed on the route in the route monitoring mode If the checkbox is not set the Bearing label and the Speed label options are not available If the Bearing label checkbox is set the planned bearing to the next waypoint will be displayed on each leg of the route If the Speed labe
138. argets tab ARPA Targets tab To view a target information select the target in the targets list In both ARPA Targets and SONAR targets tabs the following target information is displayed e Target number Target number e Name Target name e CPA Closest point of approach e TCPA Time to closest point of approach e Lat Lon The latitude and longitude of the target e COG Course over ground e SOG Speed over ground e Status Status of the target lost tracking etc e Range Distance from the own ship to the target e Bearing Bearing to the target from own ship e Time Time of last received message e True Relative Indicates if the target heading vector is true or relative If the vector is measured in relation to the North direction it is true and if it is measured in relation to the own ship course it is relative To scroll the chart view so that to display a target in the chart view center double click on a target entry Page 172 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software When the distance between an ARPA or sonar target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous approach set in the Config gt Targets tab the target is assigned the dangerous target status and changes its style it becomes red and starts flashing To stop the target flashing select it in the targets table in the Info gt Targets tab and press the Acknowledge button The target will still hav
139. arms There are no caution conditions currently If the cautions indicator is yellow there is a caution condition To view caution conditions left click on the indicator The Alarms and Cautions panel will open Alarms indicator has the following states The Alarms indicator notifies the user about the alarm conditions see chapter 7 6 Alarms There are no alarm conditions currently The alarm conditions indicator where descriptions of alarms are displayed is empty Alarm Exceed deviation If the alarm indicator is flashing red there is an alarm condition 9301584 10 Descriptions of alarm conditions are displayed in the alarm conditions indicator To acknowledge a condition left click on the alarm conditions indicator To open the alarms panel left click on the alarms indicator In the panel the list of all current Page 15 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software alarms is displayed 2 4 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Panel Move the pointer over the scale indicator to expand the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel Current Chart Scale 1 166316 77 1 Overscale factor oom In e oom Out me Comes Chart Scale Edit Field 1 166316 Original Scale Original Chart Scale Best Scale a Best Scale f Man Over Board position i rd Fix own ship position f ERBL tool Check Points tool inal i The Man Overboard button plots a MOB man overboard po
140. as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an ARPA radar with safe passing distance set by the VRM radius from centre of own ship Page 182 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software This imagined region in the relative display can be regarded as a cone shaped collision danger region in which the user selected safety margin is violated if the relative vector terminates inside the sector It can be transformed to appear in the true motion display as shown in Figure 200 and is hereinafter referred to as the Collision Danger Sector CDS F T F b3 F i PPC 7 F k Fa hn f he F ks F ia ri F i S F LS F i F S Fi F h F T hy E hy ane Pa aceeeeeeesseeee A a F asseeeeere ere re i oo a ai Hi ah EE E E E ee ee ee ee ee de ne de ne ne ne de de a 1 m E e ee a m ee ee ee a ee Se a m ao O Se eee ee E SERN oc Gna a TE CTGa 008 Ge dessa ee Target pe E eo E Own Ship a Relative vector Figure 200 Collision danger sector CDS red in true motion display as it appears from transformation of collision danger sector as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an ARPA radar The CDS has identical properties as the CDL and can thus be displayed to any acquired target in a true motion overview Figure 201 and Figure 202 show how the OOW easily can identify the exact amount of evasive action required to pass with a minimum safety dist
141. ase of a ECDIS cluster the dynamic licensing information is distributed over the network to all nodes After the subscription has been activated the following information is displayed in the Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab e credit rest in the Credit Rest field the credit rest value is sent to you each time you receive updates e next mandatory report date in the Next Report Date field Page 36 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e last confirmation date in the Last Confirmation Date field e the list of databases available for dynamic licensing in the Available Databases list e the list of collections available for dynamic licensing in a specified database in the Available Collections list the collections are listed in your subscription i Afe x Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic a Auto Import fl Licensing Catalogue Database Updating S57 lv Enable Dynamic Licensing Available Collections Non reported said Available Databases null Code 0x10000 Type 0x8 datasets datasets ENC 7 null Code 0x80000 Type 0x8 Credit Rest 4986 Next Report Date 08 deBpaan 2009 Confirmation Date 05 deppaaa 2009 Refresh Figure 15 Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab data displayed after the service activation t view charts using dynamic licensing do the following 1 Make sure that the Enabled Dynamic Licensing checkbox in the Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab is checked 2
142. ashing dashed red circle It flashes until it is acknowledged in the Info gt Targets tab If the target is dangerous its color stays red if it is not dangerous its color changes to green Tracked target any distance Dangerous target Yes distance to If a target approaches the own ship to the distance dangerous closer than the distance to dangerous approach set approach or in the Config gt Targets tab it is designated the CPA lt CPA to dangerous status and the target symbol becomes Dangerous or red and starts flashing The target flashes until it is PCPA lt TCPA acknowledged Once acknowledged targets remain to dangerous red until not dangerous anymore Selected target any distance Target selected in the chart view is automatically selected in the targets table in the Info gt Targets tab Lost target any distance A symbol representing the last valid position of a target before reception of data was interrupted Reference target any distance Tracked radar targets designated as reference targets are labeled with the letter R no display ai D QP NOTE any distance All target symbols are oriented to the targets course The target symbols have speed vectors extended in the direction of the targets course for a length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship s prediction vector min COG 90 SOG 10kn prediction time interval Page 1
143. at lt CPAmax AN D TCP Actual lt TCPA max CDL is highlighted with red TCPAactuar lt TCPA min CDS is off CDL is displayed Distance lt CPA min Page 186 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 5 5 Indication of Collision Risk The risk of collision of the own ship with a target is defined in the anti collision display functionality by the position of the own ship speed vector in relation to the CDS and CDL e Ifthe end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS the distance at the CPA will be less then the specified minimum CPA distance e Ifthe end of the own ship speed vector lies directly on the CDL the distance at the CPA will equal zero which means that the vessels will collide In both cases there is a risk of collision To indicate the collision risk the CDS is shaded orange If the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS there is no collision risk and the CDS is not shaded The table below shows how graphic elements of the anti collision display change depending on the collision risk Change Conon ing CDS is not shaded The own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS CDS is shaded orange The own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS 9301584 10 Page 187 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 5 6 Example and Recommendations for the Anti collision Display Use Consider two vessels own ship and a target on collision course The ran
144. bes the importance of the entry information warning or alarm e Type A general description of the entry e g POS Position User Remark Chart Scale and Angle e Date The date and time of the entry UTC or Ship s depending of the time system setting e Remark Recorded information itself It contains detailed information on what has been added to the logbook coordinates course echo sounder depth etc To set a filter and display entries of selected classes only check those entry classes you want to be displayed Select the classes in the classes list in the left part of the panel In order to deselect a class clear its checkbox The option is not available for the track log The record classes are the following e System Changes made to the system configurations e Track Logging position changing chart scale e Voyage Logging events when sailing a route e User records Entry added by the operator e Targets ARPA and Sonar activity e AIS targets AIS activity To refresh the log book data press the Refresh button Usually this is not required as the log book data are refreshed automatically at regular intervals To add a remark press the Add Remark button the Add Remark window will open Enter the remark in the window and press the OK button A User records class entry will be added to the log book If you add a user remark when the track log is on it still will be added to the main log
145. broken down into several data packages that are sent to you in several e mails Set the parameter to 0 or 1 if you want weather packages of any size to be sent to you in one e mail 6 Set communication parameters in the Communication parameters section Depending on the type of communication you selected in the Communication type option you will be given a possibility to configure a set of parameters specific for the selected communication type 7 After you have configured connection you can save settings for further use press the Export settings button in the Save As dialog window indicate location where the file with settings will be saved enter the file name and press the Save button The settings will be saved to an xm1 file 8 To load previously saved settings press the Import settings button in the Open dialog window select the xm1 file with saved settings and press the Open button The settings from the file will be loaded The following communication types are available gt Internet HTTP Automatic connection type If you set the Internet HTTP communication type the ECDIS will use the standard HTTP protocol to send requests and receive weather data You can configure HTTP parameters in the Setup Connection window in the HTTP parameters branch of the connection parameters tree E Setup Connection X Communication type Internet HTTP Data center Europe Timeout s 120 Attachment size Kb 1000 HTTP parame
146. button The chart will be scrolled to the center position saved in the bookmark and scaled accordingly 5 To delete a bookmark select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop down list press the Delete button and confirm the bookmark deletion 9301584 10 Page 49 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend A vector electronic chart is a part of geographic information system An electronic chart displays data stored in a geographic database The database stores records of geographical objects The objects are defined by a set of attributes These are the values of the attributes that define the way the objects are displayed on the screen Besides the attributes defining the appearance and the position of an object on the electronic chart the set of attributes of the object may include additional information attributes such as for example the object name textual information picture and other attributes that are not required to be displayed in the chart To get access to this information use the Object Info function The function displays attributes of objects in a separate panel the Object Info panel To open the panel right click in any position in the chart view The Object Info panel will open with a list of all objects that were under the mouse pointer when you right clicked in the chart There are different types of objects They are point line and area object types Hence a
147. cate information eseeeeeeeeerreerrereee 42 sal iy depi enan a e E 59 Sa ley ZONE oseni eaten E EAR EA 157 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software scale CHAT ViEW asinine a R 47 scalo statuis ii CAlOF naaran AS 12 scheduled weather download cccccccccssssceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 scrolle bart Vio Ws crseretectrtescmarseecesne emer aa anemeits 47 semi automatic chart updating ceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Sha Ow OMOUR osne a e e 59 SHIP WeSPONSE aiian a Mebeseeesereicansenets 130 software modules licensing nnnenunnunnensseererrrrrrrrreren 39 Sonar targets data norite eiA TAAS 172 troels dis pia Viner eren eee eee RC 173 Sonar lost alarm ae veceronusadeeernenanesnmiadvesasieereeim neo lsaeenGaed 159 source scale Mdicator nesrin a A 12 Sarns ECDIS ascent had ee a en 2 1 supplementary chart datascience E 58 synchronization of data AI ALON sists saute a shale a a 28 MONOT oee eo sasdsesaan wea E aweeicucian egsteaientea asa 26 TOTE Se E E A A 29 Syste ni e 1 Uo dol 6 eee an ae a SO ee 21 system information 0 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 22 system setup checkup oi tesco cele tence eeesee a aaa de ae L 21 color differentiation test cccccccsessseessssseesesseeseeseees 23 diskspace COMI Ol sorses reran 22 IMO Oee ctr Satine hae Stats ear aaa ate Stews 22 Measurement UNMIS onecie a R 19 MONIMLOP Orie hnES Sanieren E RA A 20 O r eae a E tenses 19 Up
148. ccepted the manual fix symbol is displayed in the chart view with the time and means of observation e V the fix was made using visual bearings 9301584 10 Page 141 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e R the fix was made using radar ranges e VR the fix was made using both visual bearings and radar ranges 3 At the moment when the manual fix is accepted an entry about it is added to the logbook The manual fix entry may look as follows Date 30 03 2009 From 00 00 To 23 59 Ship stime 7 GM x _ Start Play Back J Cycle playback Replay speed a Man obs positic 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 48 00 42 51 994 N 009 13 686 W reliable Updat Man obs positic 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 46 57 42 51 707 N009 13 768 W reliable Man obs discre 30 03 2009 13 48 0C distance and bearing shift 0 377 NM 194 1 FixRMS 0 009NM Man obs measu 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 46 34 42 52 746 N009 11 093 W distance 2 2 Man obs measu 30 03 2009 13 48 0C Observation time 13 46 57 42 52 887 N 009 16 293 W distance 2 2 ee ee Sm eee ee eee eee ele Refresh Add Remark GoTo Position Print _LogBookArchive _ M Remark Hints Figure 148 Log Book panel manual fix entries ai D SF NOTE Before the start of a new manual position fix operation clear all previous observations only if the observations are not to be used in this operation To do so
149. ce of cautions does not affect this highlighting Yellow the leg is a rhumb line with the length of more than 195 Miles and the tool is unable to check it No color the Check route tool has found no dangers 9301584 10 Page 87 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Set default route parameters to set parameters of the route that will be used as default when the route is created press the Parameters button the Route Parameters window will open Switch to the Default Settings tab set necessary parameters and press the Apply button for the changes to take effect The following route parameters are available in the tab SPD kn speed on the leg used by the ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from one waypoint to the next one in knots Route Parameters XTD NM allowable deviation from the Change Settings Default Settings track along the leg from one waypoint to the SPD kn next in nautical miles XTD NM RAD NM RAD NM turning radius at the waypoint in Great Circle nautical miles Show WP Great Circle if the checkbox is set route Show Speed legs are considered orthodromies if the sis iat checkbox is not set route legs are considered acide ai EE loxodromes Figure 71 Route Parameters window Show WP turns on the display of waypoint Default Settings tab symbols in the chart view if the checkbox is not set waypoint symbols
150. city vectors To predict the ship position over a period of time three vectors are used e Ground stabilized vector vector based on SOG speed over ground and COG course over ground values the black dotted line with one minute graduation marks and a double arrow end To display this vector check the Ground stabilized vector checkbox e Water stabilized vector vector based on STW speed through water and HDG heading values the black dotted line with no graduation marks and a single arrow end To display this vector check the Water stabilized vector checkbox Figure 134 Velocity vectors e Prediction vector vector based on STW HDG and ROT rate of turn values the red line with a single arrow end To display this vector check the Prediction vector checkbox To set the time period for the ship position prediction select a value from the Vector length drop down list e g if it is set to 6 minutes the vector length will show how far the vessel will get in 6 minutes with the current speed To be able to evaluate the ability of the own ship to pass a narrow place through a lock under a bridge etc the Sight lines function is used The Sight lines function turns on the display of the passage corridor of the own ship You can see the passage corridor at the chart scale at which the own ship symbol is shown as a scaled area symbol and larger If the own ship symbol is shown as a point symbol the ship passage corrido
151. ck if the license is installed in the Input Output program module Data gt Licensing tab press the License list button and select Software Modules in the Databases drop down list The ECDIS IO ECDIS license should be installed If not apply the license and restart ECDIS The date without log book records Select a different date in the Date field is selected in the Log book panel There are no records for the Set the time period from 00 00 the Log book records are not displayed selected time period From field to 23 59 the To field Page 212 of 259 9301584 10 Operation failed Cannot open logbook file message is displayed when trying to archive a log book page Page with the Active label can t be archived Brightness of the screen is not sufficient Alarm exists but no sound is available Tides and Streams information is not displayed Failed to display weather package message appears Weather package is received correctly and loaded but no weather data is displayed 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software No filter options are marked The log book page is currently displayed in the log book The page you are trying to archive is for the day before the currently displayed day The page you are trying to archive is for the day before the Active day The Active page is being recorded and can t be archived The Monitor brightness
152. clockwise the correction should be negative For example if your radar bearing is 0 5 degrees wrong clockwise set the BrgCorrection value to 0 5 DistRMS 375 Radar distance RMSE in nautical miles For example if your radar distance RMSE is 4 5 nautical miles set the DistRMS value to 4 5 DrsteCorrection Radar distance constant correction in nautical miles If the radar defined range exceeds the true range value the correction should be negative if the radar defined range falls behind the true range value the correction should be positive For example if your radar defined ranges exceed true range values by 0 2 nautical miles set the DistCorrection value to Ore Page 144 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software Section Setting Default Description Value Dirkinder iL BrgRMS Oren Port direction finder bearing RMSE in degrees For example if your port direction finder bearing RMSE is 0 5 degrees set the BrgRMS value to 0 5 BrgCorrection Port direction finder bearing constant correction in degrees If the port direction finder dial is constantly turned anticlockwise the correction should be positive if the dial is turned clockwise the correction should be negative For example if your port direction finder dial is turned to 0 3 degrees anticlockwise set the BrgCorrection value to 0 3 DirFinder 2 BrgRMS Os Starboard direction finder bearing RMSE in degrees Fo
153. computer To load the weather package files use the Import JWP function in the Weather Packages panel i SF NOTE When using an e mail connection make sure to configure settings correctly Connection settings configuration is a one time job that should be done by an IT specialist to ensure the right options and settings are used After you set the Internet connection up you can test it Testing the connection allows you to see if you have set it correctly Testing procedure involves two operations sending data to the server and receiving data from the server Bro test the connection with the weather server do the following 1 To start testing go to the Weather gt Weather Packages panel press the Settings button and select the Test Connection option from the drop down menu The Test Connection window will open W Test Connection pul Send data Testing Receive data Waiting _ Jestconnection Figure 113 Test Connection window 2 Press the Test connection button Testing operations status is displayed in the Send data and Receive data fields Operation statuses can be the following e N A no test was started e Waiting testing of the operation has not started yet e Testing testing of the operation is being performed at the moment e Error error description an error occurred during testing of the operation the error description is given in brackets e Passed the operation was successfu
154. ctly set If a brighter display is required use the contrast control but preferably do not adjust the controls unless lighting conditions on the bridge change After the black level has been set you can proceed with the color test For the test you need to display the color differentiation diagram in the chart view e aa open the color diagram do the following 1 Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered see chapter 4 1 Installing and Displaying Database and added to the view see chapter 4 1 2Displaying Database 2 Open the Data gt Chart Catalogue tab In the databases drop down list select the ChartletsBase database Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop down list 3 Double click on the AAS5C1WOO dataset the dataset contains the color differentiation test diagram The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset The color diagram will be brought up to the chart view 9301584 10 Page 23 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 If you can t see the color test diagram make sure the following arrangements are made the display type is set to All other the display type indicator is All other Al other Jf b the chart presentation type is set to S52 the S52 option is selected in the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Presentation section c the chart view scale is larger than 1 16 500 5 The diagram cons
155. d 4 Enter the Bearing to and Bearing from values Select the mode of calculation Great Circle or Rhumb Line in the Mode drop down list 6 Press the Calculate End Point button to calculate coordinates of the end point The end point coordinates will be displayed in the End Point section To show the line connecting the start point and the end point in the chart view press the Show button 7 To clear the calculator press the Clear All button si To calculate great circle points do the following 1 Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Great Circle tab Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor image Info info Info Info Calculator Monitor Show Clear All Distance Bearing Great Circle Datum Transformation 7 00 00 000 S 000 00 000 Start Point 00 22 903 N 000 44 470 Step 50 000 NM N 00 00 000 00 45 803 N 001 28 843 r 000 00 000 01 08 695 N 002 13 275 aiai E000 00 000 01 31 575 N 002 57 718 sees anaes ae 1 54 439 N 003 42 177 Bahl 02 17 285 N 004 26 656 N 10 00 000 02 40 107 N 005 11 157 F020 00 000 03 02 902 N 005 55 687 03 25 665 N 006 40 247 03 48 394 N NN7 94 AAI T Figure 229 Info gt Navi Calculator panel Great Circle tab for the great circle calculations 2 Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections To show the line connecting the posit
156. d The vessel symbol plotted in the middle of the diagram The vessel speed and direction vector the arrow pointing outward from the center of the vessel symbol shows the direction and velocity of the vessel The direction is the angle between the imaginary vertical axis of the diagram and the vessel speed and direction vector measured horizontally from North to whatever direction you are pointing The vessel speed is defined with the help of concentric axes representing speed the value of the speed lies in the point where the vector ends Speed of the vessel in the current position is taken from the route characteristics speed on the leg The Danger red shadow zone covers all points representing combination of speed and course at which there is a danger of having a sudden increase in roll amplitude of the vessel if the vessel speed and direction vector end lies within the red shadow zone the vessel is in danger of capsizing The conclusion is made from comparison of the vessel natural roll period with the relative wave period if the difference between values is less than 30 the resonance can occur This combination can in some cases be dangerous An alarm for a given threshold of roll amplitude can be made in the Weather Alarm Area panel SF NOTE The Inspect Ship Position function operates with specific ship dimensions and other parameters The parameters are set using the Ship Response Options setup tool 9301584 10 Page 131 of
157. d 5 will pass astern of own ship if their course and speed are maintained The CDL represents the situation where CPA 0 0 n miles The general solution is an actual collision danger sector CDS which can be found by introducing a safety margin CPA limit with respect to minimum passing distance Figure 195 shows the collision scenario Figure 187 with simultaneous display of CDL and relative vector as it can be imagined from radar display i Pa M Fi ty n F F Fi ppc Sa F h F g b Pa hy F k T Ty f T Fa 7 Pal wi af b F a in F hn F F ty Pa aL ks a hn Ka a Own Ship Target Relative Vector Figure 195 Collision risk interpretation in 1 true motion Tip of own ship s vector touches the collision danger line to target 2 relative motion The relative vector has direction towards centre of own ship Page 180 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Figure 196 shows that the safety margin can be introduced by a circle that is located at the centre of own ship with radius equal the user selected CPA limit In the relative motion display of an ARPA radar the safety margin is usually set by utilizing the variable range marker VRM cal w Fi 3i aw he Fi o PPC a hy Ea hy F w E E Ta T F Ta F at Fa as i F k F Fa P T T Yi Fa KA Pl a 5 SS EE EE E E EE EE EE E E E ee ie eee F i f 1 Own Ship l Target
158. d by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the general telecommunications network principally to call ships automatically Mean High Water MHW A tidal datum The average of the higher high water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Higher High Water MHHW A tidal datum The average of all the high water heights of each tidal day observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Low Water MLW A tidal datum The average of all the low water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch 9301584 10 Mean Lower Low Water MLLW A tidal datum The average of the lower low water height of each tidal day observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mercator Projection The Mercator projection is a conformal projection devised by Gerhardus Mercator in 1569 Similar to a cylindrical projection in that the horizontal and vertical distances are stretched towards the poles Unlike the cylindrical projection the vertical and horizontal stretching of the chart preserves shape and direction Due to increasing distortion towards the poles Mercator charts are not very useful for representing cartographic information towards the poles Lines of latitude and longitude are straight lines on the Mercator projection On Mercator charts rhumb lines can be drawn as straight lines because the Mercator projection preserves bearing MMSI See Maritime Mobile Service Identity MOB See Man Overb
159. d the own ship check the Show position checkbox The radar position is set in the Config gt Own Ship gt Radar tab 5 Set a radar range select a value in the Radar Ranges list 6 Inthe informational Radar Pulse section the radar pulse duration is displayed 7 To set values of different clutters to optimize the radar picture use options from the Clutters section the Sea the Rain and the Gain clutters When setting values to clutters you can either use sliders or select a value from drop down lists For Sea and Gain clutters there is a possibility to set them to auto configuring to do so check the Auto checkboxes 8 To adjust the radar image orientation use the Orientation Adjustment scale 9 In case there are failures in transmission of one of radar pulses video synchro bearing or heading indicator of this pulse in the Radar Diagnostics section is colored red If there are no failures indicators are green To use the radar image overlay functionality the ECDIS has to be connected to a PCI radar processor board 9301584 10 Page 175 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 5 Anti collision Display A IMPORTANT Official anti collision tools that must be used for decision making are type approved Radar ARPA or ATA or EPA This anti collision tool may only be used as a supplementary tool A IMPORTANT The Anti collision display module requires individual licensing The anti collision display f
160. data in the chart view You can also receive messages from the AIS targets and send the own ship AIS data and other messages to other vessels A IMPORTANT For the ECDIS to be able to receive AIS data the AIS receiver should be registered in the ECDIS The registration is carried out in the Config gt Input Output tab This can only be done by the installer 8 2 1 AIS Targets Data Information of all AIS targets with which the contact has been established is displayed in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab The tab is made up of two panes one of the panes contains the list of all AIS targets and the other displays detailed information about a specified target Echo Sounder Als Sere Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Diagram Monitor rge _Image Info info Info Info Calculator Monitor Own ship 275000000 Position report Static and voyage data COG 230 0 50G 13 0 kn type Vessel 111111111 MIR COG 067 0 S0G 0 0 kn type Vessel MMSI 111111111 ship name ae Pleasure Craft 00 25 683 N 000 00 459 E Position accuracy High accuracy COG SOG HDG ROT 067 0 0 0 kn 67 0 0 7 Nav status under way using engine n FEE Acknowledge Acknowledge All Show Received Messages Figure 178 Info gt AIS Monitor tab To view a target s information select the target in the targets list The information is displayed in two tabs the Position Report tab and the Static and Voyage Related Data tab
161. dating SOFWALE a na a E a ea Ee 24 system warnings indicatort eeensseeeeseseeeererrrrrrrrrrrrrrreee 15 terminante EE DiS rrara a 11 LOX SEINO Senn A E R 61 TCaleSUL ANNs 2 Mirstusec ain auatelenacenagae a aE 97 UCL CS ESES E AIE ESE E AT ET 95 Ume SeU aa E E E 19 trie TOMO cra irii E A A E 153 LY POS Ol mariner ONEC Sirei E REE 1S updating charts byenan eee on ated ee ee deen ie Rene 68 6 PEE ier EEPE Pe er E E oni emir S mre eT Eng ERT CST 69 Manua y earen a elena selina ti Ut cD tetesdaet 70 Mariner OD COLSi cs he ste aise a See mariner objects OVER AMUSING inns de ies celteectack SS 67 PEW 2 W aeee E E anoueekansunuseauanns 69 updating ECDIS SOlwWare sci cccnuenritecnenietiomeuenate 24 voyage INGICALON inae s 15 voyage monitoring TUMORS e A shams ie csieaate 161 Pane lorena aa ial sll ot Ble ln na ae te al 162 voyage OAM acceded ead ees ate arated ede tae emai 89 VOV ACS SCN UN es acca ee rete eaters eats etna ee eee 91 WAY POLE FO Tosning EEP iKa SE anae 163 weather download setup CONTMPUTE COMMECE OM i aa a 114 E Mail Folder Send Recv communication type 116 E Mail Inbox via MAPI communication type 116 E Mail Manually via Attachment communication type E PE E L EA Aad Mase TE USA T E TE TE TA 117 E Mail SMTP POP3 communication type 006 116 Internet HTTP communication type eeeeeeereeees 115 PEST COMME CLION irse a e 117 weather forecast ATI are IS ae paa tonmescands 1
162. de is on Drift parameters calculated automatically are Position value is taken from the sensor data Heading and speed values are taken from the sensors data Restart Voyage Check validity of the Heading sensor data Enable the option check the Prediction vector checkbox in the Navi gt Own ship past track and vector tab Contact your system administrator Set larger scale value Enable the option check the True scale ship image checkbox in the Config gt Navigation Data tab Install licenses on the PC Synchronize routes manually in the Route gt Route Planning tab select the PC in the drop down list next to the Synchronize routes with button and press the button 9301584 10 Cannot load route for voyage message appears at the Voyage start It s not possible to print data from Route Planning Logbook Chart Communication error message is displayed during importing a route from device Radar displayed image is _ not Could not start radar processor message is displayed when starting the radar data reception The Start radar button is pressed but no radar image displayed Radar image and chart do not match 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Some problems with the route Printer is not set up in the system The importing operation was started after the route data had been sent from the device Radar is not
163. dedicated vertical pattern to the chart or the part of it that 1s over scaled the chart display sale is twice more than the original scale of the chart ENC boundary Turns on the display of borders of the ENC coverage Scale boundary Turns on the display of borders of areas covered with charts of different scale levels Chart boundary Turns on the display of chart borders Lat Lon grid Turns on the display of the Lon Lat grid Use SCAMIN Turns on the use of the SCAMIN minimum scale attribute of objects If the setting is on objects with the SCAMIN attribute are removed from the chart view once the chart view scale is less than the minimum scale of the object display 3 The settings take effect immediately after they have been set 9301584 10 Page 63 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 7 Printing Chart The ECDIS provides the possibility to print the chart currently displayed on the screen out si To print out the chart do the following l Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab and press the Print Chart button The Print preview window will open To renew the chart image to be printed press the Renew Preview button The preview image will display the most recent changes in the chart view To configure the properties of the print out pres the Printer Setup button The standard Print Setup window will open where you can configure the print properties To print the chart out p
164. destination of the target Parameters defining e Messages the last received message if no messages were received the the location of the field is not displayed positioning device P NOTE You can query an AIS target information panel by selecting the AIS target in the chart view To select a target right click on its symbol the target style will change to the selected target and the AIS target display window will appear in the chart view f AIS target display xX Position report Static and voyage data 111111111 Figure 180 AIS target display window Information displayed in the window repeats information displayed in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab When the distance between an AIS target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous approach set in the Config gt AIS tab the target is assigned the dangerous target status and changes its style it becomes red and starts flashing To stop the target flashing select it in the targets table in the Info gt AIS Monitor tab and press the Acknowledge button The target still has the dangerous target style but stops flashing To acknowledge all dangerous targets press the Acknowledge all button 9301584 10 Page 167 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software To view messages received from an AIS target do the following 1 Select an AIS target in the targets list If there were any messages from the target the Show Received Messages bu
165. displayed in the Registered DB list i Ale x Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic ee Auto Import Catalogue Database Licensing Updating 57 Registered DB Available databases ChartletsBase Issue 1 Professional Issue 381 Professional Issue 380 TestBase Issue 1 Check integrity Check signature Unregister database _ Find databases Register database Check signature Figure 16 Data gt Databases tab current version database in the Registered DB list new version database in the Available databases list 3 Select the new version database in the Available databases list and press the Register database button In this example it will show the message The database Professional issue 380 already registered Do you want to update it with database Professional issue 381 Press the YES button 4 The old version of the database will be overwritten with the new version The new version is registered and added to the view automatically ai B SF NOTE It is important to note that all existing licenses will be valid after the new version of the database is installed and you will not need to request new licenses Page 38 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 4 Licensing Software Modules The ECDIS application includes functional modules that require individual licensing These modules are Import S 57 Anticollision Ship Model and ECDIS Input
166. e If the target was lost while outside the range no alarm 1s generated e AIS lost An AIS target is lost e Dangerous target A dangerous ARPA or Sonar target is detected e Hardware errors A hardware error occurred 7 7 Route Monitoring 7 7 1 Route Monitoring Mode The route monitoring mode is switched on automatically when the voyage on a specified route is started When in the route monitoring mode the ECDIS monitors the proceeding of the own ship along the route and notifies you in case the own ship deviates from the route approaches a waypoint or a control point etc Before you can start a voyage along a route the route should be created and edited using the route planning tools in the Route gt Route Finder and Route gt Route Planning tabs see chapter 6 4 Route Planning and Plotting si To switch on the route monitoring mode do the following 1 Open the Route gt Start Voyage tab Start Route GoTo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Start Voyage Reverse Route I Autopilot ON OFF Routes Settings Show Route Hide Route We WPTlabels Bearinglabel Speedlabel Iv WOL RouteName FromPort From 2009 02 11 13 35 To 2009 02 11 19 16 e Es ee ARENDAL Norway MARSTRAND Swec wP a Arendal Marstrand 2 _ARENDAL Norway MARSTRAND Swec ARENDAL Norway BREST BALTIMORE Irelai BREST France BALTIMORE Irelant DOVER HARBOR United K
167. e as it happens when working with paper charts Electronic charts are combined into Zones Areas and Cells You can purchase licenses for any set of the Zones Areas and Cells you need Depending on the set of Zones Areas and Cells you have a continuous coverage for a geographic area The coverage is made up of the electronic charts joining to each other For example you have purchased a license for the English Channel Zone 1 Area 10 It means you have a continuous coverage for all waters in and around the English Channel It looks as if you have a single chart for the whole English Channel and some part of this chart is displayed on the screen Finkand Lithuania y i em a ee oNiika j p rs p t Poland N Byala in SARDA Germnany E Trea En Er BS MEA EE DN Figure 26 Chart coverage for the area of the English Channel Zone 1 Area 10 Each Zone Area and Cell is made up of a set of electronic charts copies of paper charts with different scales If you wish you may switch on the display of borders of the source paper charts But usually it is not necessary Page 46 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 1 Moving around the Chart View The coverage of a geographic area with electronic charts consists of a set of charts that make up one single chart and some part of this single chart is display
168. e usage of zones allows the UTM projection to be used over the entirety of the Earth while minimizing distortion towards the poles User added Electronic Chart Information Electronic chart information manually entered by the user for presentation for example navigational notes safety zones of interest local notices to mariners etc Variable Range Marker VRM Term describing a circle around the boat When enabled the VRM can be manually manipulated to change the radius Variation Also known as Magnetic Variation and Declination The angular difference in direction between true North and magnetic North Vector Chart A chart where chart information is stored in terms of points lines and polygons NCX and TX 97 charts are vector chart formats Page 251 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Velocity Made Good VMG The speed at which the boat is moving towards its intended destination regardless of the ship s direction Vertical Datum For marine applications a base elevation used as a reference from which to reckon heights or depths It is called a tidal datum when defined in terms of a certain phase of the tide Tidal datums are local datums and should not be extended into areas which have differing hydrographic characteristics without substantiating measurements In order that they may be recovered when needed such datums are referenced to fixed points known as bench marks source O
169. e Add Licenses from file button to open the pane for adding licenses from file Page 34 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 Press the Find licenses button to start searching for license files on all removable devices connected to the system All detected licenses are listed in the upper window of the pane the name and issue number of the database fro which the license is issued and the license expiration date Select a license to view the path to the license file the license coverage and the license code in the lower window of the pane Add Remove ae Database Loosing Updating S57 System ID Databases Professional Issue 402 License expires in 03 2010 Add License manually Display expired licenses before date License file path H Licenses Professional usr Licenses list i Zone 0 License EA8DA721DA5044B6 Add Licenses from file Figure 13 Data gt Licensing tab Add Licenses from file 6 To install licenses select the license file with licenses to be installed and press the Apply license button Licenses will be installed and registered automatically The licenses installation process will take a few seconds Upon completion a message Licensing completed will appear 7 After the license has been installed the licensed data is displayed on the screen immediately 4 2 3 Getting Licenses Expiring Before a Specified Date You can get a list of licenses that expire befo
170. e Datum Transformation Show Clear All Start Point Distance 0 000 NM Distance Bearing LAT N00 00 000 TEER 0 000 o Calculate End Point LON E000 00 000 Bearing From 0 000 End Point Mode Great Circle X LAT N 00 00 000 LON E000 00 000 Figure 228 Info gt Navi Calculator tab Distance Bearing tab for direct and inverse geodetic problems Page 202 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections To show the line connecting the positions with the specified coordinates in the chart view press the Show button 3 Select a measurement unit for Distance Nautical Miles Statute Miles or kilometers in the drop down list near the Distance field 4 Select the mode of calculation Great Circle or Rhumb Line in the Mode drop down list Press the Distance Bearing button 6 The calculated values of distance and bearings to and from will be displayed in the Distance Bearing To and Bearing From fields 7 To clear the calculator press the Clear All button si To solve the direct geodetic problem do the following 1 Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Distance Bearing panel 2 Enter coordinates in the Start Point section 3 Enter the distance value in the Distance field and select a measurement unit for distance nautical miles statute miles or kilometers in the drop down list to the right from the fiel
171. e Overview Save as route Figure 62 Route gt Route finder tab Add waypoints of the route to the waypoints list in the Itinerary tab There are two ways of adding waypoints a add ports from the ports list to the itinerary see the description of the procedure below b add waypoints by selecting them directly in the chart view see the description of the procedure below Edit the waypoints list see the description of the procedure below Calculate the route see the description of the procedure below Apply restrictions to the route calculation in case the calculated route leads through narrows channels or straits you do not want it to There are two ways of applying restrictions a forbid using channels and straits for route calculation by indicating it in the Disabled Passages list see the description of the procedure below b apply restrictions directly in the chart view see the description of the procedure below Recalculate if necessary and save the route see the description of the procedure below 9301584 10 Page 81 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software si To add a port from the ports list to the waypoints list do the following l Find the port in the ports list Ports are sorted by port name or by country where ports are located depending on the option selected in the Sorted drop down list below the ports list Ports that service vessels with a draft less then the current draft sp
172. e Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder The ECDIS will load the data automatically e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive data files in the response e mail Save the files to any location on your computer Download the weather data to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling Page 110 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 5 Scheduled Download
173. e added restriction press the Save restriction button that has appeared in place of the Add restriction button 4 Confirm or cancel the operation To confirm the operation press the Yes button the restriction will be added You can add as many restrictions as you like Figure 64 Adding own 5 To remove all manually entered restrictions press the Remove all E egAe restrictions button amp Remove all restrict You can only remove all the added restriction 6 Once you have added all your restrictions recalculate the route press the Calculate button This time all added restrictions will be taken into account 9301584 10 Page 83 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software of To save the route do the following 1 Press the Save as Route button The Create New Route dialog will open Create New Route Fa Enter name of a new Route KOBENHAVN COPENHAGEN Denmark YSTAD OK Cancel Figure 65 Create New Route dialog 2 Enter the route name and press OK 3 The new route is added to the routes list in the Route gt Route Planning panel where you can analyze check and correct the route if necessary 6 4 2 Manual Route Planning If you prefer to plot routes manually from the beginning to the end or if routes created automatically require editing use the manual route planning and editing functionality of the ECDIS Using the functionality you can create new routes edit existing routes edit
174. e checkbox to the left from the object class name All objects of the ane selected object classes will appear on the screen immediately Anchorage area Beacon cardinal 4 To save the current configuration of the Custom Display enter the name of the Beacon isolated danger of configuration to the drop down list at the bottom of the Display Type section save OvCustom gt and press the Save button Figure 39 Chart gt Data Display tab Custom display type 5 To set one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations select the configuration name in the drop down list 6 To delete one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations select the configuration name in the drop down list and press the Delete button 7 You can set your Custom Display the same as the Base Standard or All other display types To do so press the Set by button and select the display type you need from the context menu 5 6 3 Supplementary Data The Jeppesen chart database includes supplementary data in addition to cartographic data The supplementary data can be used in voyage planning and other navigational purposes The supplementary data is included in the database as supplementary data layers The supplementary data are tides and tide currents GMDSS areas SAR regions improved background and overview charts and terrain data You can choose to display or hide the supplementary data layers on the chart si
175. e extension Unlike the route files intended for the ECDIS only rte files can be imported to many devices 4 In the folder tree window select the folder where the route will be saved If in the folder there are other route files they will be displayed in the panel to the right from the folder tree To delete a route file from the files list select the file press the DELETE key and confirm the operation 5 To export the route press the Export button If the route is exported successfully the message Route was exported successfully will appear and the file name will be listed in the files list pane e aa import a route from a file do the following 1 Open the Route gt Export Import tab and switch to the From To File tab 2 In the folder tree select the folder where the route file is stored All route files stored in the selected folder will be listed in the pane to the right from the folder tree In case the file you need is not on the list make sure you have selected the right folder and check the file format selected in the formats drop down list The format set in the formats drop down list should be the same as that of the route file you want to import Page 92 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 3 Select the route file and press the Import button The route from the file will be imported to the ECDIS and its name will be displayed in routes list 4 In case there are several route
176. e lt LF gt fe ree in O e X Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message l to 9 E e E store sfx meawirinemeDewie CS 2 fe _pmestmomows gt RTE Routes Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Waypoint identifiers listed in order with starting waypoint first for the identified route Two modes of transmission are provided c indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted w indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been B FROM while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently heading for TO and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route S RTE xe ane cae a c c C c peta sa ee ose hN CORALES x fieran gt x pe o gt e pe o ee omcwente see eminem Ce pee oomme o 9301584 10 Page 235 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt SSD AIS ship static data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used to enter static parameters into a shipboard AIS unit The parameters in this sentence support a number of the ITU R M 1371 Messages S SSD c c c c XX ex a a S aa nh lt CR gt lt L FS Comments Z 0 Field Description O l l i Ship s call sign 1 to 7 characters C C Ship s name to 20 characters XXX Pos ref point dist A from bow 0 to 511 m XXX Pos ref point dist
177. e name and in the drop down list select the Add New Coverage option or press the Add New Coverage button E The Edit Coverage window opens Edit Coverage New Coverage 4 l New Coverage Delete Coverage Boundaries North N52 10 781 West W 012 47 428 E007 11 481 East South N39 58 858 Figure 98 Edit Coverage window Initially the New Coverage boundaries are boundaries of your current screen view You can set new boundaries either by entering new coordinate values to the North South East and West fields coordinate values are in degrees minutes and fractions of minute or by selecting a new coverage on the screen To select a new coverage on the screen move the mouse pointer to the edge of the coverage displayed on the screen a red frame When the pointer changes to the horizontal resize pointer click the right mouse button and drag the coverage boundary holding the button Release the button when the coverage boundary is in the right place You can also move the coverage move the mouse inside the selected area the pointer will change to the move pointer P press the right mouse button and move the coverage Release the button when the coverage area is in the right place Coordinate values in the North South West and East fields of the Edit Coverage window change in accordance with selection on the screen After you have defined boundaries of the new coverage press the Apply button to save the settings
178. e passed track is updated at the interval set in the Display every field To set an interval select a value in the Display every drop down list 4 To hide the passed track clear the Past track checkbox The passed track is removed from the display but is not deleted To display the hidden passed track again check the Past track checkbox 5 To delete the old passed track and start drawing the new passed track check the Past track checkbox and press the Reset button The old passed track will be deleted and the new one will start to be drawn 9301584 10 Page 133 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 10 To delete the passed track and stop drawing the passed track altogether clear the Past track checkbox and press the Reset button The old passed track will be deleted You can also display the own ship secondary passed track the track based on positioning data from the secondary positioning device Settings for the secondary passed track are presented in the Secondary past track section and are the same as the settings for the primary position source passed track To turn on the display of time labels on the own ship passed track check the Time labels checkbox in the Past track section To turn the display of time labels off clear the Time labels checkbox Time labels are displayed with the step the same as the own ship vector length In the Own ship vector section you can configure properties of the ship velo
179. e position source as it is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab DR POS The currently used positioning method is dead reckoning see chapter 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning Source Scale indicator has the following states The Source Scale indicator turns orange if the scale of the current chart the chart under the own ship or under the center of the chart view is twice or more as large or as small as the original chart scale RE The current chart scale is not twice as large or as small as the original chart scale for example the original scale is 1 100 000 and the current scale is 1 75 000 a The current chart scale is twice as large as the original chart scale for example the original scale is 1 100 000 and the current scale is 1 50 000 The current chart scale is twice as small as the original chart scale for example the original scale is 1 100 000 and the current scale is 1 200 000 i Underscl Scale Status indicator has the following states The Scale Status indicator shows if there are charts of larger scale for the current own ship position The indicator operates only when in navigation mode Best scl The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area and the best scale mode is on see chapter 7 5 2 Best Scale Mode To turn the best scale mode off left click on the indicator The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area but the best scale mode 1s off To Best scl
180. e response e mail save the file to the Receive folder 4 The ECDIS will load the subscription automatically e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 Press the Request Subscription button 2 Save the generated subscription file to any location on your computer Request files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml 9301584 10 Page 101 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive the subscription in the response e mail 4 Save the subscription to any location on your computer 5 Download the subscription to the ECDIS To download the data open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button 6 In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button The files will be downloaded to the ECDIS If the received data package is split into several files download all the files of the package one by one when the last file of the package is downloaded the order of downloading is of no importance the package appears in the Weather Packages window for more details on the Weather Packages window see chapter 6 6 6 Weather Packages Handling e aa view weather subscription do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Subscription option from the drop down menu 2 The Weathe
181. e route is being approached see chapter 6 4 5 Adding Critical Points The alarm message will indicate the number and the name of the control point To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Man Over Board An alarm is activated when the MOB button is pressed The alarm is deactivated after the click on the alarm message but the message is displayed for 20 seconds in any case Exceed deviation The deviation of the own ship from the route exceeds the XTE cross track error set for the route in the route plan see chapter 6 4 4 Route Plan The alarm is deactivated when the own ship returns to the XTE limits Invalid sensor data Data coming from one of external sensors are invalid Non WGS 84 Datums The chart currently displayed in the chart view has other than WGS 84 coordinates system If the positioning device defines the own ship position in WGS 84 coordinates and the chart has a different coordinates system the own ship position in the chart view may be wrong If the alarm is activated it is recommended to introduce a position correction in the Config gt Input Output tab see chapter 7 2 4 Position Correction The alarm is deactivated when a WGS 84 chart will be displayed in the chart view Page 160 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Target lost An ARPA or sonar target is lost The alarm is generated if the target was lost while inside the set Lost Target Alarm Rang
182. e set in the input time field 6 Detailed information about the tidal object is represented in the Graph High Low Water and Water Levels tabs e Graph Tidal height in meters depends on time and is graphically expressed on the diagram The diagram background consists of three color zones These zones graphically show night time dark grey twilights light grey and daytime white The red vertical line on the graph marks the time entered in the date time field In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram when you move the mouse pointer over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal heights are shown below allowing you to obtain detailed tidal information Graph High Low Water Water Levels UZIN AZOO N I i AU N T I A N I Tit it NA 0 211 13 15 17 19 21 23 UTC 2009 10 03 01 51 Figure 83 Tidal information graph e High Low Water Summary information about time and height of high and low water is given High Water Date Low Water Date 1 70m at 2009 1 0 20m at 2009 1 1 65m at 2009 1 0 19m at 2009 1 1 74m at 2009 1 0 19m at 2009 1 1 63m at 2009 1 0 18m at 2009 1 A TT ek AAA A A AM ee ot MAAN 4 Figure 84 Tidal information high low water schedule e Water Levels Provides information about water level height predictions for next three days starting from the current day The step of such predictions is one hour 00 0 0 741 00 0 0 471 15 0 1 681 01
183. e the dangerous target style but will cease flashing To acknowledge all dangerous targets press the Acknowledge all button 8 3 2 ARPA and Sonar Targets Display To turn the display of ARPA and sonar targets on or off left click on the ARPA indicator If the display of ARPA targets is off the ARPA indicator is orange _ARPA _ if the display of ARPA targets is on the ARPA indicator is green O ARPA _J si To configure the display of ARPA targets and tracks do the following 1 Open the Config gt Targets tab The display of ARPA targets is configured in the ARPA sub tab and the display of Sonar targets is configured in the Sonar sub tab The settings in the sections are the same se AIS Targets Anti Collision Own Input Units Setup aoe Tool Ship Output and Time ARPA Sonar Distance to Dangerous Lost Target Alarm Range Past track 0 500 NM 0 500 NM o Set Past track interval 30sec gt CPA TCPA to Dangerous 0 500 NM 15 0 min Set Figure 185 Config gt Targets tab ARPA sub tab 2 To turn on the display of the track passed by targets check the Past track checkbox Select the interval of the track update in the Past track interval drop down list the interval value ranges from 1 second to 30 minutes 3 Set the distance to dangerous approach in the Distance to Dangerous field enter a value in nautical miles to the field and press the Set button for the setting to take effect Whe
184. e upper left corner tie ee a 44 3 i Figure 35 C Map presentation Figure 36 S 52 presentation model Figure 37 S 52 Simplified model presentation model The C Map presentation model is used by default B To set one of the presentation models do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Chart Chart Mariner Manual ffe x Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors lv Two shades Shallow pattern Safety contour 5 0 m M Safe contour only M Safe depths ee Safety depth 2 0 m Isolated dangers zo m m Shallow contour u in unsafe waters Plain depth contour Deep contour 10 0 Set Parameters Figure 38 Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Presentation models 2 In the Presentation section select one of the presentation models The selected model will be applied to the char view immediately 9301584 10 Page 55 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 6 2 Display Type The Display Type option is used to choose the required level of detail to be applied to the chart The ECDIS implements four display categories Base The Display Base is that part of the Standard Display which should be permanently retained on the display It consists of coastline high water own ship s safety contour to be selected by the mariner indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths les
185. e via Attachment 1 Dy 3 4 5 Press the Test connection button Save the generated test request file to any location on your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e mail letter to datacenterx c map no You will receive the test response file in the response e mail Save the response file to any location on your computer Download the file to the ECDIS open the Weather Packages panel Weather gt Weather Packages and press the Import Weather Data File button In the Open dialog window select the response file and press Open You will see no indication of data actually being loaded but the Receive data operation test will be performed The procedure may take time but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed with your other activities When you open the Test Connection window next time you will see the status of the test Page 118 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 6 7 Weather Forecast Display 6 7 1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data Weather data can be displayed in the chart view as an additional data layer To display the data you should turn the data display on and configure the data display parameters Bro display the data from a weather data package do the following l 2 Load a weather data package to the ECDIS see chapter 6 6 Weather Forecast Download In the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab press the
186. e water to avoid for the purpose of safe navigation TCPA See Time to Closest Point of Approach Tidal Currents Tidal currents a horizontal motion are a result of the rise and fall of the water level due to tides a vertical motion The effects of tidal currents on the movement of water in and out of bays and harbors can be substantial See Neap Tides 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Tide The change in ocean levels due to gravitational influences external to the Earth Formulas for calculating tides can be found in tide and current tables provided by NOAA and the British Admiralty Time to Closest Point of Approach TCPA This is the time remaining until the closest point of approach of a target Time To Go TTG The amount of time estimated until the ship reaches an active waypoint assuming no intervening change in course or speed Displayed in hours and minutes TTG See Time To Go Universal Transverse Mercator Projection UTM UTM is similar to the Mercator projection except the projecting cylinder is mapped transverse to the meridians and the Mercator projection used is a secant variation where the map scale to nominal scale is 0 9996 The UTM segments the earth into 60 six degrees of longitude wide zones where the cylinder is oriented along the central meridian of a zone The zones extend from 84 N to 80 S The sixty zones start 180 degrees east and proceed eastward Th
187. ec Figure 182 Config gt AIS tab activation distances and time settings 2 Check or uncheck the Auto activation checkbox if the checkbox is checked the Distance to Activation field becomes editable and you can set the value of the distance to activation different from the distance to dangerous approach value if the checkbox is unchecked the value of the distance to activation is set the same as the value of the distance to dangerous approach Page 168 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 3 To be able to use the own ship AIS transmitter as a positioning device check the Use own transmitter as source of position checkbox The transmitter will be added to the position sources list in the Position Source section of the Navi gt Navigation Data tab see chapter 7 2 1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources 4 To view AIS symbols in true scale set the True scale symbol checkbox AIS targets are displayed in true scale if the following conditions are met a width the own ship true scale symbol is more than 7 5mm b the AIS target is within the activation distance c the AIS target heading HDG and position reference point data are available 5 Set the Distance to Dangerous the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as dangerous Press the Set button for the changes to take effect 6 Set the Distance to Activation the distance from the own ship at which all AIS target
188. ecified for the own ship are disabled in the list and you cannot select them for your route Select the port in the ports list 1f the Highlight checkbox is ticked the port will be marked with a green circle on the chart and press the Add to Itinerary button The port will be added to the waypoints list To find a port in the ports list quickly you can use the Search function Switch on the search by port select By Port option in the Search Options drop down list and type the port name into the Search field The first port found that begins with the typed symbols will be highlighted in the list Continue typing until required port is highlighted If the By Country search option is selected the search is carried out by country Enter the country name to the Search field and the first port alphabetically of the country will be highlighted When using the search by country sorting by country is also recommended To scroll the chart view to a port select the port in the list and press the Go to Position button To highlight all ports included in the ports list check the Highlight All checkbox All ports will be marked with yellow circles in the chart view si To add a waypoint to the waypoints list do the following l 2 3 Press the Add Waypoints button in the Itinerary tab Move the mouse pointer to the waypoint position in the chart view and left click holding down the SHIFT key The waypoint will be plotted on the chart as a
189. ecified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Mood and the Sun Page 247 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Higher Low Water HLW The highest of the low water of any specified tidal day do to the declinational effects of the Moon and the Sun International Hydrographic Organization IHO An organization that provides the specifications for what qualifies as an ECDIS Knot Kt A speed unit of one international nautical mile 18520 0 meters or 6 076 11549 international feet per hour Latitude The designation for angles measuring how far North or how far South a position is Value range is from 90 S to 0 at the equator to 90 N Latitude values are represented by the Greek letter lambda A Lat Lon Any object s position expressed in Latitude and Longitude Leg The segment of a route between two waypoints Line of Position Plotted line on which own ship is located determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element Log A record of the ship s movements and a place for manual text entries Longitude The designation for angles measuring how far West or how far East a position is Value range is from 180 E to 180 W Values of longitude are represented with the Greek letter phi LOP See Line of Position LORAN LOng Range Aid to Navigation LORAN is a terrestrial based navigation system u
190. ect symbol is against a yellow background it means that the object has been updated by means of auto update RTU mI If an object symbol is against a blue background it means that the object is a mariner object Page 50 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software In the Object Info panel you can also open the Chart Legend pane To do so press the Chart Legend button To close the chart legend and return to the objects list outpress the Chart Legend button The Chart Legend pane provides information about the dataset Partially this information is the same that you get in the Attributes pane when you select the dataset in the objects list However the chart legend provides additional information chart units in the Chart Units section and the current settings of the dataset display in the Current Display section Object fle x Information Chart Legend Information at position 36 49 489 N 000 12 977 E Chart Units Production Information Depth in Meters Height in p Meters Sounding Datum Not defined Vertical Datum Mean sea level Source ID 46 Quality zono of confidence U data not assessed Horizontal Datum WGS 84 Edition Date 2005 03 26 Last Update 2008 11 08 Edition Number 3 Update Number 33 Scale 350000 Source instituto Hidrografico de la Marina IHM Spain Status Non Official Current Display Projection MERCATOR SafeCont Unknown SafeDepth 2 0m
191. ed as speed divided by distance 9301584 10 Page 91 of 259 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 4 Above the table the total distance and the total duration of the route are displayed 5 To display only named waypoints in the Schedule table check the Only named WP checkbox 6 To save changes press the Save button All changes will be saved and the route edit mode will be switched off 6 4 7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference This chapter explains how to exports routes to and import them from files f export a route to a file do the following 1 Open the Route gt Export Import tab and switch to the From To File tab Route Export lt 5 q x Voyage Planning From To File From To Device RouteName ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria ANTOFAGASTA CALDERA ANTOFAGASTA Chil CALDERA Chile KOBENHAVN COPENHAGI KOBENHAVN COPE YSTAD Sweden ALGER ARZEW route Tir M NEW VOLUME E Figure 76 Route gt Export Import tab From To File tab 2 Select a route to export in the routes table 3 Enter the file name to the field above the folder tree and select the file format INI or RTE WPL in the file formats drop down list e INI Routes are saved in files with the route extension e RTE WPL Routes are saved in files with the rt
192. ed on the screen like in Figure 27 When moving around the chart you are as it were moving the chart under the screen Figure 27 Electronic chart with a part of it on the screen Bt To move around the chart you can use three ways e Left click in a position on the chart and the chart will be scrolled so that the position becomes the center of the screen e Move the mouse pointer to the upper lower left or right border of the screen the pointer will change to a thick black arrow Left click to move the screen in the direction of the arrow along the chart e The Go to Position function Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab in the New Center section enter coordinates of the point you want to be moved to the center of the screen the latitude to the upper field and the longitude to the lower field Press the Go to Position button the chart will be scrolled so that the indicated position becomes the center of the screen 5 2 Scaling the Chart View All source paper charts used for creating electronic charts have different compilation scales The original scale of an electronic chart is the compilation scale of the paper chart digitized to create the electronic chart The scale at which the electronic chart is displayed on the screen usually differs from the original scale and is called the current view scale Use the Original Scale option of the Chart Viewing Tools panel to synchronize the original and the current view scales of t
193. edh is aanteken Refresh __ Add Remark __ GoToPosition SaveAs Route _ Print mena Export __ mport _ v Remark Hints Figure 226 Log Book panel play back controls 2 Open the log book page you want to play back To do so set the date and the time period at which the data were recorded in the log book in the Data and the From and To fields 3 Select the replay speed in the Replay speed drop down list The replay speed defines the time scale during playing For example if the replay speed is x2 events will be replayed two times faster than they happened in reality 4 Ifyou want the play back to be cyclical check the Cycle playback checkbox 9301584 10 Page 201 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 To start the play back press the Start Play Back button After pressing the Start Play Back button and confirming that you really want to switch the Playback Mode on in the upper left corner of the chart area a large letter R Replay appears informing you that you are in the Playback Mode Also under the Indicators panel a special Replay panel appears 09 11 2007 11 32 29 N 00 28 962 E 000 02 144 5 0 4 0 Kn Figure 227 Replay panel The chart window will display position and scale equal to those during sailing Date and time corresponding to the playback events are displayed in the Replay panel In the right part of the panel position course and speed of the own ship are shown Position of the own
194. egrees magnetic S HDM x x M hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Magnetic heading degrees Heading type M for magnetic gt HDT Heading true Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading S HDT x x T hh lt CR gt lt LF gt gt MWYV Wind speed and angle Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 When the reference field is set to R Relative data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the vessel s bow centerline and the wind speed both relative to the moving vessel Also called apparent wind this is the wind speed as felt when standing on the moving ship When the reference field is set to T Theoretical calculated actual wind data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the vessel s bow centerline and the wind speed as if the vessel was stationary On a moving ship these data can be calculated by combining the measured relative wind with the vessel s own speed S MWV ae cae ac Kes an A gt hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Page 220 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Time date position course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver 6 7 8 9 S RMC hhmmss ss ae EVLI are Nyy Ty DORIS ye Xr e Z a y ee cael are a Ehn CR 1 hhmmss ss UTC of position fix a gt Status A
195. ensor are not being received Contact your system administrator Contact your system administrator Contact your system administrator Contact your system administrator Check if the license is installed in the Data gt Licensing tab press the License list button and select Software Modules in the Databases drop down list The ECDIS IO ECDIS license should be installed If not apply the license and restart ECDIS Plug unplug eToken restart ECDIS Check configuration of the position sensor If changes in configuration are needed contact your system administrator Check that the position sensor is plugged to ECDIS and powered on Check if the license is installed in the Data gt Licensing tab press the License list button and select Software Modules in the Databases drop down list The ECDIS IO ECDIS license should be installed If not apply the license and restart ECDIS Check configuration of the gyrocompass sensor If changes in configuration are needed contact your system administrator Check that the gyrocompass sensor is plugged to ECDIS and powered on Page 205 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Log sensor is set up but the STW indicator is orange A sensor is set up but its value indicator is red and no data are displayed Chart view is empty Detailed charts displayed are not Database is licensed but chart view is empty Page 206 of 259
196. ent strength ame Local time 9301584 10 Page 77 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 3 1 Creating and Editing Mariner Objects of To create a mariner object do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and press the Create New button The Select an Object dialog will open Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update co Export Import Figure 58 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab 2 In the Select an Object dialog select an object type and press the OK button The ECDIS will switch to the mariner object edit mode and the object editing tab will open Clearing line a Danger highlight Event Mariners feature Mariners Note Manufacturers feature Position Tidal stream or current vector Figure 59 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab Select an Object dialog 3 Inthe object editing tab select the object geometry type To do so check one of available options for the geometry type Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update ce Export Import C Paint ea aim a saDetete Localtime 14 Usersremark SCS Figure 60 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab Mariners Feature object editing tab 4 Fill in the values of attributes A mariner object can have one or several of the following attributes e Information information about the object is not displayed in the chart view e Scale maximum
197. er gt Weather Presentation tab 2 The ECDIS will load the last loaded cyclones file If there was no cyclone files opened or you need to open a different file use the Open Cyclones button press the button select the cyclones file in the Open dialog and press the Open button The cyclones data will be loaded to the ECDIS and displayed in the chart view Normalscl LaRgerse NAME J custsT gt Navinfo Peedi Radar AS o MI Warnings s SES eee ee a a mee 5 ne A a A EE EE AS LY CY 5 ZUID 18 02 44 gt na inana us No official data available Refer to paper chart 1 13438377 x1 5 SHIP 18 03 44 2009 10 09 Non standard chart presentation is used GPS2 CCRP 1 Silent mode z 36 09 679 N E 005 25 220 W 10 0 kn S0G coG HDG sTw DPT 5 0m belowtrans Wind 12 1kn 197 0 Disp ROT 0 0 j 1 000 0 000 0 Kurs 8 0 kn W 5 WGS 84 Not for use with position device E Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 08 10 2009 12 0021 Thu 2 ee oo I4 4 gt D DI Step 3 Hours Meteo Parameter Meteo Parameters Weather Legend Area Cont Symb Text Ice concentration wf Alarm zone vv v Vin MES Miva oie Tropical cyclone warnings TCW bservation point 6 Tropical cyclone hurricane typhoon Legend gt gt N
198. ern of target Page 178 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software a l Own Ship om Target Figure 192 Evasive action by a combination of change of own ship s course and decrease of speed in order to pass astern of target The CDL can be displayed to any acquired target in a true motion overview because it is completely independent of own ship s speed and course It is only depending on the target s relative position speed and course This means that collision risk can be judged simultaneously to all acquired targets in a true motion overview with easy identification of possible evasive manoeuvres Figure 193 and Figure 194 Target4 Target 5 N AS i t i i I H Target 2 Lp ae Target 3 am t mt T Own Ship Target 1 Figure 193 From judging the tip of own ship s vector in relation to the CDLs it follows that there is a direct collision threat to targets 2 and 5 Target I will pass slightly astern and targets 3 and 4 will pass ahead of own ship if the motion parameters speed and course are maintained 9301584 10 Page 179 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Target 4 Target 5 W AS li i i h 77 No l y Target 2 urr Target 3 i Pree n a mi ae a a I Own mwe Target 1 fi an l Figure 194 A change of course to starboard is a potential evasive action by own ship Targets 1 2 and 3 will pass well ahead while targets 4 an
199. es After a request file is generated and saved send it as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no Weather data will be sent to you attached to the response e mail e Receive folder Receive path is the folder where weather data files received from the data center should be saved The ECDIS checks the Receive folder periodically and when the program finds data files there it loads the weather package automatically The loaded weather package is added to the Weather Packages window Communication type E Mail Folder Send R Data center Europe Timeout s 120 Attachment size Kb 1000 Folder parameters Send path C Documents and Set Receive path C Documents and Set Remove after download v Figure 112 Setup Connection window E Mail Folder Send Receive communication type Page 116 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software gt E Mail Manually via Attachment Manual connection type If you use the E Mail Manually via Attachment e mail connection option you will have to send request files and receive and install weather packages manually In this case request file is generated when you press the Send Request button in the Weather Download Request window Save the file to any location on your computer and send it as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive a response e mail with weather package files attached to it Save the files to any location on your
200. esentation Easy Mode tab press the Ship Response Options button details about the Ship Response Options dialog see below Set the time of the weather forecast display in the time setup tool of the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab The time should be within the period of time scheduled for navigating along the route Route gt Route Planning tab edit mode Schedule table The own ship symbol will appear on the route at the position where the own ship is supposed to be at the indicated time the position is calculated using the route schedule data and the own ship planned speed To change time schedule of the route go to the Route gt Route Planning panel select the route you intend to check in the Routes table switch to the edit mode the Edit button and in the Schedule tab change the ETD estimated time of departure value so that the time period scheduled for navigating along the route overlapped with the time period for which you have weather data Once this done a ship symbol will appear on the route Now you can view the results of operation of the Inspect Ship Position function If there are several routes and the time set in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab for the weather forecast display falls within the time period scheduled for navigating on the routes the own ship symbol will appear on these routes too To select an own ship symbol left click on it The active own ship symbol will become red kA
201. et before reception of data was interrupted Selected target A symbol representing the manual selection of any AIS target for the display of detailed information in a separate data panel ai B SF NOTE AIS targets visibility range distance to activation distance to dangerous approach CPA lt CPA fto Dangerous TCPA lt TCPA to Dangerous AIS targets visibility range AIS targets visibility range il ia All AIS target symbols are oriented to the targets course Active and dangerous target symbols have additional features heading lines and velocity vectors Heading line is a solid line with the turn indicator at the tip it only shows the targets heading and does not give any information on the targets speed Velocity vector is a dashed line with minute marks on it it is extending in the direction of the target course for a length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship s velocity vector Symbols of AIS targets with available CPA are drawn with solid lines gt if CPA is not available symbols are drawn with dotted lines Page 170 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Symbol name and description Distance to the Own Ship Display AIS Aids to Navigation ATON Active ATON real virtual on position AIS targets visibility A symbol representing an active ATON on range position Active ATON real vir
202. eters settings are saved in the system All other The All Other Display shows the chart information in full the All Other Display type has no mandatory chart presentation parameters The All Other Display is recalled by single operator action press the Data Display Type indicator in the Indicators panel Custom The Custom Display displays the Display Base and other chart information by class on demand To set one of the display types do the following l 2 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab In the Display Type drop down list select a display type Information corresponding to the selected display type will appear on the screen immediately The Custom Base display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the Base Display type By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings The Custom Standard display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the Standard Display or All Other types By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings In the table below the use of chart presentation parameters for the display types is presented Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display Depth settings Two shades Isolated dangers in unsafe Page 56 of 259 9301584 10 a Plain depth contour NOAA navaids Text settings User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Presentation parameter Base Displa
203. ety contour is nota 7 7 7 7 7 A SN 7 S er 7 SHIP 12 58 37 2009 10 02 No official data avatlable Referto paper chart a gi LEEDS A 4763925 x0 63 SHIP 12 58 37 2009 10 02 Non standard chart prespntationts usso s GPS2 CCRP g GALWAY TM Silent mode 7 il 36 09 605 N 005 25 218 W Zt et ape mul ame 145 0 krs m gi rpa Te EH h dl f DPT 5 0m belowtrans A Sh Wind 12 1kn 342 0 a 3 jeen AA pe P a mee all ce ULE fre N Chart Add Remove Dynamic Auto Import Catalogue Database a Licensing ae Updating S57 Professional Ministerio de Defensa Naci Ministry of Transport Maritin Hellenic Navy Hydrographic S 1500000 500000 Department for Planning and 500000 150000 ft Norwegian Hydrographic Ser I Approact 50000 15000 Jeppesen Norway A S Harbor Plan 5000 Figure 48 Data gt Chart Catalogue tab boundaries of coastal and er ee charts Page 66 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 2 Correcting the Chart The first step in preparing the voyage is making sure that your charts have all the latest updates applied to them You need to correct all applicable charts through the latest Notice to Mariners Local Notice to Mariners and Broadcast Notice to Mariners and ensure charts to be used are the correct edition The ECDIS provides two methods for correcting
204. ety depth 2 0 All sectors 2 0 Shallow contour C White sectors Deep contour 10 0 a Set Parameters Figure 166 Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Light sectors tab 2 To turn on the display of the limits of light sectors with the length corresponding to the actual visibility distance of the lights check the Real length checkbox The visibility distance is not calculated it is taken from the light attributes and corresponds to the bridge height of 5 meters Page 154 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 To turn on the highlight of light sectors in the chart view check the Highlight sectors checkbox Sectors display is limited with the sectors visibility distance 4 Select the sectors to be highlighted in the Highlight section a To highlight sectors of user specified lights select the Chosen sectors option To specify a light in the chart view move the mouse pointer to the light the pointer will change to the target EB pointer with a tip Select light sectors and right click on it The sectors of the light will be highlighted To unselect the light move the mouse pointer to the selected light the pointer will change to the target IE pointer with a tip Unselect light sectors and right click on it The highlight of the light will be cleared b To highlight sectors of all lights select the All sectors option To highlight only white sectors select the White
205. evice with the Press the Find databases button to selected exchange set has been refresh the S57 source data list disconnected or the exchange set has been removed from the device and the S 57 source data list hasn t been automatically refreshed No databases are added to view Add a database to the view The chart is a test or sample Test and sample datasets are not based dataset on paper charts and therefore no source paper chart information is provided for them The Chart Catalogue list is not Wait until the list is completed completely populated The chart is being redrawn Wait some time until the chart is redrawn ERBL mode is enabled Disable the ERBL mode Mariner Object or Manual Update Disable the mode editing mode is enabled Logbook playback mode is Disable the logbook playback mode enabled big R letter in the upper left corner of the chart view indicates the playback mode Voyage mode is not enabled Route Up function works only in the Voyage mode The Course Up or the Route Navigation mode is turned off Turn the Navigation mode on 9301584 10 Page 209 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Trouble Up button is pressed but the chart orientation is not changed The True or the Relative button is pressed but the own ship symbol leaves the chart view Drift values for dead reckoning DR can t be changed Position value for DR can
206. f the error figure Page 240 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software b If the time of measurement is different lines of position are not equally accurate anymore due to measurement aging For example if one LOP was measured earlier than the other two the observed position moves to the intersection of the later measured LOPs Figure 233 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs measured later 2 Three reference points with bearing difference of 120 two reference points are equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship distance to the 3 reference point is twice as long as to the first two time of measurement is the same Figure 234 Three reference points bearing difference is 120 one reference point is at a double distance from DR position than the other two 9301584 10 Page 241 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software The observed position moves to the intersection of the more accurate LOPs the accuracy ellipse major axis is perpendicular to the less accurate LOP 1 3 G Figure 235 Observed position near the intersection of the more accurate LOPs 3 Two of the three reference points equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship have a small difference between bearings Figure 236 Three reference points equally distant from DR position small angle between bearing lines of two points Page 242 of 259 9301584 10 Use
207. flected signal Source Scale The original scale of a paper chart from which an electronic chart is derived 9301584 10 Standard Display Level of information that should be shown when a chart is first displayed on ECDIS The level of the information it provides for route planning or route monitoring may be modified by the user according to the user s needs STW See Speed Through Water Speed Over Ground SOG SOG is the actual fixed geographic speed of a ship over the earth s surface It is essentially the Speed Through Water STW plus the cumulative effect of wind and current Speed Through Water STW STW is the relative speed of the vessel over water surface See also Speed Over Ground SOG Starboard Starboard designates the right side of the boat as seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow Starboard side is indicated with a green light Stern The rear of a ship System Electronic Navigational Chart SENC A database in the manufacturer s internal ECDIS format resulting from the lossless transformation of the entire ENC contents and updates It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other navigational functions and is the equivalent of an up to date paper chart The SENC may also contain information added by the mariner and information from other sources Target In nautical terminology a target is generally an obstacle or object in or near th
208. g charts it is an independent dataset called Extrascale dataset When the chart is prepared to be displayed in the chart view it is overlaid with data from the Extrascale dataset However if you when adding objects indicate that they are included in the Notices to Mariners the changes are applied to the chart dataset which is currently displayed in the chart view The changes are applied to the chart dataset if the existing dataset objects are edited Objects edited or added with Manual Updating are displayed in the chart view as regular cartographic objects with a special symbol All changes made by the Manual Updating function are registered in the manual updating log The log is displayed in the Manual Update tab in the Updates History pane where you can view all the updates modification and reject any of them To view manual updates history do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab 2 In the databases drop down list select a database In the History pane below the history of manual updates applied to the specified database will be displayed The manual updates history is presented as a tree structure where the first level is the dataset to which the updates were entered the second level is the updated object and the third level is the list of actions applied to the object Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Professional AddNew MetricsEdit Attributes Edit Delete Object
209. g line is drawn through two marks and the own ship location control is carried out using the range line between the two marks rather than the bearing to one of the marks e Danger highlight a point or area object highlighting a danger e Event a point object indicating the position of the own ship at the moment of some event e Mariners feature a point line or area object used to highlight an area on the chart that should attract attention of the mariner because of some effect it can have on navigating across it 9301584 10 Page 75 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Mariners Note a point object presenting textual information from the mariner related to certain coordinates Depending on the importance of the information you can set two categories of the Mariners note information for general information or an unimportant note and caution for important information danger instructions or orders e Manufacturers feature a feature or information added by the manufacturer of the ECDIS Examples are a caution or information symbol for cursor picking to read out the information on the alphanumeric display additional chart information not available in the ENC manufacturers value added feature etc e Position a point object indicating the own ship position fix The position fix can be calculated or received from various positioning devices e Tidal stream or current vector
210. ge from the own ship to the target is 7 5 nautical miles and the bearing from the own ship to the target is 037 The target speed is 15 knots and the course is 270 The own ship speed is 20 knots and the course is 000 1 The Figure 205 shows the display of the cone shaped collision danger sector CDS and the collision danger line CDL to the target in true motion The user defined target selection criteria are e CPA Limit 1 0 NM e Maximum CPA 2 0 NM e TCPA Limit 24 min e TCPA Critical 6 min 1 163967 x6 1 SHIP 16 50 27 2009 01 28 GPS 65 45 473 N 031 12 560 W esos 20 0 kn ecos 000 0 256 Unk Not for use with position device ti No official data available Refer to paper chart 1524 1524 152 1518 151 F7 Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 12 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Maximum CPA NM 20 TCPA Limit min 24 TCPA Critical min 6 i TargetVectors Apply Parameters Figure 205 The display of the cone shaped collision danger region and line to the target in true motion The green circle with the centre at the own ship position shows the tip of the own ship speed vector This is in order to make it visually easy for the user to determine the amount of evasive action needed to satisfy the selected CPA limit When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS the sector is shaded orange color to highlight the importance of the target for the collision risk e
211. gernavn type dm800e When prompted for password adgangskode type e008md On the webpage look for the System versions and compliance status document matching your model The document contains a table showing released software versions a release notes and a list of standards the software ECDIS version complies with WW serve DM800E System versions and compliance status Document Number PDF 10374 104 Last updated Match 19 2010 DM B00E System Software Version 1 10 Release Date Matchi ECDIS Application Version 5 62 0 323999 Release Note Minor bugs in Service Interface Fixed Ul Updated Approvals in Effect DNV Certificate ocou issued March 20 2010 Compliance Status EC 60545 ed 4 2002 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems General requirements Methods of testing and required test results EC 61162 1 ed 3 2007 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Digital interfaces Part 1 Single talker and multiple listeners Verify that the software version see step 1 matches the System software version in the document 9301584 10 Page 25 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 3 Data Synchronization The ECDIS implements a data synchronization technology designed to synchronize a single set of data between all ECDIS computers connected in the cluster by automatically copying all changes introduced to t
212. graphically that the PPC can be moved along the predicted track line of target if own ship changes course to starboard and simultaneously increase speed Figure 188 PPC PPC PPC Own Ship Target Figure 188 Movement of PPC due to change of own ship course and speed The vessels encounter geometry in different collision scenarios shows that a line displaced parallel to the in sight line between the vessels and drawn from the tip of target s true vector can be regarded as a collision danger line CDL in true motion Figure 189 PPC _PPC i oe PPC Collision Danger ae w Line Own Ship WP 7777777777777 mm EEEE aa aaa aa mare a Target In sight Line Figure 189 Collision danger line in true motion display 9301584 10 Page 177 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software The CDL has a very simple interpretation if the tip of own ship s vector touches the CDL then a direct collision threat exists and the vessels will collide if the speed and course are maintained Likewise any manoeuvre change of course and or speed that deflects the end of own ship s velocity vector away from the CDL is a potential evasive manoeuvre Figure 190 Figure 192 sou iy Own Ship oe Target Figure 190 Evasive action by change of own ship s course to starboard in order to pass astern of target a Fal iy Se ee Own Ship on Target Figure 191 Evasive action by decrease of own ship s speed in order to pass ast
213. grity check may help identify problems with the updates data integrity In case any problems have been identified in the course of the integrity check procedure contact the updates provider to settle them e To check the signature of a database select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Check signature button the button becomes active if the signature check is available for the selected database Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results appears e To unregister a database select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Unregister database button The database will be unregistered A IMPORTANT If you unregister a database it is deleted from the system hard disk To restore data you will need to obtain the database saved on a removable data storage device and install the database once more After the database has been installed it has to be added to view see chapter 4 1 2 Displaying Database and licensed see chapter 4 2 Licensing Data if licensing is necessary 9301584 10 Page 31 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 1 2 Displaying Databases To display data from a database on the system screen the database should be added to the view If you have installed several databases you can hide databases you don t need at the moment and display those that you need B add a database to the view do the following 1 Open t
214. hat have been performed with the object or select the action in the actions list and press the Highlight button The ECDIS will highlight the object in the position and the state where it was plotted after the selected action To cleat the highlight press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel To reject an update select the updated object in the objects list press the Reject button and confirm the operation The object will return to its state before the update You can reject all updates applied to a dataset To do so select the dataset in the datasets list press the Reject button and confirm the operation All updates objects of the dataset will return to their initial states If you reject all updates applied to the Extrascale dataset the dataset will be deleted SF NOTE You can t reject a single action only all actions performed with an object or all the objects updated in a dataset si To add a manual update to the chart do the following l 2 3 Open the Chart gt Manual Update tab In the databases drop down list select a database to which you want to add a manual update Press the Add New button The Add New Object dialog will open Type Point C Line C Area Search Find 5 Obstructions and foul areas a Obstructions in general a Snags stumps a Wellheads a Diffusers ae a fish havens a foul areas l From Notice to Mariner Figure 53 Chart gt Manual Update tab Add
215. he Data gt Add Remove Database tab All registered but not added to the view databases are listed in the Registered Databases pane all registered and added to the view databases are listed in the Databases in View pane 4P NOTE Generally databases are automatically added to the view in the process of registration Chart Add Remove Dynamic Auto Import ffle x Catalogue Database Databases Licensing Licensing Updating S57 Registered Databases Databases in View ChartletsBase 1 _Add Database Professional 380 TestBase 1 Remove Database Refresh Figure 11 Data gt Add Remove Database tab 2 To add a database to the view select the database in the Registered Databases list and press the Add Database button The database name will be moved to the Databases in View list and the data from the database will be displayed in the chart view 3 To remove a database from the view select the database in the Databases in View list and press the Remove Database button The database name will be moved back to the Registered Databases list and the data removed from the chart view 4 To refresh the Registered Databases and Databases in View lists in case they were modified using external tools press the Refresh button Page 32 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 4 2 Licensing Data Cartographic data stored in chart databases produced by Jeppesen are protected from unau
216. he chart if necessary The same geographical area can be covered by several charts with different scales Which chart is displayed at the moment depends on the current view scale All charts included in the database are divided into groups according to their scale called scale levels The currently displayed chart belongs to the scale level corresponding to the current view scale The levels are as follows symbol Background small scale Z 0 1 5 000 001 UNLIMITED Background medium scale A 1 1 1 500 001 1 5 000 000 9301584 10 Page 47 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software symbol Approach E 5 1 15 001 1 50 000 For example when the current view scale is 1 100 000 charts of the Coastal level are displayed When the current scale is 1 40 000 charts of the Approach level are displayed The ECDIS application changes charts in the view automatically when you set a new current view scale corresponding to a different scale level Besides that an alarm may be given at the change of the scale level When changing the current view scale of the chart it may differ from the original chart scale If the current view scale is larger than the original chart scale the view is overscaled if the current view scale is smaller than the original chart scale the view is underscaled For example the original chart scale is 1 50 000 and the current view scale is 1 20 000 The current view scale is within sca
217. he chart view in or out use the Chart Scale panel options or the mouse wheel if available With the CTRL key held down you can pan and zoom the chart view in the same way as when in the regular chart view mode to zoom out press and hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys simultaneously QP NOTE If when editing a route you see that the route is colored red and one of waypoints is marked with a cross it means that the route legs are too close to each other and their deviation corridors XTD are overlapped too much Figure 69 Warning about too close route legs position If route legs are situated too close to each other it can cause problems for autopilot use the route legs cannot be checked for dangers and cautions Try to avoid plotting route legs too close In the Route gt Route Planning tab the following operations with routes are available Edit To open a selected route in the route edit mode select the route in the routes list and press the Edit button Only one route may be edited at a time For more details see chapter 6 4 3 Route Edit Mode Delete To delete a selected route select the route in the routes list press the Delete button and confirm the operation Show To show a selected route in the chart view select the route in the routes list and press the Show button The chart view will be scrolled and zoomed so that to display the whole route on the screen Print To print a selected route select
218. he data back and forth Data that are synchronized are routes databases updates manual updates mariner objects and own ship configuration 3 3 1 Synchronization Monitor Data synchronization is an automatic process over which the user has no control Information about the current synchronization status is displayed in the Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab Echo Sounder AIS targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization lt E q x Diagram Monitor Image Info Info Info Info Calculator Monitor Computer Info Synchronization Status Computer name N A Synchronization status Stopped Computer role N A Current state Stopped no synchronization is available Synchronization log Tasks to perform Failed tasks Clear log Sync OFF Figure 6 Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab In the Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab the following information is displayed e Computer name name of the computer unique identifier of the computer in the local network e Computer role role of the ECDIS computer e Synchronization status status of synchronization tool on the computer Active ECDIS receives incoming synchronization data and sends outcoming synchronization data Stopped ECDIS cannot receive incoming data nor can it send outcoming synchronization data Disabled ECDIS receives incoming synchronization data but cannot send outcoming synchroniza
219. he display of soundings which are deeper than the safety depth set in the Contours section of the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab In S 52 presentation unsafe soundings are black and safe soundings are grey In C Map presentation there is no difference in appearance of the safe and unsafe soundings Isolated dangers in unsafe waters Isolated dangers in unsafe waters are marked with a dedicated hazard symbol 9 i Plain depth contour Turns off the display of depth contours labels 3 The settings take effect immediately after they have been set 5 6 6 Text Settings Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the overloading One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view Chart elements that can be displayed selectively are divided into four groups depth elements text elements light sectors and other elements To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group do the following l Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Text settings tab In the tab there is a list of chart text elements pa eee 5 0 pe EU Safetydepth 2 0 zo Chat Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors ile Light info I Periodic date 52 Text important Text generic Text other lv Aids to navigation too
220. he errors report checkbox If the error messages display is on the errors found by verification of a next dataset are displayed in the Errors Report window Chart C ECDISDATA Databases TEST1 GB100002 000 Critical Errors Error CC0003 The cell is absent cell 0 invalid sequence of upd Non critical Errors Figure 25 Import S57 Errors Report window You can do the following To continue conversion of the dataset press the Continue button To cancel conversion of the dataset and go on with converting the next dataset and creating the CM93v3 database press the Skip button To cancel conversion of all datasets altogether and stop creating the CM93v3 database press the Stop button Page 44 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software b At the second stage S 57 data are converted to datasets of the CM93v3 database If there is no database with the name entered to the Database Name field a new CM93v3 database is created during the conversion process if there is a database with such name you can select it from the Database Names drop down list data of this database are overwritten by the new data At the termination of the conversion process the message Database was created successfully is displayed To view the log of all errors occurred during the data conversion press the Show log button in the Data gt Import S57 tab The S57 conversion error log window will open where you can view a
221. he positioning device you want to set as a primary position source is already set so there is no need to change anything If the positioning device is not set as a primary position source select it in the Secondary position source drop down list and press the Swap position sources button The name of the primary position source is displayed in the Position Source indicator see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel re QP NOTE The DR cannot be set as a primary position source this way It is used for positioning only in case there is no any data available from external positioning devices 5 To set a positioning device as a secondary position source just select it in the list of available positioning devices in the Position sources tab To display the own ship position in the chart view using the secondary position source check the Show secondary checkbox 6 In case the primary position source fails an alarm is triggered see chapter 7 6 Alarms and the secondary position source becomes the primary source automatically Page 136 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 2 2 Dead Reckoning The dead reckoning parameters can be used for the own ship positioning when communication with all other positioning devices is lost B use dead reckoning as position source do the following 1 Open the Navi gt Dead reckoning tab The Position Heading and Speed parameters are automatically set to the values that were
222. he speed of the tidal stream in the ebb state is shown Graph Speeds Directions 11 De Ss EO NONY STR Tere 6 L ee TT ne 2 1 15 17 19 21 23 UTC 2009 10 03 10 52 Speed 0 0kn Direction 195 00 Direct Changes Flood Ebb Ebb Figure 87 Tidal stream information graph Not considering the stream state the button Direct Changes is outpressed The diagram displays absolute values of speed and direction without taking into account flood and ebb States Graph Speeds Directions EEA See 2 5 ES 7 a Je 2s Sean UTC 2009 10 0308 18 Speed 2 2kn Direction 195 00 Direct Changes Flood Ebb Ebb Figure 88 Tidal stream information graph absolute speed and direction values The direction of the tidal stream is graphically shown for every hour as green arrows The blue thin graph line is a graph of water height levels of the tidal High Low station related to the tidal stream in case the tidal stream is linked to any tidal station at all Please note that it is only a schematically drawn graph without any level marks In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram When you move the mouse pointer over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal stream direction and speed are shown below allowing you to obtain more detailed information ai B SF NOTE The graph can be displayed in the two modes not for all tidal streams This option depends on the data for each
223. heck 1s available for the selected database Figure 10 Signature 4 To check the database signature press the Check signature button The signature check in progress check progress is displayed in the Signature check progress dialog To cancel dialog the procedure press the Abort button Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results appears QP NOTE The signature check may help identify problems with the data authenticity and integrity In case any problems have been identified in the course of the signature check contact the database provider to settle them 5 To install the database select the database in the Available databases pane and press the Register database button the database is copied to a pre defined location on the system hard disk and registered automatically The database is added to the Registered DB list Page 30 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 The following operations can be carried out with registered databases integrity check signature check and unregistering e To check the integrity of a registered database if available select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Check integrity button the button becomes active if integrity check is available for the database Upon the termination of the integrity check a message with the information on the check results appears SF NOTE The inte
224. hh lt CR gt lt LF gt e me te J a iae h eb pee o oe imeem forea M for magnetic not processed C C e gt VHW Water speed and heading Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 The compass oO to which the vessel ae and the speed of the vessel relative to the water S VHW x x T x x M x x N x x K hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Heading degrees true not processed for speed log T for true not processed for speed log Heading degrees magnetic not processed for speed log M for magnetic not processed for speed log Current speed in knots not processed for gyroscope N for knots not processed for gyroscope Current speed in km h 9301584 10 Page 227 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt VTG Course over ground and ground speed Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 The actual course and pes relative to the ee VTG x x Rep Mig Rox UN Keke K a MACRI Course over ground degrees true FC C a fxx Course over ground degrees magnetic M for magnetic _ _ 4 M sx svetowmmmaime Nee o 7x ovetowmmmainm eee gt _ Mode indicator gt WPL Waypoint location Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint S WPL 1111 11 a yvyyyy yy a c c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt se O e M I Waypoint latitude N S YYYY YY Waypoint longitude E W Waypoint identifier Page 228 of 259 9301584
225. i umia IAR gao EPRREED SF nd econ MMMM Precipitation Swell waves Legend gt gt Total waves Figure 119 Display of the temperature using the Text type symbols ai B SF NOTE Some symbol types cannot be used to display specific weather parameters For example Contour type symbols cannot be used to display wind speed and direction or precipitation data If a symbol type cannot be used for a weather parameter it is grayed for that parameter All symbol types available for a parameter can be used in the chart view at the same time 5 To select measurement units for the display of a weather parameter double click or press the ENTER key in the Measurement Units field of the weather parameter when the legend is open the Measurement Units column is hidden The drop down list with measurement unit options will appear in the cell Open the drop down list and select one of the measurement units Meteo Parameter Area Cont Symb Text Measurement Units Pressure in hectoPascals Pressure Temperature w Temperature in Celsius Speed in knots Speed in miles hour Speed in meters sec Total waves Speed in Beaufort numbers Precipitation Swell waves Figure 120 Selecting measurement units for the wind speed Page 122 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 To set the time for which weather data should be displayed use the time setup t
226. ies for the received weather data packages To be able to use the data you should unpack and load them to the ECDIS In the Weather gt Weather Packages tab you can display detailed information about the data requests and received data packages download a weather package to the ECDIS in case it was received by e mail initiate a send receive operation in case it is not done automatically display weather data received in a package on the chart delete a package and save a package as a grb or an xm1 file Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages 10 02 2009 11 13 Global ECMWF 50 km Tropical Cyclones 10 02 2009 11 12 Coastal Request Global ECMWF 50 km Tropical Cyclones iA AA AA 4 LEE Cii Eass badass Damant SPO label EPR 4 C Laa Teenie Pola al Download v Settings Slobal ECMWF 50 km ressure Temperature Dew Point Temp Wind Precipitation Cloud Cover Total Waves Swell Waves alid from 20 02 2009 12 12 6h creen 044 41 806 N 001 18 988 W 044 35 263 N 001 07 107 W Package Details Figure 108 Weather gt Weather Packages tab The following data packages handling operations are available in the Weather Packages tab Downloading weather packages to the ECDIS Import of weather packages is only necessary in case you are using the E Mail Manually via attachment communication type With the E Mail Manually via att
227. ig gt Anti Collision Tool tab B To configure the anti collision display do the following 1 Open the Config gt Anti Collision Tool tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units S Setup oa Taata Tool Ship Output and Time W Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 1 l Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 Maximum CPA NM 2 0 TCPA Limit min TCPA Critical min WW TargetVectors Apply Parameters Figure 204 Config gt Anti Collision Tool tab 2 To turn the anti collision display on check the Anticollision ON OFF checkbox To turn the anti collision display off clear the checkbox 3 Set the time for prediction of the own ship position select a value in the Vector Length drop down list The time value defines the length of the own ship speed vector the end of the vector points to the position at which the own ship will be in the specified time 4 Set the minimum CPA distance enter a value to the Radius of CPA limit circle field The minimum CPA distance determines the safe passing distance between the own ship and a target The allowable input range is 0 0 to 5 0 nautical miles 5 Set the maximum CPA distance enter a value to the Maximum CPA field If a target is at a distance to the own ship equal or less than the maximum CPA distance the target is relevant for the collision risk evaluation Targets with the CPA distance to the own ship larger than the maximum CPA are not conside
228. igure 19 Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog 3 Select the permits file and press the Apply cell permit button The cell permits written in the permits file will be applied You can now decrypt the S 57 data and convert them to the CM93v3 format 4 Incase an error occurred during permits application the error message will be displayed in the Message log pane Page 40 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Bro view all installed S 63 cell permits or uninstall a specified cell permit do the following 1 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button The Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog will open 2 Inthe Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog press the Installed cell permit button The Installed cell permits dialog will open In the dialog window all installed cell permits together with Data Servers who provided the data and the permits expiration dates are listed Installed cell permits x GB GB100002 2012 12 31 GB GB100004 2012 12 31 GB GB100005 2012 12 31 Figure 20 Installed cell permits dialog 3 To uninstall a permit select it in the list press the Delete permit button and confirm the operation The permit will be uninstalled 4 Incase an error occurred during uninstalling permits the error message will be displayed in the Message log pane e aa apply a new SA certificate do the following l Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Apply SA Certifica
229. ing the start point and the end point press the Show button 6 To clear the calculator press the Clear All button Page 204 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software APPENDIX A Troubleshooting A hardware alarm HW malfunction Plug unplug cables etc Position Device lost alarm Invalid data from lt gt device alarm Invalid checksum of data from lt gt device alarm No sensors can be set up empty sensors list in the gt Input Output Config tab Position sensor is set up but coordinates COG and SOG indicators are orange and the DR mode is indicated as the currently used positioning device Position sensor is set up but coordinates COG and SOG indicators are red and no data are displayed Gyrocompass sensor is set up but the HDG indicator is orange 9301584 10 Reception of signal from the device is interrupted The Input Output configuration has been changed Data of the sentence from the lt gt device is not valid Checksum value of sentences from lt gt device is not valid No license is installed for the Input Output program module eToken problems Data from the position sensor are invalid Data from the position sensor are not being received No license is installed for the Input Output program module Data from the sensor are invalid gyrocompass Data from the gyrocompass s
230. ion and Passed Track vicccsncsscicoataitatasianapecdaasiaie mada tian eaeecaeaeees 133 T PO OEO UE S a T 135 da Primary and Secondary Position Sources 2eisss0c7 asic nsa stays abacrecy aera een dcncenanaeapasebaceeteeeson ss 135 7222 DEAR CCKOMING 5 10 2 5 lt asa5cscnanscuaaa spain pana samaaoaeasnadamassaasoade E a sass ioe SA 137 V2 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPS cccccecceseeeeeesesssessssseessssssssseseeeens 137 7 2 4 POSILIONZC OLE COM visa essecccasiice nidasnasqianiauatonteauss i bicwieidaszqoesabe canal tetean a 145 125 POSICOM DISCTEDANGCICS 4 2 eAansansaransaaoddaasnauasehaetednataneanenaaawdanaeeabeceh A A 147 o Headin SOM ES arean sc assets ne N NG 147 74 Navigational Data Display and Sources ccst lt 5Gsecdsdana R a a 149 7 4 1 Nayiganonal Pane ceo haat a EA a Sasgal steel oni sbaasnanateetnets 149 TAZ Navigational Dat SOULCES ispere E AE 150 7 4 3 Wido ensor Dalier aaa E A E T NEN O 150 ho UNavigatiOnal Ohart Seine Ss irinenn a E AE ETTE E OAOE EE 151 7 5 1 Navid onr Modera a A aes aa ee 151 Poz BESC OC E MO a E TT Mean rnpT eNO un ern 151 7 5 3 Chart Display Pave e ss sec cancers teraar n ea a 152 7 5 4 Char OSIM ALA OI eaan E NE E E O N 153 Ta OTS ALG kiye Moo iaa N 153 7 5 6 LENES ECOrS eara N 154 Ko Alan es A E A E teclere cies ate 155 7 6 1 Alarms and Warnings Pane ssh cca ie ie na a a eamtansee 156 7 6 2 Anteromndne Alam zeroan E TEN A ATAN EARE 157 7 6 3 Al eaa a E O E S 159 7 6 4 Alarm Conditio
231. ions with the specified coordinates in the chart view press the Show button 3 Select a measurement unit for the step distance nautical miles statute miles or kilometers in the drop down list near the Step field 4 Enter the distance value of the step in the Step field 5 Press the Ortodromia Points button Coordinates of the great circle points will be displayed as a list of coordinates in the special list area 6 To clear the calculator press the Clear All button 9301584 10 Page 203 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software si To convert coordinates from one datum to another do the following 1 Open the Info gt Navi Calculator gt Datum Transformation tab Echo Sounder AIS Targets Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization Oe x Diagram Monitor __ image __ knof Info nfo Calculator Monitor Distance Bearing Great Circle Datum Transformation Show ee tlearAl i Start Point N 00 00 000 F000 00 000 From Datum WGS 84 j End Point To Datum wes 72 N00 00 002 Transform W000 00 009 Figure 230 Info gt Navi Calculator tab Datum Transformation tab Enter coordinates in the Start Point section Select the original datum in the From Datum drop down list Select the target datum in the To Datum drop down list Se a Press the Transform button and read converted coordinates in the End Point section To view the line connect
232. is selected Wrong license number Problem with eToken The list has not been refreshed automatically Wrong database is selected The license is issued for a different System ID License file extension is not USR TestBase ChartletsBase or a DB imported from the S 57 format is selected Current eToken number has no subscription on the Dynamic Licensing server Function is not enabled No ENC DB is registered Press the Refresh button Press the Find databases button Check that all necessary DB files are available on the data storage device Only DB in the CM93v3 format can be registered in the system Select a correct DB in the Databases drop down list in the Data gt Licensing tab Select a correct Zone Area in the zones and areas list in the Data gt Licensing tab Make sure the entered license number is typed correctly Plug unplug eToken and try to apply the license again Press the Find licenses button Select a correct DB in the Databases drop down list in the Data gt Licensing tab Contact your data provider Contact your data provider Select another DB except mentioned Contact service provider In the Data gt Dynamic Licensing tab check the Enable Dynamic Licensing checkbox Register an ENC DB Page 207 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Automatic updates are not received Unspecified error message is displayed during
233. isplay between the safe and the unsafe water and for generating anti grounding alarms Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors CMAR v Two shades Shallow pattern 52 hansen Safety contour 5 0 52 simplified Safety depth 2 0 2 0 WV Safe contour only WV Safe depths Isolated dangers aaa Plain depth contour Shallow contour Deep contour 10 0 m lg m m Set Parameters Figure 41 Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Contours section B To set the contours values do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab 2 Enter the depth values of the contours to the fields corresponding to the contours e Safety contour is the depth contour selected by the user that should not be crossed to avoid grounding the ship The contour is used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between the safe and the unsafe water for generating anti grounding alarms and for checking routes SF NOTE If a particular electronic chart does not have the depth contour that is set in the Safety Contour field the system will automatically set the nearest deeper contour as the Safety Contour For example the safety contour value is set to 15 meters if there is no a 15 meters contour on the chart but there are 10 and 20 meter contours the 20 meter contour will be considered the safety contour In
234. isplay off clear the checkbox 4 Select the guard zone angle in the drop down list to the right from the Guard Zone Sector checkbox The angle of the guard zone can be set between 5 and 90 degrees By reducing the angle to 5 degrees you will only have warnings of danger objects in front of the vessel 5 To enable highlighting of danger objects located inside the guard zone check the Danger Objects Inside Guard Zone checkbox 6 After you have set the anti grounding alarm parameters press the Set Parameters button for the parameters to take effect 9301584 10 Page 157 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software When the anti grounding alarm with the guard zone and highlighting of danger objects inside the zone are activated all objects with depths less then the set safety contour value will be highlighted in red inside the guard zone The danger objects are also added to the dangers and cautions lists If a danger object is found in the guard zone the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes red and is called Dangers If a caution object is found in the guard zone the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes orange and is called Cautions To view the Dangers and Cautions lists click on the Dangers and Cautions indicator the Dangers Cautions tab will open with the Dangers and Cautions tabs in it Figure 171 Display of the Guard Zone and danger objects inside the zone re SF NOTE In order to use the anti grounding func
235. isplays hides vertices the points on which the 3D picture is built Show hide wireframe Displays hides the lines connecting the 3D picture vertices see above Show hide colored Z layers When this option is on all depths are divided into 10 layers from the minimum depths to the surface The layers are displayed in different colors The palette for the layers presentation is selected in the Z colors panel see below When Z layers are hidden all depths are displayed in blue color but with different shades e e 2 e Page 52 of 259 9301584 10 l C EJ ES 1 a el User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software Show hide alarm area When this option is on all depths shallower than the safety contour are marked with red color Show hide water surface Displays hides the water surface which is represented as a blue plane Show hide terrain Displays hides the Terrain profile When the terrain profile 1s hidden the land area 1s always displayed flat Show hide seabed Displays hides the seabed Show hide compass Displays hides the compass The compass is represented as a blue and red arrow in the lower left corner The blue arrow points to the north and the red arrow points to the south Show hide navigation Displays hides aids to navigation Show hide vessel Displays hides the own ship The ship s size in the 3D window depends on the chart scale Show hide ERBL Displa
236. istered in the Config gt Input Output tab 3 Inthe Device Type list select the type of the device 4 Inthe Route to Export drop down list select the route to export 5 Press the Export button The route will be exported to the specified device as RTE and WPL sentences Upon completion of the operation the message will be displayed The route was successfully exported 9301584 10 Page 93 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software L a import a route from a device do the following l 2 Open the Route gt Export Import tab and switch to the From To Device tab In the Device Name drop down list select the name of the device from which the route will be imported The list contains devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab In the Device Type list select the type of the device Press the Import button The ECDIS will start reading RTE and WPL sentences from the specified device Progress of the route import is displayed in the Progress section progress bar ai B SF NOTE In case the ECDIS failed to start receiving the route from the very first sentence an error message will appear In that case close the message cancel import by pressing the Cancel button in the Progress section and press the Import button once more 5 T Upon completion of the route import the message will appear Route X is received _ Would you like to import more routes To go on with importing routes pres
237. ists of twenty squares extending over the whole of a 350x270 mm approx screen Each square is colored with one of the four main background area shades such as shallow water blue DEPVS and each carries a two pixel wide diagonal line in one of the important line or symbol foreground colors such as planned route red PLRTE 6 The color differentiation test consists of being able to distinguish the background colors and to pick out the like foreground colors 1 e to say that squares 3 5 11 15 18 and 20 all have a shallow water blue background and that squares 3 10 and 17 have a grey line 3 2 Updating ECDIS Software To update the ECDIS software you to contact your certified service supplier 3 2 1 System software version The version number for the installed software is shown on the Info gt System Info gt System software version tab System Astro Info Info System ID Danelec eT 00011 Version 5 0 82 323999 Copy User usr file fae x Als Monitor Radar Image Tides Info Navi Calculator Streams Info Echo Sounder Diagram Synchronization longeis Monitor Databases status Licenses status Disks status Talkers status System Sofware Version System software information The tab will show the system model in this case DM800E and the version of the installed software in this case version 1 09 00 3 2 2 Dolphin ECDIS ap
238. kb Reset OK Cancel Figure 96 Weather Download Request dialog Easy Mode Setup 3 To add a product to the request press the Add new product button and select the product you want to add in the drop down list The product appears in the table and is removed from the Add new product list Page 104 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 To set the product parameters click on the plus sign near the product name to expand the product 6 9 parameters list to collapse the list press the minus sign near the product name and check those weather parameters you want to receive E Weather Download Request x Products Add new product Coverage Period Global ECMWF 150 km X Screen e O 3 day s lv Pressure E Temperature V Wind Mv Precipitation v Total Waves Swell Waves Tropical Cyclones x Worldwide K m o 1 day s in Forecast For 45 nex 2008 Download at 12 12 Total 19 kb Reset OK Cancel Figure 97 Weather Download Request dialog setting a product parameters 5 To remove a product from the request press the product Remove button x 6 To set a geographic area to be covered by the forecast data choose a predefined coverage from the drop down list or set your own coverage To open the list of coverage options press the arrow near the current coverage name To set a new coverage d b Press the arrow near the current coverag
239. l Scale l Ship on screen Out button halves it Best Scale e In the Scale edit field the scale of the Look ahead View is set enter the scale Snchonize value and press the ENTER key The chart view scale will be changed Figure 31 Chart Scale panel 9301584 10 Page 51 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e The Original Scale button sets the view scale to the value of the original scale of the chart that is displayed currently e The Ship on screen option scrolls the chart so that the own ship was in the view e The Synchronize button synchronizes the look ahead view and the main chart view so that the same geographic area is displayed in both views QP NOTE The Synchronize function doesn t work together with the Ship on screen option on 5 5 2 3D Window The 3D window displays the chart area that is currently on the screen as a 3 dimensional model Bt To open the 3D window do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 2 Inthe New Window section press the 3D button The 3D window will open 3D Window Figure 32 3D Window The 3D Window can be expanded for a better 3D view and if required shown on a separate PC monitor To arrange the 3D view use the 3D window control buttons Set view from ship Sets the view from the own ship This mode is available only if the ship is inside the chart view and the 3D window borders Show hide vertices D
240. l be displayed as orange dashed lines The ERBL center is in the own ship position 2 Point the mouse pointer to any object in the chart view The range and bearing to and from values are displayed in the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view 3 Turn the ERBL mode off si To measure the range and bearing between any two points in the chart do the following 1 Turn the ERBL mode on In the chart view range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as orange dashed lines The ERBL center is in the own ship position 2 Point the mouse pointer to the first point and left click the ERBL center will be fixed in this point 3 Point the mouse pointer to the second point The range and bearing to and from values are displayed in the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view 9301584 10 Page 195 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 To release the ERBL center left click in the chart view the center will be fixed in the own ship position again 5 Turn the ERBL mode off ai B SF NOTE Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines The calculation mode is set in the Check points panel see chapter 9 1 2 Check Points To fix a range around the own ship do the following 1 Turn the ERBL mode on In the chart view range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as orange dashed lines The ERBL center is in
241. l changing An alarm is activated when the chart under the own ship symbol or under the chart view center in case the own ship symbol is out of coverage is scaled to a chart with a different scale level The alarm is given to notify you that the ECDIS is working with a more or a less detailed chart To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message The alarm is active for at least 30 seconds Dangerous AIS A dangerous AIS target is detected Alert messages An ALR alert message is received from an input device Input device is lost Signals from one of the external devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab are lost The name of the device is indicated in the alarm message To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Safety contour is not available The safety contour can not be defined by the ECDIS in the current chart view If the safety contour is not defined the ECDIS is not able to notify you about such dangerous situations as crossing the safety contour or danger of grounding In this situation you should pay especial attention to the chart data and aids to navigation The alarm is deactivated when the ECDIS defines the safety contour Not for use with Position device A small scale chart is currently displayed in the chart view and it cannot be used for offshore navigation To deactivate the alarm click on the alarm message Destination approached The alarm notifies that a control point on th
242. l checkbox is set the planned speed to the next waypoint will be displayed on each leg If the WOL checkbox is set the wheel over line is displayed a the next waypoint The wheel over line marks the position of the course change The WOL line is only displayed in the next waypoint and is parallel to the next leg 7 7 2 Route Monitoring Panel After the voyage start the Route Monitoring panel opens In the panel information about the route is displayed The following route monitoring data are displayed in the Route Monitoring panel Route name Name of the route that is being monitored WPT Number of the next waypoint and number of waypoints in ARENDAL MARSTRAND the route WPT 11 18 Name Name of the next waypoint Name Noname TTG Time to go from the current own ship position to the next eG 9h34min TTA 13h 31min waypoint ETA 05 23 2009 02 12 If the indicator is green the own ship proceeds in the 94 688 NM direction of the next waypoint Bw 1119 9 If the indicator is red the own ship proceeds in the direction 119 2 inverse to the direction of the next waypoint or does not move 67 071NM at all 0 007 Nm TTA Time to arrival from the current own ship position to the end 11 waypoint 9h 34min 01 27 2009 02 12 ETA Estimated time and date of arrival to the end waypoint Figure 174 Route Monitoring panel Page 162 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software e
243. l computer is ready to receive synchronization data and carry out synchronization Sync run Corresponds to the Synchronization in progress current state synchronization is running on the computer Corresponds to the Waiting for remote synchronization to finish current state synchronization is in progress between remote computers of the local network and the local computer is waiting its turn for synchronization Page 28 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 3 3 2 Routes Synchronization All data types are synchronized between the network computers automatically However synchronization of routes may require additional actions on the part of the user Route planning is supposed to be done on the Route Planning Station computer Synchronization of routes between the Route Planning Station and the Master computer should be done manually Bo synchronize routes manually do the following 1 Open the Route gt Route Planning tab 2 In the Synchronize routes with drop down list select the computer to synchronize routes with and press the Synchronize routes with button A synchronization task will be created and added to the list of tasks to perform 3 The task is performed using the same procedure as for automatic synchronization tasks Fay QP NOTE Routes are synchronized automatically between Master and Backup computers You don t have to synchronize the data manually between these
244. l is described in detail in chapter 6 5 1 Tides Information To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated on the chart press the Play button Each new position of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period In the left hand part of the panel the following general information about the selected stream is displayed e Time Zone Time difference between standard local time of tidal stream and UTC e Direction Direction of the tidal stream e Speed Speed of the tidal stream e Flood Ebb Shows if the current tidal stream object is in the flood or ebb state Detailed information about the tidal stream 1s represented in the Graph and Speed Directions tabs e Graph Tidal stream speed in knots dependent on time is graphically expressed on the diagram The diagram background consists of three color zones These zones graphically show night time dark grey twilights light grey and daytime white The red vertical line on the graph marks the time entered in the date time field Two display modes are available by switching the Direct Changes button 9301584 10 Page 97 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Considering the stream state the button Direct Changes is pressed The vertical diagram axis will be divided into two parts by a red horizontal line In the top part the speed of the tidal stream in the flood state is shown and in the bottom part t
245. larm Area tab see chapter 6 7 5 Weather Alarm Area The routes will be colored depending on whether they go inside or outside the alarm areas In the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab in the time setup tool set the time scheduled for navigation along the route A symbol of the own ship will appear on the route in the position where the ship is supposed to be at the indicated time if there are several routes displayed in the chart view the symbol of the own ship will appear on all the routes Weather forecast parameters will be displayed for the indicated time The legs of the routes will be highlighted with red if they are dangerous in terms of the alarm conditions green if the legs are safe and blue of there is a danger of capsizing for the ship following under given weather conditions and with the planned speed along the legs The navigation along the routes is imitated by dragging the own ship symbol from one waypoint to another using the mouse pointer When the ship symbol is moved the time changes to the time at which the ship is scheduled to reach the new position The weather forecast changes together with the time The own ship symbols on other routes are moved too When dragged along the route the own ship symbol can be moved for a distance the ship would make in the time interval set in the Step field in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab To move the own ship symbol along the route you can also use the animation butto
246. last received from external output devices Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data pasttrackandvector Reckoning Position fix Position Heading speed Drift ie Auto Manual i Auto Manual i Auto Manual Drift direction 000 0 Latitude N 00 00 000 o00 0 Speea o o mn Driftspeed 0 0 kn Longitude 000 00 000 Figure 138 Config gt Dead reckoning tab 2 To change the automatically set parameters clear the Auto Manual checkbox of the parameter that you are going to change and enter a new value to the edit field 3 Enter the drift direction and speed to the Drift direction and Drift speed fields 4 After all necessary changes have been done press the Apply button for the parameters to take effect 7 2 3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs The Manual Position Fix function is intended for fixing of the own ship position using range and bearing lines of position taken from visual or radar detected reference objects Description of the function algorithm and examples of the manual position task are presented in the Appendix D To use the Manual Position Fix function open the Navi gt LOP Position fix tab Navigation Own ship Dead LOP lt E lex Data past track and vector Reckoning Position fix Reference points Observation MA aan _ Select reference point _ Remove Remove All Position Discrepancy N00 00 000 000 00 000 Bearing rom Distance RMS 4 Accept Position
247. lay areas where values of parameters exceed the set thresholds as alarm areas on the chart e aa set a weather alarm condition do the following l Open the Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab and press the Add condition button to create a new line in the alarms table Double click in the Met Parameter field to open the drop down list with weather parameters Select a parameter from the drop down list Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Met parameter Value from Pressure Swell waves Add condition Delete condition Moveup Move down Delete All Data was edited by user Figure 126 Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab adding a new alarm condition Double click in the Value of field to open the drop down list of attributes of the specified weather parameter Select an attribute from the drop down list Double click in the Value from field and enter the value of the lower limit of the condition double click in the Value to field and enter the value of the upper limit Repeat the actions for other alarm conditions if necessary To combine several alarm conditions use operations available in the Operation drop down list The drop down list appears after the next alarm condition has been added The following operations are available e AND alarm area will be made for areas where both conditions are true e OR alarm area will be made for areas where at least one of the conditions is true To delete a condition se
248. le range of the Approach E scale level and the chart of this level is displayed However the scale of this chart is 1 50 000 which is 2 5 times as small as the current view scale Such situations may be dangerous as you are expecting more detailed information at the set current view scale whereas the source paper chart wasn t supposed to have the expected detail level You may be relying too much on the chart and get into an accident The ECDIS has an indicator that informs you about the underscale or overscale of the current view to avoid accidents There are several methods for changing the chart view scale e aa scale the chart view using the drag to zoom method 1 Press and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the drag to zoom rectangle around the area you wish to zoom in Figure 28 Zooming the chart view using the drag to zoom method 3 Ifyou want to cancel this operation press the ESC key while drawing 4 To zoom the chart out do the same holding the SHIFT key down ai D SF NOTE In case of zooming out the whole chart window will shrink to the size of the drag to zoom rectangle after releasing the mouse button Page 48 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software B scale the chart view using the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel e Type the scale in the Chart Scale Edit field and press ENTER a O e The Zoom In button doubles the current view scale and the Zoom
249. lect it in the table and press the Delete button To delete all conditions from the table press the Delete All button To move a condition up or down in the table select it and press the Move up or Move down button respectively To save the current conditions set to a file press the Save button in the Save as dialog indicate the folder and the name of the conditions file and press Save The conditions set will be saved to an xm1 file To load a previously saved conditions set press the Load button in the Open dialog select the file with the conditions and press Open The conditions will be loaded and displayed in the Weather Alarm Area panel e a display alarm areas in the chart view do the following l 2 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab Find the Alarm zone entry in the Meteo Parameter column and tick the checkbox to the left from the entry Page 128 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 7 6 Comparison of Routes Alarm areas can be used to compare two routes and select the one which is safer e Aa compare routes do the following l Create two or more routes see chapter 6 4 Route Planning and Plotting Display the routes in the chart view Download weather data for the region covering the routes It is important that the time period of the weather forecast cover the time scheduled for navigating along the routes Set alarm conditions in the Weather gt Weather A
250. ll the errors The new CM93v3 database is saved to a predefined location and is registered in the ECDIS automatically e aa update a database created by conversion of S 57 data to CM93v3 data do the following l 2 3 4 5 6 Connect the data storage device with the S 57 updates data to your system Open the Data gt Import S57 tab Press the Find databases button The ECDIS will search for S 57 data on all removable data storage devices connected to the system All detected S 57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S 57 source data pane In the Database Name drop down list select the name of the database that will be updated Select the S 57 exchange set with updates to the database in the S57 source data pane Press the Convert button Converted data will be added to the data contained in the specified database QP NOTE Databases created by conversion are encrypted for the eToken dongle inserted to your computer at the moment of conversion These databases can only be used with this same dongle or a dongle of a dongles group to which it belongs 9301584 10 Page 45 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 CHARTS DISPLAY Chart databases consist of a number of charts These charts are electronic copies of regular paper charts However working with the electronic charts you don t have to prepare a next chart and plot the own ship position on it while working with another chart at the same tim
251. lly terminated e Unknown the operation was not tested e Failed failure reason the operation testing failed due to some reason the reason of failure is given in brackets 9301584 10 Page 117 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 Testing procedures depend on the communication type set in the Connection setup e Automatic connection types Internet HTTP E Mail SMTP POP3 E Mail Inbox via MAPI 1 2 3 Press the Test connection button Test request will be sent and test response received and downloaded automatically The procedure may take time but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed with your other activities When you open the Test Connection window next time you will see the status of the test e Semiautomatic connection types E mail Folder Send Recv 1 2 3 4 5 Press the Test connection button the test request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Send the test request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive the test response file in the response e mail save the file to the Receive folder The ECDIS will load the test file automatically The procedure may take time but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed with your other activities When you open the Test Connection window next time you will see the status of the test e Manual connection type E mail Fil
252. log select the folder where the log book file is stored In the pane next to the folder tree pane the list of all log book pages in the selected folder will be displayed Select a page press the OK button and confirm the operation The log book page will be imported to the log book and available for display and playback x Select log book file to import NEW VOLUME E Logbook 20090326 Ibk 20090401 Ibk 20090508 Ibk Refresh devices tree 9K Cancel Figure 225 Import day log book dialog A IMPORTANT Imported log book page overwrites the page with the same date 9 3 2 Log Book Play Back Using the play back functionality of the log book you can view the log book entries animated in the chart view si To play back the log book do the following 1 Open the Log Book panel Log Date 2009 05 08 From 00 00 gt To 23 59 Ship stime F A x Book Start Play Back Cycle playback Replay speed x1 Complete Track 7 System M Track Voyage Userrecords v Targets AIS targets Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 0 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 07 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage System Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 0 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage System Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 0 Alarm added Ship is out of coverage System Alarm Alarm message 2009 05 08 19 07 04 Alarm added dr
253. lowing actions 9301584 10 Page 107 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 2 3 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 2 3 4 Press the Send Request button A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml Send the data request file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no You will receive weather data files in the response e mail save the files to the Receive folder The ECDIS will load the data automatically e Manual communication E mail Manually via Attachment 1 I 3 4 5 6 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server A data request file will be generated Save the file to any location on your computer Send the file as an attachment to an e m
254. ltip Safety contour Shallow contour Deep contour 10 0 m m lv National text Mariner s notes m ee ice Figure 43 Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Text settings tab 9301584 10 Page 61 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 To display an element in the chart view set the checkbox to the left from the element name to hide the element from the chart view clear the checkbox There are the following elements in the Text settings tab Light info Turns on the display of characteristics of lights The information of a light is displayed next to the light symbol If the setting is off the information about a light can only be obtained from the Object Info panel Periodic date Turns on the display of objects with a periodic date of activity only during their activity period If the setting is off the objects with periodic date of activity are always displayed on the chart Text important Turns on the display of texts that have the important category These texts contain the information important for navigation such as bridge clearance depth values above point obstructions etc Text generic Turns on the display of texts that have the generic category These texts are names of geographic objects such as countries cities islands etc Text other Turns on the display of texts that have the other category These texts are names of lights and other aids to na
255. ly electronic system allowed to replace paper charts under the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea SOLAS Electronic Chart System ECS A system comprised of navigation software navigation data system hardware An ECS 1s any combination of hardware and software that displays marine charts electronically The term ECS is used specifically when ECDIS specifications are not met by the software hardware system Electronic Navigation Chart ENC An electronic data file containing information that could be used to display a chart The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart for example sailing directions which may be considered necessary for safe navigation EP See Estimated Position Estimated Position Position of own ship determined by the common intersection of two LOPs Estimated Time of Arrival ETA The calculated arrival time to an active waypoint assuming no change in present course and speed or weather conditions This time is based on computer clock time For greatest accuracy make sure computer clock is synchronized with real time Fish Finder See Sounder 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Fix Position of own ship determined without reference to any former position by the common intersection of three or more LOPs Flood Current
256. mage Overlay Left click on the indicator to turn the radar image display on or off Radar The radar image display is on Radar The radar image display is off AIS Targets Display indicator has the following states The AIS Targets Display indicator shows if the AIS targets display is on or off see chapter 8 2 2 AIS Targets Display Left click on the indicator to turn the AIS targets display on or off S The AIS targets display is on E The AIS targets display is off ARPA Targets Display indicator has the following states The ARPA Targets Display indicator shows if the ARPA targets display is on or off see chapter 8 2 2 AIS Targets Display Left click on the indicator to turn the ARPA targets display on or off MJE The ARPA targets display is on ARPA The ARPA targets display is off Dangers and Cautions indicator has the following states The Dangers and Cautions indicator shows if there are dangerous objects or cautions inside the Guard Zone see chapter 7 6 2 Antigrounding Alarm There are no dangers in the guard zone or the anti grounding alarm function is off There are dangerous objects inside the guard zone Left click on the indicator to open the Dangers and Cautions panel Dangers list is displayed in the Dangers tab Dangers There are cautions inside the guard zone Left click on the indicator to open the Dangers Page 14 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application
257. mark is displayed Figure 154 Navigational panel STW Speed through water received from the log DPT Depth received from the echo sounder The first value is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom and the second value is the depth from the water line to the transducer The DPT line is not on the panel if no echo sounder is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab Wind Wind speed and direction received from the wind sensor The Wind line is not on the panel if no wind sensor is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab The Disp button opens the Anemometer window where the true and relative wind directions are depicted graphically ROT Rate of turn received from the gyrocompass The ROT line is not on the panel if no gyrocompass is registered in the Config gt Input Output tab 9301584 10 Page 149 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e 5951 WGS 84 The number of the source chart for the chart under the own ship or under the chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage and the chart coordinates system In the frame lower the suitability indicator is displayed The indicator shows if the chart under the own ship or under the chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage is suitable for navigation ai B 7 NOTE The indicators color means the following Green the values are received from the primary positioning device and other external device
258. mation available from the chart is displayed The Custom display type is on To switch to the Standard display type left click on the indicator Navigation Info indicator has the following states The Nav Info indicator switches the current display type to Base display turns off chart presentation settings not required for the Base display and removes all additional navigation information radar AIS targets ARPA targets from the chart view KEA _Navinfo_ _Navinfo_ Navinfo 9301584 10 All navigation information is displayed Left click on the indicator to remove the information from the chart view No navigation information is displayed Left click on the indicator to restore the last display state Page 13 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Periodic Date indicator has the following states The Periodic Date indicator shows if objects which are active only in specific periods of time during the year are displayed only in the periods when they are active the indicator 1s green or are always displayed in the chart view disregarding their activity periods the indicator is orange see chapter 5 6 7 Other Settings Periodic date Ma Lhe Periodic date setting is set The Periodic date setting is not set Y m y i Radar Display indicator has the following states The Radar Display indicator shows if the radar image display is on or off see chapter 8 4 Radar I
259. mport a mariner object do the following l 6 Open the Chart gt Mariner Objects tab and press the Export Import button to switch to the export import mode Press the Import button The Import mariner objects dialog will open In the Import mariner objects dialog select the folder where mariner objects files are stored The list of files will be displayed in the right hand pane of the dialog window Select the mariner objects file to import to the ECDIS and press the Import button The mariner objects from the file will be imported to the ECDIS and added to the list of other mariner objects To return to the editor press the Editor button 6 4 Route Planning and Plotting 6 4 1 Automatic Route Planning The ECDIS provides the possibility to automatically plan and plot the route The route is calculated using the database of pre planned routes connecting a number of ports of the world si To plot a route automatically do the following l Open the Route gt Route Finder tab Start Route cogo Route Export lt EMex Voyage Planning Finder Import Port list Itinerary Disabled Passages Search By Port KOBENHAVN COPENHAGEN Denmark al YSTAD Sweden DURRES Albania PORTO SAN NICOLO Albania SHENGJIN Albania m x sl Eaka Highlight Ports A Sorted ByCounty M Highlight I Highlight All A Add restriction Remove all restrict Add waypoints Add to Itinerary Calculat
260. n a target approaches the own ship to the distance closer than the distance to dangerous the target symbol changes to the dangerous target symbol and starts flashing For the symbol to cease flashing acknowledge the target To acknowledge a target open the Info gt Targets tab ARPA or Sonar sub tab depending on the target type select the target in the targets table and press the Acknowledge button to acknowledge all targets press the Acknowledge all button The target symbol will stop flashing 4 Set the lost target alarm range enter a value in nautical miles to the Lost Target Alarm Range and press the Set button for the setting to take effect If a target was lost while inside the set range a Target Lost alarm is generated if outside the set range no alarm is generated 5 Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA TCPA to Dangerous section and press the Set button for the changes to take effect If the actual CPA or TCPA of the own ship and a target are less than the set values the target is displayed as dangerous 9301584 10 Page 173 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Depending on the presence of signal from targets and the distance between the targets and the own ship there are the following types of ARPA and sonar targets Symbol name and description Signal Distance ARPA and Sonar targets display Target in acquisition state any distance The target detected in an acquisition area is displayed as a fl
261. n button 2 A Fix Position symbol is plotted in the current own ship position and the position object is added to the mariner objects database see chapter 6 3 Mariner Objects Figure 222 Fix symbol 9 3 Log Book The ECDIS contains an automatic log book function The log book records all events that occur during a voyage as well as the own ship positions and configuration changes The log book also has a playback feature to allow a voyage to be recreated in a controlled environment Together with the main ship log book the ECDIS keeps the ship track log The main log book contains entries of all classes System Track Voyage User records ARPA targets and AIS targets whereas the track log only contains entries of the Track class The difference between the main log and the track log is that in the main log records Track entries at regular intervals and the track log records all Track entries coming from the primary and secondary position sources 9 3 1 Viewing Log Book Entries Bf To view the log books do the following 1 Open the Log Book panel 2 To view the main log press the Main Logbook toggle button and to view the track log press the Complete Track toggle button Both logs share the same user interface If there are differences in functioning of an interface element for the main log and the track log it will be mentioned in the element description Date 2009 04 17 From 00 00 To 23 59 Ship stime amp GM
262. n where the file will be saved enter the file name and press the Save button The request configuration will be saved to an xml file 5 To download a previously saved request configuration press the Load Request button in the Open dialog select the request configuration file and press the Open button The request configuration will be loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog 9301584 10 Page 109 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 After the request has been configured you can download data Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 2 3 Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup the data request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the data request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Dy 3 4 Press the Send Request button A data request file will be generated and saved to th
263. nchronization data Data type type of data that should be synchronized can be Databases Updates Manual Updates Mariners Objects Routes Own Ship Configuration or Chart Data 9301584 10 Page 27 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Manual indicates if the task was carried out automatically Manual No or manually Manual Yes Attempts done number of attempts to perform the task when the number reaches five the task metadata are cleared Echo Sounder Radar Synchronization Diagram Image Info Calculator Monitor Computer Info Synchronization Status Computer name N A Synchronization status Stopped Computer role N A Current state Stopped no synchronization is available Synchronization log Tasks to perform Failed tasks Figure 8 Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab Tasks to perform tab In the Info gt Synchronization Monitor tab the Synchronization indicator is presented to help monitor synchronization The indicator shows the current state of the synchronization process Corresponds to the Disabled able to synchronize with remote computers current state the synchronization tool is disabled the local computer can only receive synchronization data from other local network computers and carry out synchronization but it cannot send synchronization data to other computers Corresponds to the Ready to start synchronization current state the loca
264. nd Tida lS tie gins ata isha 2 a si doseindiais Uveceseceoetutawes el dnceae sath Unecaueweneiainecy Mansi 95 6 5 1 Tides T Orma ODs one a A E iene ob E a 95 6 5 2 TaiGaluS tre ats MIONA N ainis ana E 97 6 5 3 Astronomical ITO raat oN esr N A ROA 99 66 Weather POrecast Downloadiersreiais ineen E N EEE O ESA 100 6 6 1 Weather SUDSCIPUON vrese snae Res eR area NTs LATER sadanedseiaese 100 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download esrus A I E O E 103 6 6 3 Overview and Coastal Download resis E E A austecuccssnorsl 107 9301584 10 Page 5 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 4 CC resent DOWO Id eee rene emer meee emere er nr ren en Noun tr tet een encre a nr or mrinen VY a tere 109 6 6 5 Scheduled Download sc scccusctecemadeiare N E a 111 6 6 6 Weather Fac lea Cs Fim Ni osese ications heat ane tenet letra ana oes ha i niatane teen at naling 113 6 6 7 Weather Download SGU eesis esre n aesa Een a aesa aSr eR 114 O Weather Forecast Display sensro aa a E AA E 119 6 7 1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data eeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeereerererrreeeren 119 6 7 2 Display Of Cyclone S oreesa EA ET 124 6 7 3 Display GE ICE Situa NON sarean sect N N 125 6 7 4 Weather TIME SENES ianea r a T 126 6 7 5 Weather A lati ATEI areen En EE E A EE EE EA SASS 128 6 7 6 Compar sonOl ROME Sessien e A e e ee 129 6 7 7 Inspect Ship POSION nians aaoaes dee sce eae 130 T NAVIGA TION eren o NEE E N EE 133 7 1 Own Ship Posit
265. neral warning flag for other navigation systems when a reliable fix is not available 2 A Status A OK or not used V LORAN C cycle lock warning flag Magnitude of XTE cross track error a XTE units N for nautical miles e fA Status A arrival circle entered V arrival circle not passed 7 A Status A perpendicular passed at waypoint V perpendicular not entered X Bearing origin to destination M T magnetic or true Destination waypoint ID Bearing present position to Xx C C _ ps ps destination M T magnetic or true XX Heading to steer to destination waypoint M T magnetic or true Mode indicator 09 _ MN Page 234 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software gt BBM AIS Broadcast binary message Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence supports generation of ITU R M 1371 binary Messages 8 and 14 This provides the application with a means to broadcast data as defined by the application only Data is defined by the application only not the AIS This message offers great flexibility for implementing system functions that use the AIS unit as a digital broadcast device After receiving this sentence via the IEC 61162 2 interface the AIS unit initiates a VHF broadcast of either Message 8 or 14 within 4 s See the ABK sentence for acknowledgement of the BBM Doo RRM x ky ky KY wick S s amp hh lt CR
266. ning device and the chart have different coordinates systems a position correction should be introduced 9301584 10 Page 145 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software A IMPORTANT The position correction is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password Page 146 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software B introduce a position correction do the following l Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab The position correction values are entered in the Position Corrections section Position Correction Lat 5 000 2 Enter the correction for the latitude to the Lat field and the correction for the Lon 1 003 longitude to the Lon field To add the correction value to the coordinate c9 as Apply corrections enter the plus sign in front of the value to subtract the correction value enter the minus sign in front of the value Figure 150 Position 3 After the correction has been entered or changed press Apply Correction section 4 The corrections are applied to the coordinates received from the positioning device and displayed in the navigational panel The corrections are indicated with the plus and minus signs depending on the sign of the correction a i QP NOTE Positioning devices can transmit the DTM sentence in the NMEA format This sentence contains indication of the coordinates system of the device
267. ns LAS asescsccsassasssaanstadenansadesaaestessmanseassaanstaecnanoadecaanetecsaneiassaansiaccaannateseansaaess 160 EE ROUE MOHONTE naran ee rr N NNN 161 7 7 1 Romte Monitorin Modessa E aaa aweaaow eae 161 7 1 2 ROUCCIViOnILO MING Panel eenen o a a e a e a 162 7 1 3 Goto Way POI FUNCH ON errian e NTN eae eee 163 8 NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOL Sperren r th eee es 165 SL CWO SOUMAS ae S E E EA E E E E E E 165 Be A ar N E E eats E E E A E seseaueaueanses sonst 166 S2 AD Tar ets Dilara E O E E i enateunracnrasaneaiteraie 166 8 2 2 AIS Taree DTS 9 Fa a eR ee en 168 Page 6 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 ARPAS OMA eea E a E 172 8 3 1 ARPA and Sonar lato Cts 1 Alavi le ewe rinse eet N ete le a eae 172 8 3 2 ARPA and So ar Targets Display icsccce cn ecslaanct santeteest aiasin T teers 173 SA Radar Image Oy ray osere rena e ae Ee R Teraa e eea e O eaa O AESTON 175 So iAntecollision Display c h eee E O A E 176 8 5 1 Theoretical Principles of the Anti collision Display cccccccccccccssscceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 8 5 2 Graphic Elements of the Anti collision Display ccccccccccsccssccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 184 8 5 3 Configuration of the Anti collision Display ccccccccccccccccsscccececeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 185 8 5 4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits 008 186 8 5 5 Indication O
268. ns of the time setup tool Simulator gt 61901 283 N 006 00 585 E so 60 0 m coc 360 0 98 WGS84 Notforuse with position device oS of x ok a D oS a i i I of Hd Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather fle Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages _ Pressure mm k y Temperature gi i I A Wind vectors E mj I M Precipitation 16 s J i m TT il Te 210 3 6 9121518210 3 6 9121518210 3 6 91215 Wed 11 02 Thu 12 02 Fri 13 02 Figure 127 Weather gt Weather Time Series tab routes comparison 9301584 10 Page 129 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 7 7 Inspect Ship Position The Inspect Ship Position function allows assessing a specified position of your ship on the route in terms of weather conditions To assess a ship position you need the time of weather forecast to be the same as the time at which the vessel will reach the specified position route schedule e aa asses the ship position on the route do the following l 2 Display a route in the chart view Download weather data for the region covering the route see chapter 6 6 Weather Forecast Download Make sure that the time period of the weather forecast covers the time scheduled for navigating along the route Set the own ship parameters in the Ship Response dialog To open the dialog in the Weather gt Weather Pr
269. ntents of a received AIS message packet as defined in ITU R M 1371 and as received on the VHF Data Link VDL using the six bit field type The structure provides for the transfer of long binary messages by using multiple sentences Data messages should be transmitted in as few sentences as possible When a data message can be accommodated in a sentence then it shall not be split VDM x x s on X NEOR KIF C eee X Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message to 9 Sequential message identifier 0 to 9 ee P Encapsulated ITU R M 1371 radio message en Number of fill bits 0 to 5 gt VDO AIS VHF data link own vessel report Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of an AIS unit s broadcast message packet as defined in ITU R M 1371 and as sent out by the AIS unit over the VHF data link VDL using the six bit field type The sentence uses the same structure as the VDM sentence formatter VDO x x s x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt C a X Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message to 9 FC ee pe ee E ao O O 6 oo Number of fill bits 0 to 5 en Page 226 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt VDR Set and drift Standard IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 2007 The direction towards which a current flows set and speed drift of a current S VDR x x T x x M x x N
270. ny number of interim waypoints The ECDIS can instruct a properly connected autopilot to steer along the path of a Route Page 250 of 259 Scale See Zoom Scroll To move different parts of a long list into view using the arrow buttons or scroll bar Also scroll is often used as a synonym for pan Selected Target Target selected manually or automatically for the display of detailed alphanumeric data information and text in a separate user dialogue area The target 1s represented by a selected target symbol SENC See System Electronic Navigational Chart Set The cumulative effect of wind and current on the direction of a ship Slack Water Slack The state of a tidal current when its speed is hear zero especially the moment when a current changes direction and its speed is zero Sleeping AIS Target AIS target indicating the presence of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location The target is represented by a sleeping target symbol indicating the vessel s orientation No additional information is presented until the AIS target is activated SOG See Speed Over Ground Sonar SOund Navigation And Ranging The usage of ultrasonic pulses to detect submersed objects by their reflection Sounder also known as Fish Finder or Echo Sounder A Sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect the distance to the sea floor calculating the time interval between signal transmission and the detected re
271. o Close Button Time and Date Positioning System Indicator Sensor Information and Status Panel Current Chart Indicator Qwn Vessel Symbol Functional Buttons Menu Depth Elevation Mouse Pointer Mouse Pointer Units Indicator Coordimates 9301584 10 Page 11 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 3 Indicators Panel Source Scale Navigation Mode Navigation Info Radar Display ARPA Targets Voyage Alanis ECDIS indicator indicator Indicator Indicator Display Indicator Indicator Indicator Close Button Normal se Best sc Navig Base Flaw info Periodic l Radar AIS Warnings jj Alarm Kurs lost Scale Status Data Display Periodic Date AlS Targets Dangers and Warnings Alarm Conditions Indicator Type Indicator Indieater Display Indicator Cautions Indicator indicator Indicator Position Source indicator has the following states The Position Source indicator is situated in the Navigational panel It indicates which position source is being used at the moment for displaying the own ship symbol in the chart view The indicator turns orange if the Primary Position Source fails and the Secondary Position Source is used see chapter 7 2 1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources GPS2 CCRP The currently used position source is a GPS receiver set as the primary or secondary position source in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position Sources tab The indicator displays the name of th
272. o a new position and release it by clicking with the LEFT mouse button once more e Insert waypoint before the first one Move the mouse pointer over the first waypoint The line marker will be linked to it instead of the last waypoint Left click to plot a new point before the first one The new waypoint becomes the first waypoint of the route Move the mouse pointer over the last waypoint wait for the line marker to link the last waypoint and the pointer and resume adding waypoints from the last one e Insert waypoint between two existing waypoints In order to insert a waypoint between two existing waypoints move the mouse pointer over the leg between them a special symbol will appear H Left click in the new position a new waypoint will be created the waypoint is attached to the pointer Choose the waypoint position and left click to plot the waypoint 9301584 10 Page 85 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Delete waypoint To delete a waypoint move the mouse pointer over it The line marker will m NPZ disappear and a special symbol will be displayed Right click on the waypoint to delete it Panning and zooming in or out While you are in the Edit mode any left click plots a new point To pan the chart view move the mouse pointer to the window border in the direction you want to move the chart view When the pointer changes to an arrow gt left click and the chart view will move To zoom t
273. o switch to the export import mode Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update en Clearing line Mariners Note Event Figure 61 Chart gt Mariner Objects tab export import mode 2 Create the list of objects to export add mariner objects from the objects list to the Selected Objects list Use the selection buttons Add Object adds a selected object to the Selected Objects list m Add All Objects adds all mariner objects to the Selected Objects list EJ Remove Object removes a selected object from the Selected Objects list EJ Remove All Objects removes all objects from the Selected Objects list sanenmaanas Select Visible adds mariner objects that are currently displayed in the chart view to the Selected Objects list all previously added objects are removed from the Selected Objects list PICUL LAS INPOC Objects list Select Last Imported adds last imported mariner objects to the Selected 3 Press the Export button The Export mariner objects dialog will open 4 In the Export mariner objects dialog indicate the folder where the file will be saved change the file name is necessary default file name is mariner objects dat and press the Export button Objects file will be saved in the specified folder 5 To return to the editor press the Editor button Page 80 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software si To i
274. o turn the display of weather parameters on off To do so open the Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab and press buttons with the names of parameters you want to display Weather r Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Figure 115 Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab weather parameters buttons 3 The data are displayed using symbols that are described in the legend for every meteorological parameter To open the legend of a parameter select it in the Meteo Parameters table and press the Legend button Page 120 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 4 To select the type of symbols to be used for the display of a specified weather parameter in the Meteo Parameters table tick checkboxes corresponding to the symbol types for the parameter the Area Cont Symb or Text field e Area tinting of areas l Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Marm Area Time Series Packages es IE gt gt i step frtour Weather Legend nd knots Aaj E5230 Label with wind speed and direction in ton of spdidir ish eee ea ee es H E 8 2 amp w km si i is H 5 0 1 D S oa a 9 5 Total waves Legend gt gt aia Figure 116 Display of the wind strength using the Area type symbols e Cont isolines 5 08 027
275. oaded and opened in the route edit mode Start Route Route Export Af ex Voyage Planning Finder Import ere From Port Edit Save As Show gt eg ALGER ARZEW ALG ER Algeria oss cn j Print Route Check Route Parameters WPT cP Schedule Dangers Cautions Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m w aT RAD NM XTD NM SPD k RL DIST NM BWW Name 36 46 730 N 003 04 252 E 0 0 027 18 0 Y 0 6 i 122 3 ALGER Algeria 36 46 409 N 003 04 887 E 0 0 189 18 0 V 0 3 7 091 9 3 36 46 399 N 003 05 256 E 0 054 0 216 180 Y 27 1829 026 0 36 48 893 N 003 06 775 E 0 0 108 18 0 Y 23 i 293 6 36 49 802 N 003 04 181 E 0 0 162 18 0 V 2 8 9 9mi 296 1 Figure 70 Route gt Route Planning tab route edit mode In the route edit mode the following operations with the route are available Edit route plan changes the WPT table see chapter 6 4 4 Route Plan Add control points add entries to the CP table see chapter 6 4 5 Adding Critical Points Edit route schedule change the Schedule table see chapter 6 4 6 Editing Route Schedule Save changes to save all changes introduced to the route press the Save button Once the route has been saved the ECDIS switches the route edit mode off and the standard Route gt Route Planning panel opens Save route under a different name to
276. oard National Marine Electronics Association NMEA This organization has determined a standard 0183 to which all data transmission to and from marine peripherals must conform The NMEA issues standards for interfacing marine electronics devices Pronounced nee ma Not to be confused with NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association Computers directly connected to NMEA producing devices GPS heading sensor etc receive raw NMEA data This data conforms to the NMEA 0183 3 01 specification See also NMEA 0183 and NMEA 2000 NMEA See National Marine Electronics Association NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183 defines the electrical interface and data protocol for communications between marine instrumentation Many times referred to as NMEA in the context of marine instrumentation communications 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software NMEA 2000 This standard contains the requirements for a serial data communications network to inter connect marine electronic equipment on ships It is multi master and self configuring and there 1s no central network controller Equipment designed to this standard will have the ability to share data including commands and status with other compatible equipment over a single channel source http www nmea org pub 2000 NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA is a federal agency focused on the conditions of the oceans and the atmosphere N
277. on Select a media in the list to see additional information and installation instructions in the Instructions pane Install Media Available Media Media name UKHO BASE MEDIA 1 of 1 dated 20 NOV 2007 Media contents Overview General and Coastal Media location H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8b M01X01 Media name UKHO BASE MEDIA 2 dated 06 JUNE 2007 Media contents Test Base Cell Install Media location H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c BASE MEDIA M02X02 Media name UKHO Week 37_07 UPDATE MEDIA 1 of 1 dated 13 SEPT 2007 Media contents Test ENC Updating Media location H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8c UPDATE MEDIA M01X01 Media name UKHO Week 48_07 UPDATE MEDIA 1 of 1 dated 29 NOV 2007 Media contents Test ENC Updating Media location H S 63 8 Data Exchange Media Test 8d UPDATE MEDIA M01X01 Instructions This Media contains Base Exchange Sets which are not imported to the system Exchange set ID Base Exchange Set 1 Overview Cells Issue date of exchange set on media 2007 11 20 Issue date of exchange set which already installed Not installed Find Media Install Media Close Figure 23 Install Media window a i 4P NOTE To be able to convert a media to the CM93v3 format permits for the media must be installed in the system 4 To convert a media to the CM93v3 format select it in the media list and press the Install Media button A CM93v3 database
278. on indicate the file name and folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog and press the Save button To print the graph out press the Print button the graph will be automatically saved to a j pq file and opened with your default image processing program Print the graph out using the printing functionality of the program Page 126 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Bro create time series for a route do the following l Open the Weather gt Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Route option The list of all available routes will appear in the Select Route pane below Select one of the routes in the Select Route pane Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters To select a parameter tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name To unselect a weather parameter clear the checkbox After the parameters have been checked the graphs of the parameters development in time along the route will be built in the graph pane A point on a parameter graph shows the value of the parameter at a specified time for the point on the route where the own ship is supposed to be at that time The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis vertical axes are different for each weather parameter and represent the parameters magnitude When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane the tool tip is displayed with the exact
279. on display ARPA oia a ER 172 ECHO sondei seei ei EEE Seaside 165 9301584 10 radar imace overlay Ssheccve dec coc cactesesdctceceacslwrascbicaes 175 D Ol dle agastavecudantussucasaas E pueebeasaucosatotasersenace sae 172 MAVIGALONAl pane l osssusoripie deat Pete a E dole Bees 149 navigational tools chek POINTS menei AE A AERO a 196 ERB aoe See electronic range and bearing line l0 DOOK re eat See log book Man Over DOA aina E 197 navi Calculator ccceeeeeeeeee See navigation calculator POSM ON Eeid EE 198 new version of database ices scitacciatevensaseesahaes via sedosaun eaeeeins 38 Objects INFOMATION cc cceceeeceeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 50 overview weather download eeceeeesesssetteeeeeeeeeeeeees 107 own ship POS AC EEEE E E A E E E A 133 POO a eta ease eres erat 133 secondary past Wacker iiuen eE EE 134 SIONE HNC S ro a e E E N 134 MC CLOR aaea a a toes 134 penodi dale TGC ALOT nren a austen 14 play Dat Kearen nee a er e a a a 201 plot waypoints in chart view eccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 POSTNION COMMECHON norii iai EE 145 position GISCrEMANCICS scoici n 147 POSON T E e ee ene eran ieee enn rr rerrner eerie emer ee 198 positi source INGICALOT ssec 12 position sources dead TECKOMING rises R 137 mantal POS UO Us X gi caclet iat ected eda tsi eta hears 137 POSITION correction ccceeeesesseesssssssssessessstsesseseeeeteees 145 position GISCTEPANCICS aociisoc varies seep scene eR
280. on in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab Select weather parameters to display in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab Page 213 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Weather forecast time does not Change the time move the time slider in match with the time set in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab weather time setup tool Anti collision tool is absent No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed in the Anti collision program module Data gt Licensing tab press the License list button and select Software Modules in the Databases drop down list The ANTICOLL Anticollision license should be installed If not apply the license and restart ECDIS Page 214 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software APPENDIX B List of Input Sentences The table below lists sentences which can be received and processed by the ECDIS and devices producing the sentences Position device GLL VTG RMC GGA ZDA DTM GLL VTG ZDA DTM SGD GNS VHW THS HDT HDM HDG ROT THS ROT VDR gt ABK UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement Standard NMEA 0183 v 3 2000 not recommended for new designs The ABK sentence is generated when a transaction initiated by reception of an ABM ACA AIR or BBM sentence is terminated This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested ABM bro
281. on point Remove Remove All Figure 141 Navi gt Manual Observation tab Observation Points list Bro enter observation results do the following 1 The observation data are entered to the Observation table To enter the data for a reference point select the point in the Reference points list Now you can start entering distance and bearing data to the Observation table Owshp Dead LOP GMe x past track and vector _ Position fix Observation Distance NM Bearing Fixtime Tool Underwater awash rock Rp No 2 Position N42 42 658 E052 33 446 Change Discrepa crepancy Result N00 00 000 000 00 000 Accept Position Figure 142 Navi gt LOP Position fix tab entering observation data 2 To enter the distance to the observed point double click in the Distance field to make the field editable and enter the distance value The measurement units are set in the Config gt Units and Time tab 3 To enter the bearing from the own ship to the point double click in the Bearing field to make it editable and enter the bearing value 4 To set the observation time double click in the Fix time field the current time will be displayed Correct the time value so that it corresponded to the observation time if necessary a i SF NOTE If the time is not set position calculation is impossible The Calculate button remains dimmed 9301584 10 Page 139 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application
282. on the chart The screen will be panned to the object position and the scale changed to the original scale of the source chart A small arrow will point to the object that has been modified To clear the highlight press either the Clear Highlight button right above the updates list or the Clear Highlight button in the upper right corner of the Data panel QP NOTE When a new database issue is installed updates that have been included in the new issue of the database as regular objects will be automatically removed from the hard disk 9301584 10 Page 69 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 2 4 Manual Updating The Manual Updating function allows you to apply updates to the chart data manually The main source for updates is Notice to Mariners The updates included in the Notices to Mariners are normally included in the set of automatic updates However information about changes in the charts is published in the periods between the issues of Notices to Mariners through various channels The channels include NAVTEX NAVAREA and other navigational communications and warnings Using the Manual Updating you can apply the changes reported by official navigational organizations but not issued as Notices to Mariners yet Using the Manual Updates function you can add new objects to the chart data edit and delete existing objects Manual updates are registered in a separate chart layer that is not connected with existin
283. ondary heading source Kurs 5951 WGS 84 Data not assessed Figure 153 Heading sources tab 4 In case the device you want to set as a primary heading source is already set so there is no need to change anything If this device is not set as a primary position source select it in the Secondary heading source drop down list of available devices and press the Swap heading sources button The name of the primary heading source is displayed in the heading line of the Navigational panel FaN 1 NOTE The DR cannot be set as a primary heading source this way It is used as a heading source only in case there is no any data available from external devices 5 To set a device as a secondary heading source just select it in the Secondary heading source drop down list in the Heading sources tab In case the primary heading source fails an alarm is triggered see chapter 7 6 Alarms and the secondary heading source becomes the primary source automatically Page 148 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 4 Navigational Data Display and Sources 7 4 1 Navigational Panel Information about the own ship position current speed and course and other navigational data coming from external devices registered in the Config gt Input Output tab is displayed in the Navigational panel in the upper right corner of the screen In the Navigational panel the following data are displayed SHIP The local ship
284. ool You can find the time setup tool both in the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab and in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Date 15 02 2009 00 00 Sunday Go Today es M 4 gt p DA Step i Hour Meteo Parameter Area Cont Symb Text Measurement Units Pressure Pressure in hectoPascals Pj Temperature nt ivi Temperature in Celsius Wind vectors Speed in knots Precipitation Precipitation in millimeters Swell waves Height in meters Total waves Height in meters Legend lt lt Figure 121 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab time tool To set the time enter the date and time value to the Date field and press the Go button or simply move the slider of the time scale Date and time in the Date field change as the slider is being moved To change the date and time to the current date and time value press the Today button ai i SF NOTE Weather forecast data received from the weather server are compiled for a certain period of time the period is indicated in the data request You can view the data for any time within this period 7 To see the weather forecast in dynamics use the animation buttons i jump to the beginning of the forecast a one step back set the step value in the Step drop down list start stop the forecast animation the f
285. orecast is played from the current position to the end one step forward jump to the end of the forecast a i SF NOTE Weather parameters readings were made with a certain time step The time step for the forecast animation is set in the Step drop down list The set step may differ from the actual parameter readings step In this case weather data are interpolated in time To distinguish the interpolated time step from the original time step the font type of interpolated parameters will become italic in the Meteo Parameters window 9301584 10 Page 123 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 7 2 Display of Cyclones Tropical cyclones data that are distributed by the World Meteorological Organization are included as a separate weather product to the weather data distributed by Jeppesen A IMPORTANT When navigating near a tropical cyclone update cyclone data regularly and study the information very carefully ai B SF NOTE The dangerous zone is a 50 mile zone near the current cyclone position and the zones around the forecasted cyclone positions 100 mile zone for a 24 hour forecast 150 mile zone for a 48 hour forecast 200 mile zone for a 72 hour forecast and 250 mile zone for a 96 and more hour forecast B display cyclones data do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab and press the Cyclones button or set the Tropical cyclone checkbox in the Weath
286. oud speaker symbol is removed and the entry is moved to the last position in the list the next alarm entry is highlighted 3 To acknowledge other alarms use UP and DOWN arrow keys to select alarm entries and ENTER or SPACE keys to confirm the acknowledgement After it has been acknowledged the alarm is deactivated and its entry is deleted from the alarms list if the alarm condition is not true anymore otherwise the alarm is deactivated but its entry remains in the alarms list In some cases alarms are deactivated automatically after the alarm condition disappeared Besides alarms there is another category of situations demanding attention on the part of the user warnings Warnings are notices to the user which do not require acknowledgement and do not trigger the alarm buzzer In case there are active warnings the Warnings indicator becomes yellow Click on the indicator to open the Alarms and Warnings panel In the Warnings tab there is a list of all currently active warnings Warnings are removed from the list as soon as the warning condition 1s cleared In the Alarms and Warnings panel you can also acknowledge all AIS ARPA and Sonar targets To acknowledge AIS targets press the Ack all AIS button to acknowledge all ARPA and Sonar targets press the Ack all Targets button Page 156 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 6 2 Antigrounding Alarm The ECDIS allows to set an anti grounding guard zone
287. oute Change Settings tab legs are considered orthodromies if the checkbox is not set route legs are considered loxodromes Page 88 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 4 4 Route Plan The route plan can be viewed only in the route edit mode Bro view the plan of a specified route do the following 1 Open the Route gt Route Planning tab 2 Select a route in the routes list and press the Edit button The route edit mode will be switched on 3 In the route edit mode the route plan WPT table control points CP table and the route schedule Schedule table are available Start Route GoTo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Roitename FromPon B e a gt ALGER ARZEW ALGER Algeria ARZEW Algeria ii Print Route eck Route Parameters WPT CP Schedule Total distance 183 779 NM Total duration 10h 12m 36 46 730 N 003 04 252 E 0 054 0 027 18 0 v 0 183 8 2min ALGER Algeria 36 46 409 N 003 04 887 E 0 054 0 189 18 0 0 3 183 2 1min 36 46 399 N 003 05 256 E 0 054 0 216 18 0 ya 182 9 9min 36 48 893 N 003 06 775 E 0 054 0 108 18 0 ye 180 2 8min WP LAT LON RAD NM XTD NM SPD k RL a DTA NM Name 2 3 4 5 7 IV 7 7 36 49 802 N 003 04 181 E 0 054 0 162 18 0 2 8 177 9 9min Figure 73 Route gt Route Planning tab route edit mode Waypoints t
288. own ship course up This option is only available if the Navigation mode is on Figure 162 Navi gt Navigation Data c To orient the chart to the own ship heading up press the Heading Up tab Chart button The chart will be oriented to the own ship heading up This option Orientation section is only available if the Navigation mode is on d To orient the chart to the route up press the Route Up button The chart will be oriented to the route which is being monitored This option is only available is the Route Monitoring mode is on 7 5 5 True and Relative Motion There are two motion modes for the chart display true motion mode and relative motion mode In the true motion mode the own ship symbol moves across the chart view and the chart stays in the same position As soon as the own ship reaches a predefined distance from the chart view center the chart is redrawn and the ship symbol is moved to the initial position in the chart view In the relative motion mode the own ship symbol stays in the same position in the chart view and the chart moves as the own ship position changes ai i SF NOTE Both true motion and relative motion modes work only together with the navigation mode on si To turn on and setup the true motion mode do the following 1 In the Navi gt Navigation Data tab press the True button in the Ship motion mode section In the true motion mode the chart is stationary and the own shi symbol is mo
289. own ship presentation in the chart view include the own ship symbol the prediction vector and the passed track Ground stabilized vector Water stabilized vector One minute mark Own ship position received fram the secondary positioning device Own ship symbol current position Primary past track Secondary past track Time label on the past track Figure 132 Own ship position and vectors and passed track presentation Bro configure the display of the own ship in the chart view do the following 1 Set the primary and secondary position sources in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab the Position Source section see chapter 7 2 Position Sources 2 Open the Navi gt Own Ship past track and vector tab In this tab you can configure the display of the own ship passed track and prediction vectors Navigation Own ship Dead LOP Data past track and vector Reckoning Position Fix Own ship vector Past track Secondary past track e Ground stabilized vector e Water stabilized vector lv Past track Reset Past track me Vector length 6 min Display every 30 sec n Display every 30 sec Prediction vector e Time labels Sight lines Figure 133 Config gt System tab Own Ship tab 3 To start drawing the own ship passed track the track based on positioning data from the primary position source tick the Past track checkbox in the Past track section The passed track will be displayed in the chart view Th
290. pen Gi Setup Connection X Communication type Data center Timeout s Attachment size Kb ie parameters Remove after download Figure 109 Setup Connection window 2 Set the communication type select the communication type in the Communication type drop down list You can choose between HTTP Internet and e mail connection To comply with different ship or office communication set ups you are offered four e mail connection types SMTP POP3 Inbox via MAPI Folder Send Recv and Manually via Attachment See detailed description of all communication connections further on in the manual 3 Set the data center set the center on the continent where you are now to have data transferred faster Select the data center in the Data center drop down list So far only the Europe data center is available please check for other available centers later 4 Set the timeout time period during which the answer from weather data server is awaited relevant for HTTP SMTP POP3 and Inbox via MAPI connections Enter the timeout value in seconds to the Timeout field Page 114 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 Set the attachment size in the Attachment size field The attachment size is the maximum size of a data pack that can be attached to an e mail sent to you relevant for all e mail connections In case the set attachment size is less than the size of the ordered weather package the package is
291. plication version The version number for the ECDIS application software is shown on the Info gt System Info tab The version number is displayed next to the System ID in this case 5 0 82 323999 This information is informatively only since the ECDIS application software is embedded in the system software see section 3 2 1 Page 24 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software Echo Sounder Radar System Astro Tides Streams Navi Synchronization lt y fl x Diagram Calculator Monitor System ID Danelec eT 00011 Version 5 0 82 323999 Copy User usr file Databases status Licenses status Disks status Talkers status System Software Version Database Integrity Signature No checks were performed yet Perform check on startup Refresh Info i ee 3 2 3 Verification of System Software Version The system software on the ECDIS must be kept updated Information about available versions release status and compliance status can be found on the website http www danelec marine com ecdis software info aspx To verify the System Software Version do the following l Go to the Info gt System Info gt System Software Version tab see section 3 2 1 A 3 Notice the System model and version On a PC with Internet access browse to the URL http www danelec marine com ecdis software info aspx When prompted for username bru
292. position in the chart can be shared by numerous objects of different types All objects that share the position where you right clicked will be listed in the Object Info panel If you need information about a particular object right click on the object The object will be listed in the Object Info panel together with all other objects under the pointer Object fle x Information Chart Legend Information at position 36 49 489 N 000 12 977 E DataSet Z12AJ930 Professional Attributes Navigational system of marks DataSet filename Z12AJ930 C00 Caution area Chart Title DEL CABO DE GATA AL CABO DE LAS 44 Coverage HUERTAS Y DEL CABO MILONIA AL 44 Depth area CABO IVI 44 Horizontal datum shift parameters DataSet source type TEPE 44 Sea area named water area Source identification 46 code Source producing Instituto Hidrografico de la Marina IHM agency ee men mm fee Be or 8 Figure 29 Object Info panel The Object Info panel consists of two panes the pane displaying the list of objects and the pane displaying the attributes of a specified object To display attributes of an object select it in the objects list The first object in the objects list is the dataset the electronic chart that was under the mouse pointer when the Object Info panel was opened Double click on the object in the list to highlight it on the chart To clear highlighting press the Clear highlight L button If an obj
293. pplication Software LOGBOOK Opens the Log Book functional panel Opens the Navi functional panel holding the following tabs Navigation Data Own ship past track and vector Dead Reckoning and LOP Position fix Opens the Data functional panel holding the following tabs Chart Catalogue Add Remove Database Licensing Dynamic Licensing Databases Auto Updating and Import S57 Opens the Config functional panel holding the following tabs System Alarm Setup AIS Targets Anti Collision Tool Own ship Input Output and Units and Time Opens the Weather functional panel holding the following tabs Weather Presentation Easy Mode Weather Presentation Weather Alarm Area Weather Time Series and Weather Packages 2 6 Functional Panels Functional panels hold tools used to setup and execute main ECDIS functions To open a functional panel use a button from the Functional Buttons Menu To close a panel outpress its button in the Functional Buttons Menu or use the Close Panel button Each panel may contain several tabs and sub tabs Each panel also has a set of buttons with general functions Clear Highlight removes highlighting from the chart view Highlighting made by any function can be removed from the chart view using the general Clear Highlight button Restore Down restores the functional panel to its default size To resize a panel move the mouse pointer to the upper border of the panel and when it changes
294. press the Metrics button Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update detest save cancel MESES Z14A3310 i Se Obstruction m i l Added 2 10 2009 0 i 53 05 805 N 005 22 432 E Extrasc 00 00 000 N e Obstruction Figure 55 Chart gt Manual Update tab adding new object editing metrics Page 72 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 9 Plotting the object in the chart view e To plot a node left click in the chart view To add a next node left click in the chart view once more e To add a node between two nodes move the pointer to the position on the line connecting the two nodes where you want to add a node left click in this position the new node will be created and it will be attached to the pointer so that it will move with it to plot the node left click in the chart view once more e To move anode left click on it to capture it with the mouse pointer move the pointer with the node to a new position and left click e To delete a node right click on it To delete a point object while still in the add object mode just cancel the operation press the Cancel button 10 After the object attributes and metrics have been set press the Save button to save the object or the Cancel button to cancel the operation 11 The Updated by dialog will open Enter your name to the field it is the name of the author of the update Press the
295. press the True button 3 To switch to the Relative wind direction display press the Relative button Anemometer Anemometer 000 000 180 Relative Figure 156 Anemometer true wind Figure 157 Anemometer relative wind STW 10kn HDG 0 relative wind speed 5kn relative wind direction 225 Page 150 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 To drag the Anemometer window to a different position move the pointer to the title bar press the left mouse button and drag the window to a new position holding the button 5 To close the window press the Close button in the upper right corner of the window 4P NOTE The true wind is wind relative to a fixed point on the earth The relative or apparent wind is the speed and true direction from which the wind appears to blow with reference to a moving point 7 5 Navigational Chart Settings 7 5 1 Navigation Mode When in the navigation mode the ECDIS monitors the own ship position and moves the chart so that the own ship stayed in the chart view The navigation mode status is indicated with the Navigation mode indicator see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel when the navigation mode is on the indicator is green when the navigation mode is off the indicator is orange f turn the navigation mode on off do the following 1 To turn the navigation mode on left click on the Navigation mode indicator The indicator sho
296. r 4 1 2Displaying Database 2 Open the Data gt Chart Catalogue tab In the databases drop down list select the ChartletsBase database Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop down list 3 Double click on the AA5C1AB2 dataset the dataset contains the black adjust symbol The chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset The black adjust symbol will be displayed in the chart view 4 Ifyou can t see the black adjust symbol make sure the following arrangements are made the display type is set to All other the display type indicator is All other ETY b the chart presentation type is set to S52 the S52 option is selected in the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Presentation section c the chart view scale is larger than 1 16 500 1 a adjust the contrast and brightness control do the following 1 First set contrast to a maximum brightness to a minimum Look at the black adjust symbol 2 Then ifthe centre square is not visible turn up the brightness until it just appears 3 Or if the centre square is clearly visible with contrast at maximum brightness at minimum turn the contrast down until the inner square disappears then turn contrast back up until the inner square is just visible again 4 If the above adjustment is not successful select a more appropriate chart display palette and repeat this procedure 5 The black level is then corre
297. r Collision RISk aruon EEE EENE EEE 187 8 5 6 Example and Recommendations for the Anti collision Display Use cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 9 OTHERNAVIGA MONALTOOL S unii an A esets iao 195 9 1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeey 195 9 1 1 PRERE nee meer ae tenn te Reh te nea en eee eT Se Pr ne ee ee ee ee ee eer 195 9 1 2 CTC ChE OU S inet antes oe astie T ee Madan ies ahs Se alee a naiae orto 196 9 1 3 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer assis co xtcn ss ocnesnsn sania ors scan ca aatapasadaceat ean on sane 197 92 Man Overboard and Position Fixe sivcnsessesaserdecceasieescades ede suiva aaa saaoniecieas beescadeinde aavoauasaaoiuecioaeeeaeaaas 197 9 2 1 Manr OV ero Gard Funcional y cesser en AN EN ANN 197 9 2 2 POSsiti Oni Fix F nctionalit Vesien a a see etek 198 e E E es OO AE E A A E AE E E N E EE E EAE E O EE 198 9 3 1 Viewne Los Book ETIES ae contiene Ta N AAN ee ram 198 9 3 2 oe Book Play 3 a ke ghia asec et uE R lan ee T 201 2A Navr Calcular eaa e sate nesatiasenenattevicruaas yates a a 202 APPENDIX A DroublesMOO Cine ceins E EA EE E Aa 205 APPENDIX B Eisto Input SMCS NC CS coors ne E ENE E EE AE 215 APPENDIX C Listor OWDOL SENENGE Siasea i n TE E EN EE E ETE ONE 231 APPENDIX D Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOP6 239 G1 Fascha ig Sa ene a en ro ner ER Eo PY ere RPE oP SPP eed NT REP a ne EE ae em 245 PR
298. r Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software The observed position is situated near the intersection of LOPs with the angle between them closer to 90 the accuracy ellipse major axis is aligned with LOPs intersecting at a smaller angle Figure 237 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs with the angle closer to 90 9301584 10 Page 243 of 259 Glossary Activated AIS target A target activated for the display of additional graphically presented information for example heading line velocity vector etc Aids to Navigation Usually pertains to buoys ranges and the like AIS See Automatic Identification System ARPA See Automatic Radar Plotting Aid Automatic Identification System AIS AIS provides a means of broadcasting digitally navigation information including ship position speed heading dimension name destinatio n ROT aids to navigation base station reports and more Created by the IMO and sanctioned by the U S Coast Guard for ship monitoring and collision avoidance It is used by ship traffic monitoring and control locations throughout the world to improve situational awareness and help prevent collisions at sea Automatic Radar Plotting Aid ARPA The functionality entailing the detection of moving targets and calculating their speed and course Used to automatically detect radar targets and output to other devices ARPA is a collision avoidance system Autopilot A self steering device which a
299. r Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there E Weather Subscription X Global ECMWF 150 km Global 1 5 degree model from ECMWF Sub center Storm WC alid till 31 ma 2009 available for scheduled download orldwide ubscription limited to area 64800 00 sq degrees Forecasted period up to 10 dayswith 6h step Products Pressure Pressure at sea level Temperature Temperature at sea level Wind Wind strength and direction Precipitation Accumulated total precipitation for the previous period in th Total Waves Primary waves period height and direction CQwall Wlawec Cusall uwraves heicht nerind and diractian Request Subscription Figure 93 Weather Subscription window In case you have changed weather data subscription terms you will have to renew weather subscription e a renew weather subscription do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Subscription option from the drop down menu 2 The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there 3 Press the Request Subscription button Your further actions on sending receiving subscription depend on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters for details see the downloading subscription procedure above ai D 4P NOTE Weather subscription is renewed automatically every time you receive a new weather package
300. r example if your starboard direction finder bearing RMSE is 0 5 degrees set the BrgRMS value to 0 5 BrgCorrection Starboard direction finder bearing constant correction in degrees If the starboard direction finder dial is constantly turned anticlockwise the correction should be positive if the dial is turned clockwise the correction should be negative For example if your starboard direction finder dial is turned to 0 3 degrees anticlockwise set the BrgCorrection value to 0 3 4 After the file has been edited save it press the Save button and close it press the Close button 7 2 4 Position Correction In case the currently used positioning device provides coordinates in a coordinates system different from the chart coordinates system a position correction is required For example the positioning device provides coordinates in the S 42 coordinates system for plotting the own ship on a paper chart and the electronic chart 1s made in the WGS 84 coordinates systems usually all digital charts are made in the WGS 84 system in this case the own ship position in the chart view is incorrect A coordinates correction should be provided to the ECDIS to display the own ship symbol in the correct position The coordinates system of the positioning device is set in the device itself the electronic chart coordinates system is displayed in the navigational panel see chapter 7 7 2 Route Monitoring Panel If the positio
301. r is not displayed The width of the passage corridor depends on the course over the ground COG and heading HDG of the ship If the COG and HDG values are the same the width of the own ship passage corridor equals the maximum beam of the ship set in the Config gt Own Ship tab If the COG and the HDG values are different the width of the own ship passage corridor is more than the maximum beam The width of the Figure 135 Own ship own ship passage corridor is shown on the chart near the end of the passage corridor passage corridor symbol Beam 10m Length 40m ai Bi SF NOTE If any of the prediction vectors is not displayed make sure that the required data SOG COG STW HDG ROT are coming to the ECDIS from input devices Page 134 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Aa display the own ship symbol using the secondary position source do the following Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab and check the Show secondary checkbox in the Position Source section Bro display the own ship symbol as a scaled area symbol do the following 1 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab and check the True scale ship image checkbox 2 The own ship point symbol will turn into an area symbol at large scales The scale at which the transformation happens depends on overall dimensions of the own ship set in the Config gt Own Ship gt Own ship setup tab 7 2 Position Sources 7 2 1 Primary
302. r the ice border or in the ice covered waters Ice concentration and ice coverage data are displayed in the chart view in accordance with the standards of the WMO Bro display ice situation data do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab and tick the Ice concentration checkbox in the Meteo Parameters table The data will be eee in the chart view CE a Se Ee vore TE Alarm _Kurslost oie O Veen F N WO E 7 7 7 7 2 7 7 AA yaa 1 11000000 x x18 SHIP 18 07 37 21 2009 10 09 No official data available Refer to paper chart GPS CCRP 1 Non standard chart presentation is used 2 E 4 s RM Silent mode r f A S e OTN m a f 005 25 220 W S a i re F808 10 0 in a a Me coe 000 0 i SN iia axe 000 0 Kus Xt VS aida STW 8 0kn DPT 5 0m belowtrans Wind 12 1kn 197 0 Disp ROT 0 0 W 19 WGS 84 Not for use with position device 1_ r i Ve ep gt gt PN K DA VARs i gt A a ole x Weather Packages Weather Time Series Weather Presentation Easy Mode Weather Weather Presentation Alarm Area Date os 10 2009 12 002 Thu Go Today 777 ee A P gt DI Step 3 Hours X Meteo Parameters Weather Legend t Ice concentration Ice concentration value label pa Mammam x po a s lce concentrati t f V Tropical cyclone v v 10 30
303. rameters values of those weather parameters are wo 20 displayed that are checked in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab in the Meteo Parameters table You can also see presentation of such weather parameters as total sea swell and wind as special symbols The parameters are represented as colored arrows in three corners of the panel Roll Temperature 7 6 C Pitch 0 8 5 8s The dark blue arrow in the upper left corner represents the Heave 0 2m 1 2s direction and period of total sea Figure 130 Inspect Ship The blue arrow in the lower left corner represents the Position panel direction and the period of the swell The red arrow in the upper right corner represents the direction and velocity of the wind To read values of the weather parameters represented by the arrows see corresponding weather legends in the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab to open a weather legend relating to a weather parameter select the weather parameter in the Meteo Parameters table and the corresponding weather legend will be displayed in the Weather Legend part of the tab 3 The polar diagram gives you information about the speed and course of the vessel in a specified position on the route as well as about the speed and course values combinations that can cause a risk of a sudden increase in roll amplitude The diagram consists of the following elements ai i Concentric circular axes representing vessel spee
304. raphic elements of the anti collision display The following graphic elements are used for the anti collision display e Own Ship the symbol of the own ship displayed in the position received from the primary positioning device e Target the symbol of a target displayed in the position received from the target detection device e Own Ship Speed Vector Target Speed Vector vector predicting the position of the own ship target where the own ship target will be in a specified time proceeding at the current course and velocity For your convenience the own ship speed vector is highlighted with a thick line and a green circle e CPA limit Closest Point of Approach a circle with a radius equal to the minimum CPA set in the Config gt System gt Anti collision tab If the own ship symbol enters the circle the distance between the own ship and the target is less than the set CPA limit Page 184 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software e Collision danger sector CDS if the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the collision danger sector the own ship is going to pass the target at a distance less than the set CPA limit e Collision danger line CDL if the end of the own ship speed vector lies on the collision danger line the own ship and the target are on a collision course 8 5 3 Configuration of the Anti collision Display The Anti collision display is configured in the Conf
305. rcs or as rhumb lines The calculation mode is set in the Check points panel see chapter 9 1 2 Check Points 9 2 Man Overboard and Position Fix 9 2 1 Man Overboard Functionality In case someone or something has fallen over board you can use the Man Overboard functionality Using the functionality you can plot a symbol in the accident position and monitor it as the own ship moves si To use the MOB functionality do the following 1 Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator and press the MOB wide button The Man Overboard mode is turned on a Man Overboard symbol is plotted in the current own ship position and the position coordinates are recorded as a MOB entry in the logbook As the own ship sails the range and bearing to the MOB position are constantly updated and shown on the range and bearing line Figure 221 MOB 2 The MOB symbol is being updated until the MOB button is pressed To stop symbol updating the MOB position and delete the symbol outpress the MOB button 9301584 10 Page 197 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 9 2 2 Position Fix Functionality The position fix functionality allows plotting a symbol in the own ship current position to mark this position ot To use the Position Fix functionality do the following 1 Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator and press the Fix positio
306. rd Zone Set Parameters Figure 167 Config gt Alarm Setup tab Buzzer On Off checkbox 9301584 10 Page 155 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 6 1 Alarms and Warnings Panel When an alarm is activated a message describing the alarm is displayed in the Alarm Conditions indicator and the Alarms indicator starts flashing red to attract attention If the message is not displayed completely because SHIP 14 56 Pop Rok ava of the lack of space move the mouse pointer over it to open a tool tip with the complete message text Figure 168 Alarms and Alarm Conditions indicators with the alarm message tooltip Alarm Safety pan is not avail The alarm is added to the alarms list To open the alarms list and view all alarms activated at the moment click on the Alarm indicator 8 Alarms 1 Warnings sg Unknown Datum 18 59 43 a ARPA lost 18 59 14 ag Lag lost 18 58 06 a Echo Sounder lost 18 58 06 a Wind lost 18 58 06 Ackall AIS Ackall Targets Figure 169 Alarms and Cautions panel Alarms tab Activated alarm triggers sound indication and Alarms indicator flashing To stop the sound indication and indicator flashing the alarm should be acknowledged There are several ways to acknowledge an alarm si To acknowledge an alarm do the following 1 Click on the alarm message in the Alarms panel 2 Open the alarms list click on the Alarms indicator and left click on the alarm entry The l
307. re a specified date Bro view the list of licenses expiring before a specified date do the following 1 Open the Data gt Licensing tab 2 Inthe Databases drop down list select a database 3 Press the Display expired licenses before date button to open the pane where you can view the licenses expiring before a specified date 4 In the date field enter the licenses expiry limit date and press the Display expired licenses before date button In the list below all licenses that expire before the specified date will be displayed Add Remove as Dynamic Database mat Licensing Updating 57 System ID Databases C MAP RU INTERNAL 20001 Professionale 0 sae License manually aes Display expired licenses before date Add Licenses from file Figure 14 Data gt Licensing tab Display expired licenses before date 9301584 10 Page 35 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 2 4 Viewing Licenses List You can view the list of all licenses applied to a specified database To do so e aa view the list of installed licenses do the following l 2 3 Open the Data gt Licensing panel In the Databases drop down list select a database Press the Licenses list button The licenses list will be displayed in the licenses list pane The information displayed for each license includes expiry date coverage and license code 4 2 5 Dynamic Licensing Jeppesen Marine provides its clients with a new service
308. re sailing in set the daylight saving time if necessary as well as select the format of the date display Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Sten Setup As tanata Tool Ship Output and Time Time Zone Properties GMT 03 00 Kuwait Riyadh Daylight Bias 60 min Apply Depth Elevation Size Units Distance Units i Date Format Nautical Miles dd mm yyyy Feet Statute Miles Km per hour Fathoms Kilometres Statute miles per hour Metres Yards Feet Figure 2 Config gt Units and Time tab Bro set measurement units do the following l1 To set the measurement unit for depths elevations and dimensions select the unit in the Depth Elevation Size Units list The setting is applied immediately The selected unit is indicated by the Depth Elevation Unit Indicator in the lower left corner of the chart view 2 To set the measurement unit for distances select the unit in the Distance Units list The setting is applied immediately 3 To set the measurement unit for speed select the unit in the Speed Units list The setting is applied immediately t set time parameters do the following 1 To set the time zone select the time zone from the time zones drop down list For the setting to take effect press the Apply button 2 To set the daylight saving enter the value in minutes to the Daylight Bias field For the setting to take effect press the Apply button 3 To set the time format select the format in the
309. red dangerous and are not included in the anti collision display The allowable input range is from the specified CPA limit to 20 0 nautical miles 6 Set the TCPA limit enter a value to the TCPA limit field If the target will reach the CPA to the own ship in time equal or less than the TCPA limit the target 1s relevant for the collision risk evaluation The allowable input range is 1 0 to 30 0 minutes For the anti collision display functionality to start processing the target the TCPA between the own ship and the target should be less than the specified TCPA limit and the distance between the target and the own ship should be less than the specified maximum CPA 7 Set the critical TCPA enter a value to the TCPA Critical field The critical TCPA is the minimum time needed for the own ship to carry out a maneuver for safe passing the target The TCPA critical is only used if the distance between the target and the own ship is less than the minimum CPA distance The allowable input range is 1 0 to the specified TCPA limit value 8 To turn on the display of speed vectors of all activated targets check the Target Vectors checkbox 9 To activate all selections or any changes which are made after the initial selection press the Apply Parameters button 9301584 10 Page 185 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 5 4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits The indication of the approach of
310. ress the Print button The chart image displayed in the Print preview window will be printed out Print preview X Print PrinterSetup Renew Preview Not to be used for navigation v Figure 45 Print preview window Page 64 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 VOYAGE PREPARATION 6 1 Charts Catalogue The Chart Catalogue allows you to obtain detailed information about charts belonging to a specified database Using the Chart Catalogue function you can find any chart of a specified database you are particularly interested in and view it in the chart view You can also display boundaries of charts grouped into scale levels in the chart view 6 1 1 Searching Charts Catalogue In the Charts Catalogue you can obtain information about any particular chart and view the chart on the screen si To search the chart catalogue do the following 1 Open the Data gt Chart Catalogue tab Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic es Auto Import lex Catalogue Database Licensing Updating S57 Professional Chart Boundaries UKHO test and sample datas Overview 40 000 000 5000000 4 Jeppesen Italia S r l World 5 000000 1500000 Hydrographic Department Ri General 1500000 500000 Ministerio de Defensa Nacio1 Coastal 500 000 150000 Ministry of Transport Maritirr Coastal Approach 150000 50000 Hellenic Navy Hydrographic S Approach 50000 15000
311. rious illumination conditions The palettes are Figure 158 Day palette Figure 159 Dusk palette Figure 160 Night palette si To set one of the palettes do the following 1 Open the Config gt System tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units Syst Sansa aoe Tool Ship Output and Time Display Palettes Monitor brightness control fe Day Default value 128 Dusk n 128 Night Set Restore default value Service mode Figure 161 Config gt System tab Display palettes 2 Inthe Display palettes section select one of the palettes The selected palette will be applied to the chart view immediately SF NOTE To switch between the night and the day palettes press the F12 key Page 152 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 5 4 Chart Orientation The chart view can be oriented to the true North up to the own ship course up or to the route up B To set the chart view orientation do the following 1 Open the Navi gt Navigation Data tab Chart Orientation 2 Inthe Chart Orientation section select one of the four orientation options ict a To orient the chart to the North up press the North Up button The chart sos CouseUp will be oriented to the North up This option is available in all modes Heading Up a Route Up b To orient the chart to the own ship course up press the Course Up button The chart will be oriented to the
312. rms changes or the service termination The changes will be registered on the server 2 To activate the changes send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or in case of a local network from the server computer see chapters 6 2 1 Automatic Updating and 6 2 2 Semi automatic Updating In response the server sends updates for already licensed datasets if there are any and the dynamic licensing initialization answer where the action to be performed terms changes or service termination will be indicated 9301584 10 Page 37 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 4 3 Installing New Version of the Database Cartographic data are likely to change often These changes are applied to databases in the form of updates Later the updates are included in the database as regular data and a new version of the database is issued These issues are made regularly and if you are a Jeppesen Marine customer you are provided with the new versions of the CM 93 3 chart database as soon as it is issued B install a new version of the database do the following 1 Open the Data gt Databases tab 2 Connect the data storage device with the new version of the database to the system and press the Find databases button Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system All detected databases are listed in the Available databases pane name and issue number Currently registered databases are
313. s Orange the values are received from the secondary positioning device Red the external device providing the data fails and no data is coming to the ECDIS 7 4 2 Navigational Data Sources The same navigational data can come from various external devices In ECDIS Position Heading Data only one source of data can be used Raa E P POS GPS2 To view navigational data sources do the following SOG GPS2 a 1 Left click on the Position Source indicator in the Navigational panel The DG Kurs S l SW Lag Position Heading and Data sources panel will open DPT 2 Open the Data sources tab The list with navigational data in the left column aai Ka and their sources in the right is displayed in the tab Figure 155 Position and Data sources panel Data sources tab 3 To close the panel press the Close button in the upper right corner of the panel 7 4 3 Wind Sensor Data If a wind sensor is connected to the system and registered in it a Wind entry is displayed in the Navigational panel In the entry data coming from the wind sensor are displayed Wind direction can also be presented in a graphical form si To view the graphical representation of the wind direction do the following 1 Press the Disp button in the Wind entry of the Navigational panel The Anemometer window will open In the window you can see the true and relative wind direction display 2 To switch to the true wind direction display
314. s activation distances The AIS targets activation range is displayed as a blue circle and the AIS targets danger range is displayed as a red circle If the display of AIS targets is off the AIS zones are not displayed either Figure 183 AIS zones display 10 To turn on the display of AIS targets past track check the Past track checkbox The past track is updated with the interval set in the Past track interval drop down list 9301584 10 Page 169 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Depending on the presence of the AIS target signal and the distance between the target and the own ship there are the following types of AIS targets Symbol name and description AIS Targets Distance to the Own Ship Display Sleeping target A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of an object equipped with an AIS in a certain location Active target A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional graphically presented information including a vector speed and course over ground the heading and ROT or direction of turn indicator if available to display actual initiated course changes Dangerous target A symbol representing an AIS target activated or not which has approached the own ship closer than the specified distance to the dangerous approach Lost target A symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS targ
315. s are displayed as active This value should be more than the distance to dangerous approach If the Distance to Activation field is inactive and you want to change the value check the Automatic Activation checkbox Press the Set button for the changes to take effect 7 Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA TCPA to Dangerous section if the actual CPA or TCPA of the own ship and an AIS target are less than the set values the target is displayed as dangerous Press the Set button for the changes to take effect 8 Set the AIS targets visibility range the distance from the own ship at which AIS targets become visible When targets cross the distance limit they are displayed on the chart Turn the function on check the checkbox enter the value to the edit field and press the Set button When the checkbox is checked the visibility range is displayed in the chart view as a circle with a blue dashed boundary see Figure 183 If you want all AIS targets to be displayed irrespective of their distance from the own ship turn the AIS targets visibility range function off altogether clear the checkbox the AIS targets visibility range section will become grayed and all AIS targets in contact with the own ship will become visible 9 Turn the display of AIS zones on or off check or clear options in the AIS zones display section AIS zones are displayed as circles with the center in the own ship position and with radiuses corresponding to AIS target
316. s in the specified file only for route files you will be prompted to select one of the routes in the Select Route Name dialog List of Routes BWW Testing CALAIS France BORDEAUX DOVER HARBOR United Kingdom CALAIS France 2 Output Route Name BWW Testing Reverse Route OK Cancel Figure 77 Route gt Export Import tab select the route to import In the Select Route Name dialog you can also change the output route name by entering a new name to the Output Route Name field and reverse the output route by checking the Reverse Route checkbox After the route has been selected and other parameters set press the OK button to import the route 6 4 8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a Device It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference This chapter explains how to exports routes to and import them from external devices Bt export a route to a device do the following 1 Open the Route gt Export Import tab and switch to the From To Device tab Start Route Route Export Voyage Planning Soto Finder Import From To File From To Device Device Name GPS2 M Device Type NMEA 0183 T Route to Export New Route Import i Export Progress Status Ready Cancel Figure 78 Route gt Export Import tab From To Device tab 2 In the Device Name drop down list select the name of the device to which the route will be exported The list contains devices reg
317. s than the safety contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour indication of isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges overhead wires etc and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation traffic routing systems scale range orientation and display mode units of depth and height In addition to the objects set a specified set of chart presentation parameters is used Custom Base Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or removed from the base set of parameters The last chart presentation parameters settings are saved in the system Standard The Standard Display is on screen when the chart 1s first displayed by the ECDIS The Standard Display is recalled by single operator action press the Data Display Type indicator Ex in the Indicators panel The Standard display consists of Display Base drying line indication of fixed and floating aids to navigation boundaries of fairways channels etc visual and radar conspicuous features prohibited and restricted areas chart scale boundaries indication of cautionary notes In addition to the objects set a specified set of chart presentation parameters 1s used Custom Standard Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or removed from the standard set of parameters The last chart presentation param
318. s the Get size button The updates size will be displayed in the Processing field After updates have been received they are automatically registered in the database To see which datasets have been updated and to access the list of updates use the Updating Log and Review Updates functions 9301584 10 Page 67 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 2 2 Semi automatic Updating Semi automatic updating is an alternative to the fully automatic updating When using the Semi Auto Updating function you should create and save a request for updates send it to the updates server by email receive the updates by e mail as well and apply them to the database manually SF NOTE The updating service is a fully automatic service provided by Jeppesen Marine and replies are sent within 10 minutes unless there is some delay over your email provider Bt To download chart updates by e mail and to register them manually do the following l Open the Data gt Auto Updating tab and press the SemiAuto Updating button The SemiAuto Updating pane will open Add Remove i lina Afex Updating 57 Databases Professionalt Auto Updating NEW VOLUME E SemiAuto Updating Getupdatesfromdirectoy updates from Getupdatesfromdirectoy OO Saveorder OOO O order Updating Log Review Updates P Maximum return email size PSs du Aa z Figure 50 Data gt Auto Updating tab Semi Auto Updating function 2 Select
319. s the Yes S sss itsuhicnsstical button to save the received route press the No button To save the route enter the route name to the Enter new route name dialog and press Le the OK button If you press the Cancel button the route will be saved under a default name Figure 79 Enter new route name After the route has been saved you can edit it in the Route gt Route Planning panel Page 94 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 5 Tides and Tidal Streams Data Tides and currents information is included in the database as a supplementary section The data include locations of tidal and current stations tidal ranges and other information You can turn on the display of tides and currents in the chart view and view information about each tide in the Info gt Tides Info tab and about each current in the Info gt Streams Info tab 6 5 1 Tides Information Information about tides is available in the Info gt Tides Info panel Bo access tides information do the following l Open the Info gt Tides Info panel and set the Switch Tides On Off checkbox to turn on the display of E tides information in the chart view Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal stream stations yi lt appear on the map the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1 5 000 000 and the list of all tidal stations 1s displayed in the pane below the Switch Tides On Off checkbox
320. sGeckeuntucs hebeart cee Newites 49 calculate creat circle POINTS 2 4 2 heute dated 203 cell permits 21 6 8 by EPEE ER OEE S One eee et Pe EN 40 NGO EE EAI PES NENA IEE EATE ENTE TET E 41 Un asal so ciate worse aa a icaa Geeta 4 chart boundaries by scale level cccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeees 66 CM ARE GISDIAV protes cri EERE 152 chart display setup chart presentation models nnnnnenenneneneeeeererrrerrrreeen 55 display YPE scent ets a a cuca ey 56 Cart legend arice a Weeds 50 chart navigational settings Hent secto en a CP 154 eNA COME Mato oree E a a 153 chart presentation models cniccsririenrn iane EA A 53 chart scale and quick access buttons panel 000000000000000 16 char SCale Pane boserien AS 16 chart updating MULTUM ATIC ih E E E E E E 67 NO shea a da ese E dao ase ae alae 69 A A tesa haltech a ha tele alert e aretad 70 Mariner Objects ccccceeesesssseeseeeees See mariner objects DEVIC Wi ifacscstaesasn ou sebatia E E doa eu vue ibestteayass 69 SEM AULO MIAO a aa a Slated 68 charts catalogue 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software chart boundaries by scale level cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 66 SSAC IM Sate ci eh ecu eS nee teh a aa 65 charts display SOWON enra te oo mai ta Bea aoc Pe aa eo ee et 52 DOOKMAIKS nannan ti vei weet eae esti 49 Chart FSO Ci Cx senses sseceeesceweerascan ees neways eacae ae sceue teste scene ts 50 depth areds SETUP s2
321. sa E ee eeeeacea tenes 85 manual updates add ODJECE a eee 71 edit chatt objeciS eonenn a E cesta netvesee 13 edit updates sirana e Meee EA 74 KONEN N erer E OE rp manually update chart objects cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7D mariner objects CHC AUS EE T E E E T TE T A E ETT 78 editere eaa o 79 EXPO ar ee ae A Ee A A ee 80 MOPOT Renee one tena e mn ER Rrra cow neta Ore tee ESN 81 DVIS AE E E E E TA E A A E aS Measurement units Setpro eee aest cree Sector eat 19 NIO Bs Hes Sirsdh tess r eae 197 monitor brightness Setup ccssssseseessesessssssssssessssseeees 20 MOVE ATOUNC Chart VIC Woniscods a 47 MAY Dondi coria tn el le oe 13 navigation calculator convert COOLCIN ALCS oso A saison d Oh cates elt 204 direct geodetic problem ceccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 areale Cit Cle ponis norrena ELR 203 inverse geodetic probleM cccceeeeeeessessssseeeees 202 NAVISALON INOUE scves se ech ese cede eee 151 Navigation mode INICACOL eeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 navigational chart settings pest scale modos aia E E 151 Chart Onen tat OM seire E 153 display palete S inp eee eee ere ee 152 IVA Vd ALI OM MOJE ringue k 151 true and relative MOTION cc ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 153 Navigational data sources 0 0 ccecceeeeseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 150 navigational information tools ATu O E vse becageaeaazagsebeasant 166 anti collision display See anti collisi
322. sectors option d To highlight all light sectors in the area press the Static button e To highlight only sectors visible from the own ship press the Ship button Display of lights sectors covering the own ship position only works in the navigation mode When the navigation mode is off this function is automatically switched to the static mode 7 6 Alarms The ECDIS provides the system of alarms which announces by audible and visual means conditions requiring attention When an alarm is activated it is displayed in the Alarms panel and the Alarm button starts flashing red A IMPORTANT No use of the Silent Mode is allowed while the own ship is underway as it may affect safety of navigation The audible indication can be enabled or disabled only for all alarm conditions there is a general alarm buzzer control in the Config gt Alarm Setup tab To allow using audible alarm indication for all alarm conditions check the Buzzer On Off checkbox To switch to the Silent Mode clear the checkbox and confirm the operation The silent mode is indicated in the chart view the Silent mode notice is displayed in the upper left corner of the chart view Alarm Setup as Targets Buzzer On Off Antigrounding alarm Alarms Anti Collision Own Input Units Beinsa Tool Ship Output andTime Time of prediction 1 min Dangers safety distance 0 100 NM 90 Hm V Guard Zone sector V Danger objects inside Gua
323. sentation the quality symbol looks as an ellipse with a u letter inside if the data are not assessed or as a triangle with the zone of confidence mark inside for other zones For the C Map presentation zones of confidence are indicated with a dashed line To find out the category of the zone of confidence open the Object Info panel with a right click in the chart view and select the Quality of Data object in the objects list Check the Category of zone of confidence in data attribute in the Attributes pane to the right Picture symbol Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the Pictorial representation attribute Low accuracy ind Turns on display of special symbols indicating that the position of an object is defined with low accuracy the QUAPOS attribute of the object is set to any other value than surveyed The property is relevant for the following objects point land areas point and area wrecks and point and area obstructions Text descr symbol Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating objects with the Textual description attribute the description may contain for example an extraction from a pilot book NOAA Navaids Turns on the display of symbols of Aids to Navigation created using the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration USA standards rather than the INT1 standard The setting only works for the C Map presentation Overscale id Applies a
324. ses list Add Licenses from file Figure 12 Data gt Licensing tab Add Licenses manually 4 In the areas list select the Zone or the Areas for which the license is generated Your selection will be displayed in the Data Set or Area Name field above the list 5 Enter manually or copy and paste the 16 digit code to the License String field 6 Please ensure that you have an eToken connected to the system The eToken must be the one used during installation 7 Press the Add License button The process will take a few seconds Upon completion a message License has been added successfully will appear Press OK SF NOTE Note that when you enter information in the Data Set or Area Name field you will only find Zones and Areas Cells are also listed as areas in this list All Cells Areas and Additional Areas within a Zone have a unique number For example the cell 94B in Zone I will be listed as Zone 1 Area 91 4 2 2 Installing Licenses from File If you have a license file you can install all licenses stored in the file using the Add Licenses from File function B install licenses from file do the following 1 Connect the removable data storage device with license file to the system License files should be stored in a folder named Licenses for the ECDIS to be able to detect them 2 Open the Data gt Licensing tab In the Databases drop down list select the database for which you are applying the license 4 Press th
325. sing the time interval between radio signals to determine the position of the receiver LORAN was popular with marine navigation prior to the existence of GPS The current version of LORAN in use is LORAN C LORAN fails under different conditions than GPS arguably making it a complementary radio navigation system Page 248 of 259 Lost Target Tracked radar or reported A S target for which the system is no longer receiving valid position data The target is represented by a lost target symbol Low Water The minimum height reached by a falling tide Lower High Water LHW The lowest of the high waters of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Moon and the Sun Lower Low Water LLW The lowest of the low waters or single low water of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Moon and Sun Magnetic Variation The degree to which the magnetic north differs from the true north This data is available from the Current Chart indicator Man Overboard MOB Mark that can be placed on a digital chart to indicate emergency location The ECDIS will track that location to aid in returning the boat to MOB coordinates Maritime Mobile Service Identity MMSI MMSI Numbers are a series of nine digits transmitted over a DSC radio path in order to uniquely identify ship stations ship earth stations coast stations coast earth stations and group calls These identities can be use
326. sition symbol on the chart at the own ship current position The Fix on ship position button plots a fix position symbol on the chart at the own ship current position The ERBL tool button launches the electronic range and bearing measurement tool ERBL The Check Points tool button opens the Check Points tool 2 5 Functional Buttons Menu The functional buttons menu is made up of eight buttons each opening a functional panel To open the buttons menu move the mouse pointer over the Menu indicator in the lower right corner of the chart view The menu stays open while the mouse pointer is hovering over the menu When the mouse pointer is out of the menu it is collapsed automatically To open a panel press the corresponding button Only one functional panel can be opened at a time To switch to another panel press the button opening the other panel To close an opened panel outpress its button Opens the Chart functional panel holding the following tabs Chart Settings Chart Presentation Mariner Objects and Manual Update Opens the Route functional panel holding the following tabs Start Voyage Route Planning Go To Route Finder and Export Import Opens the Info functional panel holding the following tabs Echo Sounder Diagram AIS Monitor Targets Radar Image System Info Astro Info Tides Info Streams Info Navi Calculator and Synchronization Monitor Page 16 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS A
327. sseeseeees 203 guard ZOMG cara a N e a a sodas 157 hendina SOUPC CS scien A ts eae AE 147 history of manual chart updates cc ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeees 70 HOKEY S eiir een alaranc a sca ease aeenieeans 18 ICG SUA ON GIS PI AY ersero T eT 125 import manner objects lOmdlCw ii025 ie a ees 81 POULS HOM device misaine n e a 94 aport S57 10 CMIZ VI osion riai 43 MACAO TS oerien e ae 12 ATS tafo ets display enirere a 14 alar S E E Castes E RA EET eek ett 15 ARPA Tar OCS display eioan aa aa teas 14 dangers and cautions indicator cccceeeeeeeeeeeessseeees 14 dai display Cy Penei E 13 AT SA TNO SPE EE E E E E E E EA 13 pavigation MOG Gieres aA 13 PETIOGIC CAG ei thcce st aeons sett sae oa cel acne tenets 14 POSION SOUE ai lt td eect aio hes a andes a 12 radar displa yii oe an AA 14 scale Stas oro E E ET 12 BOUECE SCA lEn vaadeviutrenn saison eran Gvaadientediuastovaeensens 12 OY iaia a e a oe eg ee te ces 15 WAM OS etir lates Gest imaiadiala cute nama deaes eam maea gees tices 15 TMNCICALONS pane larare sacs tig case tet eae slear tiene lnk 12 inspect SHIP POS OM crease tes cee chdeseace Mies erences 130 maldia base e Savemosdelacinommeneia 30 interface chart scale and quick access buttons panel 00 16 functional buttons MENU seses ea 16 funcional panels sasous R 17 HOKEY S ercssreceus cartes e OES 18 INCICALOLS pane besa a EEE 12 MAN WACO Woei E E 11 Inverse geodeti problenm sessirnir aeaii 202 Page
328. ssetiavectsatiaceands 111 BC UD E EAE ESE AT See weather download setup SUDSCEDU ON kussa i E talc gacts hades Setedaenct eatal geet 100 WEALNGE PACKAGES errearen eea EN 113 GY MATIC NC CTS INS inienn na isie eia EATE 36 CUI Ue a alate A E E E AT 36 terms ehani e apa e n a a 37 NENG HAR S aa ucts tebe acceatiiutsatieoetann aa cabiaut 37 Easy Mode weather download esensi 103 BS EEN IOs ete ce ete oc ei oe eee eel 104 CE MO SOUMCEL esra enis eA AE SE A aR 165 edi manual updat niipea eee EE 74 Edit Mariner ODjJeCi Seisa an E 79 electronic range and bearing from own ship to mouse POINteL eects 197 electronic range and bearing line between any IWO POINTS sonenn code deities L 195 fix range and bearing at own ship 000000000000000000000 196 from own ship to other points ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeesseens 195 ENC S 57 data TEP OEE OC MO IV REA 43 TS Call UP Oates reinari ie meee R 45 lare media SUP POLL ci 0ssees nose ww sss Pi cret ew etes nordic 42 S 63 PFOUSC OM aion onnea oiris See S 63 protection expired before licenses lS 3ic2 25 2 esses caes ni 35 export mariner objects to Tle 604 nti are nea a enti nes 80 TOWLE LOCC V1 CC ig sien erences E E 93 TOWLE LO Sari sss otc E E E TTE AEE EEN 92 TEX DOS TUON co8 ets ceseytes acs crees cup tbeaaeye ee sacca tise snacc sete saee eet ea 198 functional DULONS MENU susien aai a a a 16 COLO Way poise a A 163 great circle points calculate ccccccceesessseess
329. t Depth settings tab In the tab there is a list of depth elements Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors CMRR v Two shades Shallow pattern 52 Safety contour 5 0 52 simplified Safety depth 2 0 Shallow contour 2 0 Deep contour 10 0 W Safe contour only W Safe depths Isolated dangers SpE ae Plain depth contour Set Parameters Figure 42 Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Depth settings tab Page 60 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 To display an element in the chart view set the checkbox to the left from the element name to hide the element from the chart view clear the checkbox There are the following chart elements in the Depth settings tab Two shades Only two depth areas are to be highlighted in the chart view safe and unsafe water areas The safe water area is separated from the unsafe water area with the safety contour set in the Contours section of the Chart gt Chart Presentation tab Shallow pattern The depth are from the coast line to the safety contour is filled with a dedicated pattern Safe contour only Turns off the display of all depth contours except for the safety contour Used for hiding depth contours especially in areas with complex relief to reduce cluttering Safe depths Turns on t
330. t Print 12 Sometimes user remarks can be too long and not fit in the log book Remark field To view the remark tip when pointing the mouse pointer at the remark check the Remark Hints checkbox 13 To delete a log book page press the Cleanup button the Cleanup logbook window will open In the Cleanup logbook window select pages you want to delete press the Delete selected button and confirm the operation The selected log book pages will be deleted ai B SF NOTE The page currently displayed in the Log Book panel cannot be deleted as well as pages for the day before and the day after 14 To export a log book page to a file display the page in the Log Book panel and press the Export button the Export day log book dialog will open In the dialog select the folder where to save the log book page and press the OK button In the selected folder a Logbook folder is created and the log book page is saved to this folder The log book page is saved as two files the name of the files is the date of the page and extensions are lbk and 1bt xl Select folder to export log book to subfolders with log book name will be automatically created NEW VOLUME E Refresh devices tree 0K Figure 224 Export day log book dialog Page 200 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software 15 To import a log book page press the Import button The Import day log book dialog will open In the dia
331. t a correct DB in the Data gt Auto Updating gt Auto Updating tab Allow writing to the removable device Plug unplug eToken and try to expand records after that Install license Set the All other display type In the Chart gt Manual Update tab expand the chart name record and double click on the created object Zoom the chart view in or out depending on the situation Press the Find databases button Change the name of the folder and press the Find databases button once more Plug unplug eToken and try import S57 data after that 9301584 10 Trouble S57 data One or more arguments are invalid message 1s displayed during import of S57 data Information about a chart isn t displayed in the Chart Catalogue list Chart view doesn t respond to the left button mouse click Chart scale and position are changing at random The Route Up button in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab is grayed and can t be pressed User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software No license is installed for the Check if the license is installed in the ImportS57 program module Data gt Licensing tab press the License list button and select Software Modules in the Databases drop down list The CM933CMP and V3CATMGR ImportS57 licenses should be installed If not apply the licenses No source data are selected Select a source S57 exchange set and try importing data again Data storage d
332. tabase cece ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 data synchronization EOR aaa A 28 MONOT en ea ee cance ceadautineen tome geadaes cooks 26 COE 8 rss Sais ns ea ee Seen sores sere umse meatier 29 dedd Te KONN O s cash Gotha Airaid ace eed ile 137 Ce Un aa MSp E E teaat en tte 159 depth areas SSWIN as i2 2te celeste otc toes ne se ee etc ancl 59 ECD COMUOUE sso ge cs helen Leh ll pat bl deta Ll 59 SAIC y depi asa tysetasi vas orstydecaasidssasadtyssensdeccouesecvecuoseaveue 59 shallow Contour innnan a a eee ce meite 59 depth SEUNG S anaie eena E O E eaaa 60 direct ecodetie proble M asrar a 203 diskspace control sanien E ee aes 22 display OL ALS War CUS Geun kaniin RE 168 display of light SECtOrS aerisit niinn eesee 154 display Dales orni E A AA 152 CISDIAW TY Pe ernn S 56 AEE E ET E E E A A 56 DAS e EA A E A E N O E AEE E 56 CSO eas esee a a a a eE 57 standardon E A R 56 display weather configure GISPlay 4 45 412A a a 120 CV CLOSS eens aeeai EE E E 124 TCC S11 WAU O00 ai cd rs satiate eat an Sota etceteet el eee ateuts 125 PUTIN OI ol asd aa ah sa i tea eh a Sa sa 119 displaying database canes innean eo eee eee 32 download weather Coastal download ccccecceesesesesseseeseeeeessessssssssssseeas 107 CUSLOMT download represie E E RA 109 Easy Mod download tiie toe ise at 103 VEE VIC W COW OA eels a T 107 Page 255 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software scheduled download sesssiiscelcacticneeda
333. targets to the own ship to the specified time and distance limits is used to warn the user that the distance and time between the own ship and the target have reached a critical value The anti collision functionality requires setting the following limits e The distance maximum CPA and time TCPA limit between the own ship and a target at which the target is activated in the anti collision display and the user is recommended to start evaluating calculating and carrying out collision avoidance actions in case the collision risk exists e The critical distance minimum CPA distance or radius of CPA limit circle and time TCPA critical at which the user has the minimum time to take decisions on collision avoidance actions The above described parameters are set in the Config gt Anti Collision Tool tab The table below describes changes in graphic elements of the anti collision display brought about by changes in time and distance between the own ship and targets The user set minimum and maximum limits of distance and time are compared to the actual CPA and TCPA of the own ship and targets and the distance and time between the own ship and targets Actual CPA and TCPA and time and distance values are displayed in the Info gt AIS tab for AIS targets in the Info gt ARPA targets gt ARPA targets tab for ARPA targets and in the Info gt ARPA targets gt SONAR targets for sonar targets ome emai te Anti collision display on CPAasctu
334. te button The Apply SA Certificate dialog will open 2 Inthe folder tree select the folder where the certificate is stored The certificate file stored in the selected folder will be displayed in the pane to the right Path to SA Certificate 2 ENC Licencing 4 Authentication_Part1 Test 4a mm Test 4b Test 4c Test 4d H Test 4e Test 4f Figure 21 Apply SA Certificate dialog 9301584 10 Page 41 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 Select the certificate file and press the Apply certificate button The certificate will be applied and the message A new SA certificate public key has been installed The certificate is valid to dd mm yyyy or unless the SA issues a new one for security reasons will appear In case there was an SA certificate previously installed the new certificate will override the previous one 4 You can restore the previous SA certificate To do so press the Restore certificate button and confirm the operation The previous certificate will be restored 5 To view information about the currently installed SA certificate press the Installed certificate info button The Information about installed certificate window will open The following information on the current SA certificate is available the certificate issuing organization the Issued by field the certificate requesting organization the Issued for field the certificate validity period the Valid from and the
335. te eescasesisceeeec ieee ee 59 depth Se COS 0 sabi aceite beh eee alates arctan eens 60 look ahead window cccccceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeessseseeessaas 51 ODJECS MLOMMAL Olas 23 5534 2d 3d sess se cas d e bee aein iee 50 MIMS CDa cues eae eee a a Mear ie ades 64 SCAG ss desk oe Sas a ead oh icles cucian Wad se 47 sero larun oa a E 47 Se Uae ea See chart display setup SUPPleMe ary Cala eenen 58 text SEU GS inc ees coals oases ceased sede coal oaneencmadietiss 61 cheek PON Soieta alse i eatin Sand 196 coastal weather download cccccceeeeesseessseeeeeeeeeeseees 107 Color differentiatlOM eS ici s2 25 0 innein 23 CONV ERUCOOLCIMALCS ahi s sn Betete ttin T A ties 204 coordinate S CONV Cl Uses io ac E E teen esasloar meds 204 COPY iSer pornit tO MG Aretha e a 39 create mariner ODIJECI ss2 5 isncceoaioeewivbevcseseseedecenieadens eeeeeatys 78 CHIC Al OMS ses teserte essen eeeteses e AE 90 custom weather download cccccceeeeeessesseeeseeeeeeeseees 109 cyclones ICIS PLAY ceuen 124 danger objects guard ZOMNC c0cccceeeeeeseeeeeseeseeesseeeeeas 157 dangers and cautions Indicator cccccceeseeeeeessesseseneees 14 data display type indicator ccccceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeesseteeeas 13 data management dalabasedis 0 2 he ened PR T 32 database installation crror enei nE aae 30 ENG S257 dataen T See ENC S 57 data hcensine dala iueiio ue e E oot oad eect 33 new version of da
336. ters Automatic send receive lv Enable break recovery v HTTP proxy type Manual configuratic K HTTP proxy server Proxy server Dravu cariar nart 3 128 z Export settings Import settings OK Cancel Figure 110 Setup Connection window Internet HTTP communication type e Automatic send receive if the parameter is set data requests are sent to the weather server automatically if the parameter is not set data requests are put first to the waiting list in the Weather gt Weather Packages tab and sent to the server on the user command e The HTTP proxy type parameter can be set to the following values Direct connection Use the option if you do not use proxy server to provide connection to the Internet Automatic discovery Use the option if you do not know exact parameters of your proxy server or if you are not sure that your internet connection is provided through a proxy server Set this option and the program will find proxy server automatically Manual configuration Use the option if your internet connection is provided through a proxy server and you know all parameters of the server 9301584 10 Page 115 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software gt E Mail SMTP POP3 Automatic connection type If you set the E Mail SMTP POP3 e mail connection option the ECDIS is acting as an e mail program and is using standard incoming and outgoing data transfer protocols In the Set
337. the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there the object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action Xx Deleted Will be added to the object actions list QP NOTE If you edit a manual update object all changes are done in the Extrascale dataset If you edit a chart object all changes are done in the chart dataset 6 3 Mariner Objects Mariner Objects is a tool developed for the mariners to be able to plot their own notes and marks to the chart Mariner objects are entered to an independent chart layer Thus they do not affect other ECDIS functionality and are used exclusively to display mariner s notes There are seven types of mariner objects available in the ECDIS Mariner objects are the following e Clearing line a line object a straight line drawn through leading marks A ship moving along such line will clear certain dangers or remain in the best channel The line can be drawn though one or two marks There are three categories of clearing lines available Not more than NMT Not less than NLT and Not defined If the category of the clearing line is NMT the bearing from the own ship to the mark should always remain less or equal to the bearing of the clearing line for the ship to clear the danger If the category is NLT the bearing from the own ship should always remain more or equal to the bearing of the clearing line The Not defined category is used if the clearin
338. the own ship position 2 Measure the required distance from the own ship using the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view and right click The range will be fixed around the own ship and will move as the own ship moves To release the ERBL right click in the chart view 4 Turn the ERBL mode off 9 1 2 Check Points The check points functionality allows you setting up to three checkpoints Check points are the points to which the distance and bearing from the own ship are constantly displayed in the chart view The values of the distances and bearings are updated as the ship moves Bt To set a check point do the following 1 Open the Check points panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator to open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel and press Check point 1 True Relative the Check points button Checkpoint2 v True Relative Check point3 v True Relative 2 Choose whether the bearing from the own ship to check points should be true angle between the direction to the north and the direction to the TREE object or relative angle between the ship course and the direction to the object To set the true bearing check the True Relative checkbox to the ae a right from the check point name to set the relative bearing clear the v CursorDIST BRG True Relative checkbox Close Clear All 3 Select the calculation mode for distances in the Calculation Mode drop Figure 219 Check points down list
339. the route in the routes list press the Print button and select the route table to be printed out from the drop down menu The table will be converted to the x doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor the program is installed together with ECDIS Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality File gt Print Charts To view the set of charts covering a selected route select the route in the routes list and press the Charts button Borders of charts covering the route will be displayed in the chart view Synchronize routes To synchronize routes between the local and remote computers after changes have been made to one of available routes save the changes return to the Route gt Route Planning tab switch the route edit mode off in the Synchronize routes with drop down list select computer to synchronize with and press the Synchronize routes with button The synchronization task will be added to the tasks list and executed in its turn for details on the data synchronization see chapter 3 3 2 Routes Synchronization Page 86 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 4 3 Route Edit Mode In the route edit mode you can edit the route plan change route parameters add control points to the route and edit the route schedule To switch to the route edit mode in the Route gt Route Planning tab select a route in the routes list and press the Edit button The route will be l
340. there e Line object move the mouse pointer to the chart view and plot the line nodes using the left mouse button You can perform the following operations with the nodes To add a new node left click in a selected position the node will be plotted in the chart view To move a node left click on the node to capture it move the mouse pointer with the node to a new position and left click to plot the note To delete a node right click on it To insert an intermediate node left click on the line between two nodes the new node is created in the position of the pointer The node is attached to the pointer and you can move tt Move the node to its position and left click to plot it in the chart view To add a node in the beginning or in the end of the line when you plot a line object adding nodes one after another the mouse pointer and the last node are linked with a line marker that indicates the length and position of the next line section To add a node to one of the line edges move the mouse pointer to the edge node the marker line will connect the pointer and the node now you can plot new nodes e Area object to plot an area object plot the object nodes in the chart view Nodes of area objects should be edited in the same way as nodes of line objects 6 To save the new mariner object press the Save button The object will be added to the objects list To cancel the object creation outpress the Edit button
341. thorized use by licenses Licenses allow viewing all charts available for a specified area in the database without licenses you can only view small scale charts Licenses are available for worldwide coverage or any combination of Zones Areas or Cells You have to purchase and install licenses for the coverage you have selected The entire world coverage is divided into 9 Zones Each Zone is divided into several Areas Some Zones are also divided into Cells 4X4 degrees and special areas You may have a license for any combination of Zones Areas and Cells QP NOTE Zones are specified by their numbers from Zone 0 World coverage to Zone 10 Areas are specified by Zones to which they belong and their numbers in the Zones e g Zone 1 Area 3 Cells are regarded as Areas and their numbering continues after the numbering of Areas in a Zone For example the first Cell in the Zone 2 is listed as Zone 2 Area 7 As there are six Areas in that Zone Areas following the Zone 2 Area 6 are actually Cells To obtain a license for the coverage you need for a voyage you should come to your charts supplier with your eToken and after settling purchase formalities you will be provided with the licenses file You can also order licenses by e mail or by phone To do so you will have to provide your System ID number to your chart suppliers A N IMPORTANT The System ID is necessary for issuing licenses It is unique for your system and stored in the e
342. tic North West Passage Buran Channel East River N Y English Channel lv Inshore traffic allowed V Use rivers i Highlight Ay Mark All Clearall Figure 63 Route gt Route Finder tab Disabled Passages tab 2 In order to allow or forbid sailing through all passages use Mark All and Clear All buttons 3 To allow using inshore traffic zones for route calculation check the Inshore traffic allowed checkbox The route can be calculated outside Traffic Separation Schemes but can be shorter 4 To allow using rivers for route calculation check the Use rivers checkbox 5 Ifthe Highlight checkbox is ticked the passage will be marked on chart when selected 6 To scroll the screen to the selected passage press the Go to Position button The passage will also be marked with an arrow symbol 7 Once you have added all your restrictions recalculate the route press the Calculate button This time all added restrictions will be taken into account si To add restrictions to the route calculation by plotting them in the chart view do the following 1 Press the Add restriction button Ada restriction 2 Draw a line or an area that will indicate the restricted zone on the chart To plot a point left click in the chart view to delete a point right click on the point to move a point left click on the point to capture it with the mouse pointer move the point to a new location and left click to release it 3 To save th
343. time and date To display the UTC time left click on the date and time line and hold the mouse button When the button is released the local time is displayed again The offset between the local and the UTC time is set in the Config gt Units and Time tab Position source indicator The position source indicator shows which position source is being currently used to define the own ship position see chapter 7 2 Position SHIP 20 24 12 2009 09 11 Sources If the primary position source is used the indicator is green if the secondary position source is used the indicator is orange In the 36 17 994 N brackets near the device name reference position is indicated CCRP 000 06 569 E conning station POS the positioning device itself soc 10 0 kn coc 315 0 HDG 325 0 Kurs AUTO Own ship coordinates Latitude and longitude of the own ship received from the positioning device The AUTO mark near the ae i STW 8 0kn coordinates indicates that the position is received from an external ppr 5 0m below trans positioning device Wind 12 1kn 162 0 Disp PPETI ROT 0 0 SOG Speed over ground received from the positioning device 5951 WGS 84 COG Course over ground received from the positioning device Data not assessed HDG Heading received from the gyrocompass Near the heading value the name of the device providing heading info is indicated If heading is received from dead reckoning the MAN
344. time in the pointer position In the parameters list the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right of each parameter The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow vertical line Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Build for Pressure Route Wind vectors Select Route v Precipitation Route Swell waves BREST BALTIMORE Total waves DOVER HARBOR Un ARENDAL MARSTR Dew point temperature Total cloud cover 2l ki Alarm zone 1518210 3 6 91215182103 69 9 121518210 369 Export Print Ship response roll Tue 10 02 Wed 11 02 Thu 12 02 Fri 13 02 Figure 125 Weather gt Weather Time Series tab time series for a route To export weather data for the route to a csv file press the Export button indicate the name of the file and the folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog and press the Save button To print the graph press the Print button the graph will be automatically saved to a jpg file and opened with your default image processing program Print the graph out using the printing functionality of the program 9301584 10 Page 127 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 7 5 Weather Alarm Area In the Weather gt Weather Alarm Area tab you can set alarm thresholds for weather forecast parameters and the ECDIS will disp
345. time to the current time The current time is displayed for the time zone selected in the Time Zone and Daylight bias drop down list Time format for the date and time display in the date and time field is set using the drop down list in the upper left corner of the tab Time format for the display of astronomical information is set using the drop down list in the lower left corner of the tab 5 Astronomical information is displayed in the three tabs inside the Info gt Astro Info tab the Sun Moon and Planets tabs e Sun Provides information about the current position and height of the sun above the horizon as well as about the sunrise twilight and sunset for the input date The information is presented in three tabs Standard Transit Civil Twilight and Nautical Twilight e Moon Provides information about the current position and height of the moon above the horizon also includes information on the rising decline and the following phases of the moon for the input date The information is presented in two tabs Moon Transit and Moon Phase e Planets Provides information about planets selected in the planets drop down list including the current position the height above the horizon the rising and the decline for the input date for the specified planet 9301584 10 Page 99 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 6 6 Weather Forecast Download A IMPORTANT Weather downloading procedure can t
346. tion press the Request Subscription button in the lower left corner of the Weather Subscription window Mi Weather Subscription x The subscription was not found Press the Request Subscription button to obtain it Request Subscription Figure 92 Weather Subscription window The subscription was not found message 3 Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters see chapter 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup you will have to perform the following actions e Automatic communication Internet HTTP E mail SMTP POP3 E mail MAPI 1 Press the Request Subscription button 2 In case the Automatic send receive parameter is set in the connection setup subscription request will be sent and subscription received and downloaded automatically 3 If the Automatic send receive parameter is not set the subscription request is saved in the Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode To send the request press the Send Receive button in the Weather Packages tab Data will be received and downloaded automatically e Semi automatic communication E mail Folder Send Recv 1 Press the Request Subscription button the subscription request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder Request files have a _ predefined name format request xxxxx xml 2 Send the subscription file as an attachment to an e mail to datacenterx c map no 3 You will receive the subscription file in th
347. tion Software A IMPORTANT If a package is deleted without saving data to a GRIB or XML file the Save button you will not be able to recover the data To get the deleted weather data you will have to request and receive them once more e Deleting a weather request or a weather data package The Delete button deletes specified weather packages from the packages list To delete a package select it in the packages list and press the Delete button e Saving data to a GRIB or XML file The Save button allows saving a specified weather data package to your computer The data package is saved as a GRIB or an XML file weather forecast data are saved to a GRIB file and cyclones data are saved to an XML file To open the files use the Open GRIB and Open Cyclones buttons on the Weather Presentation Easy Mode panel see chapter 6 7 Weather Forecast Display 6 6 7 Weather Download Setup Weather forecast data are transferred over the Internet In the ECDIS you can use either HTTP Internet or e mail connection The ECDIS uses the HTTP Internet connection by default and has to be connected to the Internet to be able to transfer data The connection with the weather server has to be configured through the Setup Connection function f configure connection do the following l Open the Weather gt Weather Packages tab press the Settings button and select the Setup Connection option from the drop down menu The Setup Connection dialog will o
348. tion data e Current state current state of synchronization process on the computer Disabled able to synchronize with remote computers the synchronization tool is disabled the local computer can only receive synchronization data from other local network computers and carry out synchronization but it cannot send synchronization data to other computers Stopped no synchronization is available the synchronization tool is stopped no synchronization data can be received or sent Ready to start synchronization the local computer is ready to receive synchronization data and carry out synchronization Waiting for remote synchronization to finish synchronization is in progress between remote computers of the local network and the local computer is waiting its turn for synchronization Synchronization in progress synchronization is running on the computer Page 26 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e Synchronization log in the Synchronization log tab messages informing about the synchronization process are displayed To clear the log window press the Clear log button e Tasks to perform the list of synchronization tasks the local computer is to perform if the task is performed successfully the task entry 1s removed from the Tasks to perform table and the message informing about the task completion appears in the Synchronization log if the task failed it is moved to the
349. tionality efficiently it is important to set the Safety Contour correctly in the chart presentation see chapter 5 6 5 Depth Settings The anti grounding function uses the safety contour value and the own ship draft to determine anti grounding warnings Page 158 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 6 3 Alarms The ECDIS provides the possibility to set a depth alarm activated when the depth below keel is more or less of the set depth limit as well as alarms when a detected AIS ARPA or Sonar target 1s lost Bt To set the depth alarm do the following 1 Open the Config gt Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units pmian Setup i ieia Tool Ship Output and Time Buzzer On Off Antigrounding alarm Alarms V Target lost alarm Depth alarms v AIS lost alarm Depth below keel limit 4 0 m Morethan V Lessthan Apply Figure 172 Config gt Alarm Setup tab Alarms tab 2 Enter the value of the depth below keel limit to the Depth below keel limit field The measurement unit for the depth is set in the Config gt Units and Time tab 3 Check the More than or the Less than checkboxes both options can be set at the same time e More than the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is more than the set depth limit e Less than the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value
350. to Waypoint function do the following 1 Stop the voyage if you are in the route monitoring mode 2 Open the Route gt Go To tab Start Route cofo Route Export Voyage Planning Finder Import Set WP how Start Check route K7 Autopilot ON OFF WPT LAT WPT LON Figure 175 Route gt Go To tab 3 Press the Set WP button to switch to the waypoint plotting mode Plot the waypoint in the chart window or enter the waypoint coordinates in the WPT LAT and WPT LON fields 4 Release the Set WP button when pressed its name changes to Save to quit the waypoint plotting mode 5 If the system is connected to an autopilot check the Autopilot ON OFF checkbox and the ECDIS will start sending sentences in the APB format autopilot sentence B to your autopilot 6 To switch to the route monitoring mode monitoring of the route to the waypoint press the Start button To quit the route monitoring mode outpress the Start button when pressed its name changes to Stop 9301584 10 Page 163 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 To check the route from the own ship to the waypoint press the Check route button The route from your vessel to the waypoint will be checked in the same way as in the Route Planning tool two additional panels will appear the Dangers and the Cautions panels The check route function only works in the route monitoring mode 7 Autopilot ON OFF
351. to contact other similarly equipped boats using that boat s MMSI Number DSC allows two radios to communicate selectively with each other while excluding other receivers from using the signal DSC can report position information Display Base Level of information which cannot be removed from the ECDIS display consisting of information which is required at all times in all geographic areas and all circumstances It is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation Display Scale Ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground normalized and expressed as for example 1 10 000 Dongle Small hardware device that unlocks the ECDIS Dongle Number Similar to the Serial Number a Dongle Number is attached to the Dongle made up of 20 digits in the following convention 1234 123456 1234 123456 DR See Dead Reckoning Draft The extent to which a boat protrudes into water The draft of a boat may vary due to changes in weight and changes in water salinity Drift The cumulative effect of wind and current on the ship DSC See Digital Selective Calling 9301584 10 Ebb Current Ebb Movement of tidal current away from shore or down a tidal river or estuary Echo Sounder See Sounder Electronic Chart Display and Information System ECDIS A hardware software data marine navigation system that meets the specifications of the International Hydrographic Organization IHO An ECDIS 1s the on
352. to save the route To save the route under a different name press the Save as button enter the new name to the Save route as dialog and press OK si To plot waypoints of the route in the chart view do the following e Plot waypoint in the chart view Left click in the chart view A waypoint number 1 in an pp orange circle G will be plotted in the chart view Move the pointer and you will see a thin red line linking the point and the mouse pointer The line marker can be useful for checking the leg and the second waypoint position To plot the next waypoint left click in a new position in the chart view The second waypoint 2 will appear The next left click will plot the next waypoint and so on e Add waypoint to the waypoints table To add a waypoint to the route using the keyboard enter the waypoint latitude and longitude to the LAT and LON fields of the WPT table To do so Left click in the LAT field of the WPT table to start entering the latitude the 00 00 000 value will appear enter your value for the waypoint latitude using the keyboard Then enter the waypoint longitude to the LON field The waypoint will appear in the chart view in the set coordinates QP NOTE Waypoints are displayed in the chart view beginning with the 1 100 000 scale e Move waypoint To change the position of a plotted waypoint click with the left mouse button on the waypoint it will be captured by the mouse pointer Move the waypoint t
353. to the resize pointer T drag the panel up Auto Hide pins the panel down If the panel is not pinned down it is reduced so that to display only its tabs names after the mouse pointer is removed from the panel To pin the panel down press the Auto Hide button When the pin on the button is vertical the panel 1s pinned down when the pin is horizontal the auto hide mode is on and the panel collapses after you move the mouse pointer out of it Back to previous chart view restores the previous chart view coordinates and scale Close panel closes the panel x 4 9301584 10 Page 17 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software The buttons are located in the upper right corner of each panel Figure 1 Clear Highlight Restore Down Auto Hide Back and Close panel buttons 2 7 Hotkeys List The following hotkeys are used in the ECDIS F4 Set monitor to default settings F8 MOB mode On F9 Switch Standard All Other display types F12 Switch palettes Night Day Page up Zoom in Page down Zoom out Page 18 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 ECDIS SETUP 3 1 System Setup 3 1 1 Measurement Units and Time To set the measurement units for various values such as distance speed depth elevation and various dimensions use the options provided in the Config gt Units and Time tab In the tab you can also set the time parameters select the time zone you a
354. ttaches to a ship s steering mechanism to control the ship s bearing Azimuth Azimuth of a body is the arc of the horizon intercepted between the North or South point and the foot of the vertical circle passing through the body It is reckoned in degrees from either the North or South point clockwise entirely around the Horizon source Our Restless Tides Bathymetric Measurement of the depth contours and slopes of the floor of a body of water sea lake ocean or river obtained through topographic charting Beam Ship width 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software Bearing BRG The angle between the direction of the boat and the reference direction expressed in degrees with a notation of True or Magnetic Variation T or M Due north corresponds to 0 degrees east to 90 south to 180 and west to 270 For compass bearings the reference direction is magnetic North For true bearings the reference direction 1s true North Bearing from Ship to Cursor This data is an aid in route making and planning Bering from ship to cursor is expressed in degrees with a notation of True or Magnetic Variation Bookmark A saved combination of chart selection zoom level and position on the chart Created with the Set Bookmark command it may be returned to at any time with the Go to Bookmark command Bow The front of a ship Broadcast Notice to Mariner BNM See Local Notice to Mariners LNM
355. tton and move the mouse If you change the view of the chart zoom in zoom out or scroll the chart the 3D view will be changed automatically The 3D window can be closed and resized as a standard MS Windows window Page 54 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 5 6 Setting up Chart Display This chapter describes how to configure the chart display The settings described here configure the chart appearance and the content displayed in the chart view In addition to the chart display settings there is a set of navigational chart settings The navigational chart settings configure the chart display so that it would be more convenient to monitor the own ship navigation The navigational settings include chart orientation true and relative motions modes best scale mode and the display of lights sectors The settings are described in the chapter 7 5 Navigational Chart Settings 5 6 1 Chart Presentation Models There are three chart presentation models available for the presentation of the chart e C Map The presentation model is based on the INT1 standard e S 52 The presentation model is based on the IHO S 52 standard e S 52 Simplified The S 52 chart presentation model with simplified symbols for buoys and beacons The C Map presentation model is not based on official standards If this model is used in the chart view there is the Von standard chart presentation is used notice displayed in th
356. tton becomes active otherwise it s grayed 2 To view messages press the Show Received Messages button The Received Messages window will open where all messages from the AIS target are displayed f3 Received Messages X Figure 181 AIS messages Received Messages window 8 2 2 AIS Targets Display AIS targets can be displayed in the chart view Using the AIS targets display functionality you can evaluate the current situation at one glance To turn the display of AIS targets on or off left click on the AIS indicator If the display of AIS targets is off the AIS indicator is orange O if the display of AIS targets is on the AIS indicator is green AIS The activation of the AIS targets display depends on the targets distance and time from the own ship The activation distances and time are configured in the Config gt AIS tab si To configure the activation distances and time for AIS targets do the following 1 Open the Config gt AIS tab Alarm Anti Collision Own Input Units AIS System Setup Targeta Tool Ship Output and Time W Auto activation V Use own transmitter as source of position v Truescale symbol Distance to Dangerous Activation CPA TCPA to Dangerous os 0 500 NM 15 000 000 NM asados 0 500 NM min miaa AIS targets eee range AIS zones display 7500 0 OC 7500 00 NM Show AIS targets activation range Show Als danger range Past track Past track interval 30sec s
357. tual off position AIS targets visibility A symbol representing an active ATON off range position Selected ATON real virtual AIS targets visibility A symbol representing manual selection of any range AIS target for the display of detailed information in a separate data panel Lost ATON real virtual AIS targets visibility A symbol representing the last valid position of an range ATON before reception of data was interrupted AIS Search and Rescue Transmitters AIS SART Active AIS SART distance to activation A symbol representing an active AIS SART length of the velocity vector shows the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship s velocity vector Selected AIS SART Yes AIS targets visibility A symbol representing manual selection of any range AIS target for the display of detailed information in a separate data panel Lost AIS SART AIS targets visibility A symbol representing the last valid position of an range AIS SART before reception of data was interrupted All AIS Targets The target is not displayed Yes out of the AIS targets Targets are displayed only if they approach to the visibility range own ship closer than the AIS targets visibility range to avoid cluttering The target is not displayed any distance no comments no display no display 9301584 10 Page 171 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 8 3 ARPA and
358. uired test results e IEC 61174 ed 3 2008 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Electronic chart display and information system ECDIS Operational and performance requirements methods of testing and required test results 9301584 10 Page 9 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software IHO S 52 ed 5 1996 Specifications for chart content and display aspects of ECDIS IHO S 52 appendix 1 Guidance on updating the electronic navigational chart IHO S 52 appendix 2 Colour and symbol specifications for ECDIS IHO S 52 ANNEX A of APPENDIX 2 IHO ECDIS Presentation Library IHO S 52 APPENDIX 2 ADDENDUM TO ANNEX A PART I Users Manual Edition 3 4 2008 Paper based description of symbols for use on ECDIS IHO S 57 appendix B 1 2000 ENC product specification IHO S 63 ed 1 1 2008 IHO data protection scheme IHO CHART 1 datasets Page 10 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 ECDIS INTERFACE 2 1 Starting and Terminating the ECDIS To start the ECDIS application turn the system power on To terminate the application press the Close button in the upper right corner of the application window The termination of the application turns the system power off 2 2 Main Window The ECDIS starting window looks as follows North and Motion Chart Scale and Quick Alarm Condition Mode Indicator Indicators Panel Access Buttons Panel Indicat
359. uld become green CR The chart view is scrolled so that to display the own ship symbol in the chart view 2 To turn the navigation mode off left click on the Navigation mode indicator The indicator should become orange Nais The navigation mode turns off if you left click in the chart view while the navigation mode is on 7 5 2 Best Scale Mode When in the best scale mode the ECDIS displays the chart with the largest scale existing for the given region The best scale mode works only together with the navigation mode Bro turn the best scale mode on off do the following 1 To turn the best scale mode on left click on the Scale state indicator see chapter 2 3 Indicators Panel The indicator should become green and the indicator label should change to the Best scale in the chart view the chart with the best scale will be displayed 2 You can also turn the best scale mode on by ticking the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel 3 To turn the best scale mode off left click on the Scale state indicator The indicator should become orange 4 You can also turn the best scale mode off by clearing the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel 9301584 10 Page 151 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 7 5 3 Chart Display Palettes The ECDIS implements three color palettes The palettes are set to provide better conditions for viewing charts under va
360. unctionality is implemented to make it easier for you to evaluate the danger of collision of the own ship with other vessels located with external input devices The functionality is also meant to help you to calculate and carry out maneuvers for passing the vessels at safe distances The anti collision display functionality has two functions e To indicate that the own ship has approached another vessel to the user specified distance and time see chapter 8 5 4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits e To indicate the possibility of collision see chapter 8 5 5 Indication of Collision Risk 8 5 1 Theoretical Principles of the Anti collision Display Consider a collision scenario between own ship and an external target The vessels encounter geometry is plotted in Figure 187 The OOW can easily verify that the vessels have a potential point of collision PPC from visual observation i e aspect angle to target is unchanged or from radar observation i e relative motion of target echo towards the centre of own ship i i r 7 F li og 9 PPC s F i i k i F F w Fa k Fa k F k k k gn e w d w i 4 F a F r F hi F Me Pal iz F Ma Own Ship Target Figure 187 Example of encounter geometry for own ship and a target on collision course Page 176 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software It is easy to see
361. up Connection window you can configure protocols settings in the E Mail Parameters branch of the connection parameters tree Value Communication type E Mail SMTP POP3 Data center Europe K Timeout s 120 Attachment size Kb 1000 E Mail Parameters Automatic send receive v Check reply interval min 5 SMTP outgoing e mail Reply to address Server name Port User name Daana ve z Export settings Import settings OK Cancel Figure 111 Setup Connection window E Mail SMTP POP3 communication type gt E Mail Inbox via MAPD Automatic connection type If you set the E Mail Inbox via MAPI connection option the ECDIS will use the e mail program installed on your computer to send data requests and receive weather data files For the ECDIS to be able to use your e mail program the program should support MAPI Messaging API The ECDIS then processes received weather data and loads weather packages automatically gt E Mail Folder Send Recv Semiautomatic connection type In case you use the E Mail Folder Send Recv e mail connection option you need to set paths to two folders Send folder Send path and Receive folder Receive path Folders are set in the Folder Parameters branch of the connection parameters tree e Send folder Send path is the folder where data requests are saved as xm1 files The files have a predefined name format request xxxxx xml you are not allowed to change request file nam
362. ur Restless Tides Page 252 of 259 VMG See Velocity Made Good VRM See Variable Range Marker Waypoint A mark of which routes are made The ship when following a route steers by successive waypoints XTE See Cross Track Error Zoom To change the apparent scale of a chart in the chart view 9301584 10 Abbreviations ACK Acknowledgement AIS Automatic identification system ARPA Automatic radar plotting aid BRG Bearing BTW Bearing to Waypoint BWW Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint COG Course Over the Ground CP Control Point CPA Closest point of approach CS Conning Station DGPS Differential Global Positioning System D DIST Distance DPT Depth DR Dead reckoning DTG Distance to Go DWP Distance to Next Waypoint E East ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System 9301584 10 User Manual for DM800E ECDIS Application Software ECMWF European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasts ENC Electronic Navigation Chart EP Estimated position ERBL Electronic range and bearing line ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETD Estimated Time of Departure GC Great Circle GMDSS Global maritime distress and safety system GLONASS Global Navigation Satellite System GPS Global Positioning System GRIB GRIdded Binary HDG Heading HO Hydrographic office IHO International Hydrographic Organization IMO International Maritime Organization LAT Latitude
363. valuation The Figure 205 shows a traffic situation when own ship is on a direct collision course with the target as the tip of the speed vector lies on the CDL the red dashed line in the centre of the CDS Page 188 of 259 9301584 10 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS there is no collision risk and the CDS is not shaded The Figure 206 shows that own ship has made a course change to starboard and will therefore pass astern of the target with a distance slightly above the specified CPA limit t No official data available Refer to paper chart tte Sse Setup and Sonar Tool ship Output Anticollision ON OFF Vector Length min 12 Radius of CPA limit circle NM 1 0 TCPA Limit min 1 163967 x6 1 SHIP 16 51 03 2009 01 28 e 65 45 673 N 031 12 548 W esos 20 0 r ecos 017 0 Figure 206 Course change by the own ship to avoid collision An alternative evasive action by the own ship is a speed reduction here from 20 to 14 knots Figure 207 in order to achieve the specified minimum CPA distance with a minimum deviation from the original track line The third alternative is a combination of course and speed change i No official data available Refer to paper chart 9301584 10 Maximum CPA NM TCPA Limit min Target Vectors Apply Parameters 1 163967 16 1 SHIP 16 51 23 2009 01 28 a _ 65 45 775 N 031 12 489 W esos 1
364. vigation Aids to navigation tooltip Turns on the display of tooltips with information about aids to navigation The tooltips appear when the mouse pointer is over an aids to navigation object National text Turns on the display of object names in national languages in the chart if available The setting only works for the C Map presentation Mariner s notes Turns on the display of mariner s notes see chapter 6 3 Mariner Objects 3 The settings take effect immediately after they have been set 5 6 7 Other Settings Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the overloading One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view Chart elements that can be displayed selectively are divided into four groups depth elements text elements light sectors and other elements si To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group do the following l Open the Chart gt Chart Presentation gt Other settings tab In the tab there is a list of chart elements Chart Chart Mariner Manual Settings Presentation Objects Update Presentation Contours Depth settings Other settings Text settings Light sectors C MAF Plain borders INFORM symbol 52 Quality symbol Picture symbol Safety contour Safety depth Shallow contour Deep contour 10 0 v NOAA navaids Overscale id V ENC boundary Scale boundary
365. ving When the ship reaches a pre defined oii inside the im ae view it jumps backwards and the chart is redrawn M Ship in center Figure 163 Navi gt Navigation Data tab Ship Motion Mode section Ship Motion Mode The own ship redraw area in the True motion mode is defined automatically However you can set your own ship redraw area using the Ship Redraw Area function 9301584 10 Page 153 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 To set a new ship redraw area press the Set button in the Ship Redraw Area section An initial pre defined redraw area will appear in the chart view The area is indicated with a green internal and a red external boundary circles 3 The red boundary is the boundary where the ship will appear each time the screen 1s redrawn To configure the external red boundary use the upper slider in the Ship Redraw Area section 4 The green boundary is the internal limit of the ship redraw area When the ship reaches the boundary the screen 1s redrawn and the ship is brought back to the external boundary To configure the internal green boundary use the lower slider in the Ship Redraw Area section Figure 164 Navi gt Navigation data tab Ship Redraw Area section 5 After the ship redraw area has been set outpress the Set button to exit the ship redraw area setup mode si To turn on and setup the relative motion mode do the following 1 In the Navi gt Navigation Data tab
366. with the specified name see step 2 will be compiled or updated For details on the conversion process see chapter 4 5 3 Import S 57 to CM93v3 5 To close the Install Media window press the Close button 4 5 3 Import S 57 to CM93v3 The ECDIS provides the possibility to import data from the S 57 format to the CM93v3 format This function can be accessed from the Data gt Import S57 tab A IMPORTANT The S 57 Import functional module needs separate licensing For details on installing licenses see chapter 4 4 Licensing Software Modules ai D QP NOTE In case the S 57 data are protected using IHO data protection scheme S 63 cells permits should be installed before starting conversion of the data to the CM93v3 format S 57 data are available to the users as exchange sets containing datasets updates pictures textual descriptions and a catalog file with the description of the exchange set 9301584 10 Page 43 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software e aa import S 57 data to the CM93v3 data do the following 1 Connect the data storage device with the S 57 data to your system and open the Data gt Import S57 tab 2 Press the Find databases button The ECDIS will search for S 57 data on all removable data storage devices connected to the system All detected S 57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S 57 source data pane Dynamic Databases Auto Import fAfle x Licensing Updating S57 Dat
367. y position source drop down list dead reckoning DR 1s also on the list though it 1s not an external input device Navigation Own ship Dead LOP amp a ex Data past track and vector Reckoning Position Fix Ship Motion Mode Manual Center Position Heading Position Correction Relative Enable cata Poel Lat 0 000 Ship in center Sat Primary position source Lon 0 000 GPS2 Apply corrections Swap position sources Position Discrepancies Course Up Secondary position source les mise 0 262 NM manga Pri Man Route Up i Show secondary True scale ship image Figure 136 Navi gt Navigation Data tab Position Source section 9301584 10 Page 135 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 3 You can also set position sources in the Position Heading and Data sources panel To open the panel left click on the Position Source indicator Open the Position sources tab This tab is the same as the Position sources tab in the Navi gt Navigation Data tab and all actions in one are immediately repeated in the other 1 2000 x50 SHIP 19 59 14 2009 09 11 a Position Heading Data eS oO t sources sources sources 36 15 230 N AUTO 000 09 997 E soc 10 0 kn Primary position source GPS2 Swap position sources Secondary position source GPS1 W Show secondary 5951 WGS 84 Data not assessed Figure 137 Position sources tab 4 In case t
368. y Go Today Boomen H Overview Coastal Weather Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages Figure 102 Weather gt Weather Presentation Figure 103 Weather gt Weather Packages Easy Mode Download button Download button 2 Inthe Weather Download Request dialog you can add products to the request set products parameters remove products from the request set geographic areas for which forecasts are required set periods for which you need weather data and the time step of weather parameters readings Gi Weather Download Request amp Global ECMWF 150 km H Tropical Cyclones Forecast For 45 nex 2008 Download at 14 01 Total 19kb Save Request Load Request Send Request Cancel Figure 104 Weather Download Request dialog Custom request dialog 3 Set the data request add products from the Add new product drop down list select product parameters in the Products field set data coverage in the Coverage field select the forecast period in the Period field and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6 6 2 Easy Mode Setup and Download the Setup Easy Mode procedure 4 You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later To do so press the Save Request button in the Save As dialog indicate the locatio
369. y S63 User Permit dialog will open Chart Add Remove Licensing Dynamic Auto Import fl x Catalogue Database Licensing Updating 57 Database Name i Convert Install Media Copy user permit Apply S63 cell permits Apply SA Certificate 57 source data Processing Databases Turn off the errors report Show Log Find databases Figure 17 Data gt Import S57 tab 9301584 10 Page 39 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 In the Copy S63 User Permit dialog select a folder where to save the user permit file and press the Copy button The user permit will be saved to a USerPermit txt file Copy 563 User Permit x UserPermit Copy Cancel Figure 18 Copy S63 User Permit dialog 3 After the user permit is saved to a file you can send it to a Data Server together with the data request The Data Server generates individual data licenses using your user permit data S apply S 63 cell permits do the following 1 Open the Data gt Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button The Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog will open 2 In the folder tree select the folder where the cell permits file is stored The file name will be displayed in the pane to the right Select file with obtained Cell Permits for S63 data 2 ENC Licencing Test 2a Test 2b Test 2c Test 2d Test 2e Test 2f Test 2g EAE A O OE A F
370. y Standard Display Shallow pattern Safe depths Other settings Plain borders ENC boundary Chart boundary Scale boundary Lat Lon grid Aids to navigation tooltip ai i QP NOTE the parameter is mandatory for the display type when the display type is turned on the parameters are set automatically setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the Custom Base or Custom Standard the parameter is not mandatory for the display type when the display type is turned on the parameter is not set automatically but it remains set if it was set before setting or removing one of the parameters doesn t change the current display type the parameter is not mandatory for the display type when the display type is turned on the parameters are removed automatically setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the Custom Base or Custom Standard 66 33 Presentation parameters not mentioned in the table belong to the parameters group marked with si To set the Custom Display type do the following 1 Open the Chart gt Chart Settings tab 9301584 10 Page 57 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software 2 Inthe Display Type drop down list select the Custom option The list of object Display Type classes that you can select to be displayed will open n 3 Select the object classes you want to be displayed To select an object class e check th
371. y of weather data is on values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view 9301584 10 Page 119 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Rro configure the display of weather data do the following 1 Open the Weather gt Weather Presentation tab Using options from this tab you can turn on off the display of weather parameters select the type of weather symbols point line area select measurement units that will be used to display weather parameters set the time for the display of the weather forecast and turn on off animation of the weather forecast Weather Weather Weather Weather Presentation Easy Mode Presentation Alarm Area Time Series Packages oday S gt gt Dd Step atour z Meteo Parameters w Temperature Temperature in Celsius Wind vectors Speed in knots Precipitation Precipitation in millimeters wW Swell waves Height in meters Total waves Height in meters Legend lt lt Figure 114 Weather gt Weather Presentation tab 2 To turn on the display of a specified weather parameter in the chart view tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name in the Meteo Parameter column of the Meteo Parameters table To turn the display of the parameter off clear the checkbox You can also use options presented in the Weather Presentation Easy Mode tab t
372. ys hides the Electronic Range and Bearing Line in the 3D window Depth and coordinate scale frame Displays hides the frame with the values of the depth latitude and longitude coordinate scales Zoom in Zooms the 3D view in Zoom out Zooms the 3D view out 9301584 10 Page 53 of 259 User Manual for DMS00E ECDIS Application Software Z scale panel In the Z Scale panel you can adjust vertical scale for the best presentation of the surface The land surface and seabed surface scales are configured separately 1 3D Window Figure 33 3D Window Z scale panel The vertical scale with the value of 1 displayed in the field under the scale control slider in the highest position means that the vertical scale of the 3D view is the same as the chart scale The vertical scale with the value of 100 is 100 times as large as the chart scale Z colors panel In the Z colors panel you can select one of the three palettes for depth layers presentation The Show hide colored Z layers option see above must be switched on 3D Window x J Figure 34 3D Window Z colors panel Besides the 3D window control buttons you can arrange the 3D view by zooming it in zooming it out and rotating it To zoom the view in or out rotate the mouse wheel forward or backward respectively To rotate the view in the horizontal plane hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the view in the vertical plane hold the right mouse bu

User Manual for - Polaris Electronics A/S

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents